- Manuals
- Brands
- Mitsubishi
- Inverter
- A700
- Instruction Manual
Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual PDF
HEAD OFFICE:TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
FR-B, B3 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (Applied)
PRESSURE-RESISTANT, EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR DRIVING INVERTER
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER
PARAMETERS
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLINE
WIRING
(A700 SPECIFICATIONS)
FR-B-750 to 75K (200V CLASS) FR-B-750 to 110K (400V CLASS)
FR-B3-(N)400 to 37K FR-B3-(N)H400 to 37K Be sure to perform offline auto tuning in the motor running mode and operate with the advanced magnetic flux vector control when using the FR-B3 series.
Reduced torque type
Constant torque type (Standard or low acoustic noise)
IB-0600272ENG-A (0605)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
FR -B
, B 3
PRESSURE-RESISTANT, EXPLOSION-PROOF MOTOR DRIVING INVERTER IN
STR U
C TIO
N M
A N
U A
L (A pplied)
A
A-1
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
4. Additional Instructions Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
This Instruction Manual (applied) provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-B, B3 series inverters. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this instruction manual and the instruction manual (basic) [IB-0600271ENG] packed with the product carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.
This section is specifically about safety matters Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through instruction manual (basic) and appended documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety. 1. Electric Shock Prevention
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection.You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the operation panel indicator is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work.
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured.
Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is on.
Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may get an electric shock.
2. Fire Prevention Mount the inverter on an incombustible wall without holes, etc. Mounting it to or
near combustible material can cause a fire. If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power.
A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire. When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will turn off power when
an alarm signal is output. Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+, N/. This could cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal.
Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur. Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, burst,
damage, etc. may occur. Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, etc. Otherwise,
burst, damage, etc. may occur. While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter as it
is hot and you may get burnt.
(1) Transportation and installation
Since the inverter is non-explosion-proof, always install it in a non-hazardous place. Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended. Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the instruction manual. Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing. This can
result in breakdowns. When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may
fall off or fail. Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product. Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct. Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter. As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact. Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions. Otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
WARNING CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
E nv
iro nm
en t
Ambient temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing) Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing) Storage temperature -20C to +65C *1
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude, vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. 5.9m/s2 or less *2 (conforming to JIS C 60068-2-6)
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit. *2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 160K or more.
(2) Wiring Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor/radio
noise filter (capacitor type filter) on the inverter output side. The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
the direction of rotation of the motor. (3) Test operation and adjustment
For the FR-B3 series, operate with advanced magnetic flux vector control after performing offline auto tuning.
Before starting operation, confirm and adjust the parameters. A failure to do so may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation Since this inverter is used in combination with the Mitsubishi inverter-driven,
pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor, note the driven motor used with the inverter.
Note that this inverter cannot be used with the Mitsubishi increased-safety, explosion-proof motor.
When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
The key is valid only when the appropriate function setting (refer to page 177 ) has been made. Prepare an emergency stop circuit (power off, mechanical brake operation for an emergency stop, etc.) and switch separately.
Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the inverter as well as equipment.
Do not modify the equipment. Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor from overheating.
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/ stopping of the inverter.
Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
When parameter clear or all clear is performed, reset the required parameters before starting operations. Each parameter returns to the initial value.
The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure safety.
Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspection and test operation.
For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch nearby metal before touching this product to eliminate static electricity from your body.
(5) Emergency stop Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails. When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short
circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
Treat as industrial waste.
General instructions Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter in this status. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
I
1 OUTLINE 1
1.1 Product checking and parts identification ........................................................ 2
1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices.......................................................................... 3 1.2.1 Peripheral devices ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover.................................. 6
1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ............................................. 8 1.4.1 Inverter installation environment................................................................................................ 8
1.4.2 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure............................................................................ 10
1.4.3 Inverter placement................................................................................................................... 10
2 WIRING 13
2.1 Wiring.................................................................................................................. 14 2.1.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................. 14
2.1.2 EMC filter................................................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications ................................................................. 16 2.2.1 Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 16
2.2.2 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring. ........ 16
2.2.3 Cables and wiring length ......................................................................................................... 20
2.2.4 When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply (separate power) ..................................................................................... 24
2.3 Control circuit specifications ........................................................................... 26 2.3.1 Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 26
2.3.2 Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 29
2.3.3 Control circuit terminal layout .................................................................................................. 31
2.3.4 Wiring instructions ................................................................................................................... 32
2.3.5 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable ............................................ 33
2.3.6 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 33
2.3.7 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 33
2.4 Connection of stand-alone option units .......................................................... 34 2.4.1 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)(FR-B-75K or more) ....................................... 34
2.4.2 Connection of the high power factor converter (MT-HC)(FR-B-75K or more) ......................... 36
2.4.3 Connection of power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or more) .................................... 37
2.4.4 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 37
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 39
CONTENTS
II
C on
te nt
3.1 Noise and leakage currents .............................................................................. 40 3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures ................................................................................. 40
3.1.2 Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques ...................................................... 42
3.1.3 Power supply harmonics ......................................................................................................... 44
3.1.4 Harmonic suppression guideline ............................................................................................. 45
3.2 Installation of a reactor ..................................................................................... 48
3.3 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC).......................................................... 48
3.4 Precautions for use of the inverter .................................................................. 49
4 PARAMETERS 51
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07) ............................................................................... 52 4.1.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07).................................................................................. 52
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 53
4.1.3 Change the parameter setting value ....................................................................................... 54
4.1.4 Setting dial push ...................................................................................................................... 54
4.2 Parameter List .................................................................................................... 55 4.2.1 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................... 55
4.3 Control mode..................................................................................................... 67
4.4 Before operating the FR-B3 series.................................................................. 68 4.4.1 Setting the FR-B3 series (advanced magnetic flux vector control) (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89 ) .. 68
4.4.2 Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 684, Pr. 859) .................... 70
4.5 Adjust the output torque of the motor (current) ............................................ 74 4.5.1 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 114, Pr. 115,
Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 858, Pr. 868) ................................................. 74
4.6 Limit the output frequency............................................................................... 79 4.6.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ........................................................................... 79
4.6.2 Avoid mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) .............................. 80
4.7 Frequency setting by external terminals ........................................................ 81 4.7.1 Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) ................. 81
4.7.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ................................................................................................. 83
4.7.3 Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28)............................................. 85
4.7.4 Remote setting function (Pr. 59)............................................................................................. 85
4.8 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern.................................................................... 88
4.8.1 Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111) .............................................................................................. 88
III
4.8.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571) ........................................... 90
4.8.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383, Pr. 516 to Pr. 519) .................................................................................................................. 91
4.8.4 Shortest acceleraiton/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292, Pr. 293) ............................. 94
4.9 Selection and protection of a motor ............................................................... 96 4.9.1 Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9) ............................. 96
4.9.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71) ............................................................................................................ 99
4.10 Motor brake and stop operation .................................................................... 100 4.10.1 DC injection brake and zero speed control, servo lock (X13 signal, Pr. 10 to Pr. 12) .......... 100
4.10.2 Selection of regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) (75K or more) ............................................ 102
4.10.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250) ........................................................................................................ 104
4.10.4 Stop-on contact control function (Pr. 6, Pr. 48, Pr. 270, Pr. 275) ........................................ 105
4.10.5 Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, Pr. 292)......................................................... 108
4.10.6 Orientation control (Pr. 350 to Pr. 366, Pr. 369) ................................................................... 111
4.11 Function assignment of external terminal and control ............................... 118 4.11.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189) ........................................................... 118
4.11.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)............................................................... 121
4.11.3 Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection signal (RT) and third function selection signal (X9) (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr. 155)....................................... 122
4.11.4 Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) ..................................................... 123
4.11.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)......................................................... 125
4.11.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 , FU3, LS signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116, Pr. 865) .......................... 130
4.11.7 Output current detection function (Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) .............................................. 132
4.11.8 Detection of output torque (TU signal, Pr. 864) .................................................................... 133
4.11.9 Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) .................................................... 134
4.12 Monitor display and monitor output signal .................................................. 135 4.12.1 DU/PU, FM, AM terminal monitor display selection (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170,
Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891) .......................................................................... 137
4.12.2 Reference of the terminal FM (pulse train output) and AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 291, Pr. 866, Pr. 867) ................................................................. 142
4.12.3 Terminal FM, AM calibration (Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901))................. 145
4.13 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure..... 148 4.13.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)............................................................. 148
4.13.2 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294 ) .................... 152
4.14 Operation setting at alarm occurrence ......................................................... 155
IV
C on
te nt
4.14.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ................................................................................ 155
4.14.2 Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76) .................................................................................... 157
4.14.3 Input/output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) ........................................ 158
4.14.4 Overspeed detection (Pr. 374) ............................................................................................. 158
4.14.5 Encoder signal loss detection (Pr. 376)................................................................................ 158
4.14.6 Fault definition (Pr. 875) ....................................................................................................... 159
4.15 Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor ................................. 160 4.15.1 Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899) .......................................................................... 160
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) ................................... 165 4.16.1 Function assignment of analog input terminal (Pr. 858, Pr. 868) ......................................... 165
4.16.2 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)................................................................................ 166
4.16.3 Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253) ............................... 169
4.16.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74, Pr. 849) ............................... 171
4.16.5 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905)) ........................................................ 172
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction ....................... 177 4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ............................... 177
4.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77) ........................................................................................ 179
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ..................................................................... 180
4.17.4 Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174) .......... 180
4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location .................................. 182 4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)........................................................................................ 182
4.18.2 Operation mode at power on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) ..................................................................... 190
4.18.3 Operation command source and speed command source during communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551).............................................. 191
4.19 Communication operation and setting ......................................................... 196 4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector ............................................................................ 196
4.19.2 Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals ...................................................................... 198
4.19.3 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)...................................................... 201
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ............................................................. 202
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ................................................. 203
4.19.6 Modbus-RTU communication specifications (Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr.539, Pr. 549)............................................................. 214
4.20 Special operation and frequency control ..................................................... 228 4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) .............................................................. 228
4.20.2 Load torque high speed frequency control (Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274) ........................ 236
4.20.3 Droop control (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288) ....................................................................................... 238
V
4.20.4 Frequency setting by pulse train input (Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386)..................................... 239
4.20.5 Encoder feedback control (Pr. 144, Pr. 285, Pr. 359, Pr. 367 to Pr. 369) ........................... 242
4.20.6 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886)............................................ 244
4.21 Useful functions.............................................................................................. 246 4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ............................................................................. 246
4.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)................................................... 247
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) ......................................................................... 249
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ................................................... 250
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ........................................................................................ 252
4.22 Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel ...................................... 253 4.22.1 PU display language selection (Pr. 145) .............................................................................. 253
4.22.2 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161) ........................... 253
4.22.3 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)........................................................................................................ 255
4.22.4 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ......................................................................................... 255
4.23 Parameter clear ............................................................................................... 256
4.24 All parameter clear.......................................................................................... 257
4.25 Parameter copy and parameter verification ................................................. 258 4.25.1 Parameter copy .................................................................................................................... 258
4.25.2 Parameter verification........................................................................................................... 259
4.26 Check and clear of the alarm history ............................................................ 260
5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS 263
5.1 Reset method of protective function ............................................................. 264
5.2 List of alarm display ........................................................................................ 265
5.3 Causes and corrective actions ....................................................................... 266
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ........................... 278
5.5 Check first when you have troubles .............................................................. 279 5.5.1 Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 279
5.5.2 Motor generates abnormal noise........................................................................................... 279
5.5.3 Motor generates heat abnormally.......................................................................................... 279
5.5.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction ........................................................................................ 279
5.5.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting.................................................................................... 280
5.5.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth................................................................................ 280
5.5.7 Motor current is large............................................................................................................. 280
5.5.8 Speed does not increase....................................................................................................... 280
VI
C on
te nt
5.5.9 Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 280
5.5.10 Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 280
5.5.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 281
5.5.12 POWER lamp is not lit ........................................................................................................... 281
5.5.13 Parameter write cannot be performed ................................................................................... 281
6 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 283
6.1 Inspection item................................................................................................. 284 6.1.1 Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 284
6.1.2 Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 284
6.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection................................................................................................. 285
6.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 286
6.1.5 Checking the inverter and converter modules ....................................................................... 286
6.1.6 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 287
6.1.7 Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 287
6.1.8 Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 290
6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers ..................... 291 6.2.1 Measurement of powers ........................................................................................................ 293
6.2.2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT............................................................................... 293
6.2.3 Measurement of currents....................................................................................................... 294
6.2.4 Use of CT and transducer ..................................................................................................... 294
6.2.5 Measurement of inverter input power factor .......................................................................... 294
6.2.6 Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ - N/-) ................................. 295
6.2.7 Measurement of inverter output frequency............................................................................ 295
6.2.8 Insulation resistance test using megger ................................................................................ 295
6.2.9 Pressure test ......................................................................................................................... 295
7 SPECIFICATIONS 297
7.1 FR-B Series Specifications ............................................................................. 298 7.1.1 FR-B series ratings................................................................................................................ 298
7.1.2 FR-B series common specifications ...................................................................................... 299
7.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications ........................................................................... 300 7.2.1 FR-B3 series ratings.............................................................................................................. 300
7.2.2 FR-B3 series common specifications .................................................................................... 301
7.3 Outline dimension drawings........................................................................... 302 7.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 302
VII
APPENDICES 307
Appendix 1 For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter ................................................................................................ 308
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-B,B3 series (A500 specifications) ....................................... 308
Appendix 2 Control mode-based parameter (function) correspondence table and instruction code list .......................................................... 310
1
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
1 OUTLINE
This chapter describes the basic "OUTLINE" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
1.1 Product checking and parts identification................2 1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices...............................3 1.3 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front
cover .......................................................................6 1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design .....8
FR-PU07) Inverter ...................................Mitsubishi, pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor
driving inverter FR-B,B3..................................Mitsubishi, pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor
driving inverter Pr. ...........................................Parameter Number PU operation...........................Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07). External operation ..................Operation using the control circuit signals Combined operation ...............Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) and external operation. Explosion-proof motor ...........XF-(N)E, XF-TH, XF-(N)ECA1,2
countries. DeviceNetTM is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender
Association, Inc.). Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Harmonic suppression guideline All models of general-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are convered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumer who receive high voltage or special high voltage" (For further details, refer to page 45)
2
Product checking and parts identification
1.1 Product checking and parts identification Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
REMARKS For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 6.
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
Front cover
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
Control circuit terminal block
AU/PTC switchover switch
Main circuit terminal block
Power lamp Lit when the control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied with power.
Cooling fan
PU connectorRS-485 terminals
Connector for plug-in option connection (Refer to the instruction manual of options.)
Alarm lamp Lit when the inverter is in the alarm status (major fault).
Capacity plate
Inverter type Serial number
Capacity plate
Rating plate
Combed shaped wiring cover
Voltage/current input switch
Charge lamp Lit when power is supplied to the main circuit
FR- B - 750
Indicate capacity(kW)
Symbol Inverter Capacity
Indicate capacity(W)
5.5K to 110K
750 to 3700
Indicate capacity(kW)
Symbol Voltage Class
Indicate capacity(W)
5.5K to 37K
750 to 3700
FR B3- - - 750N H
400V Class
Voltage Class
200V Class
H
None
Symbol
Low noise
Symbol Noise
Standard
N
None
As the name of the FR-B series does not include a symbol indicating voltage class, check the voltage class with the input rating on the rating plate.
FR-B-3700
Inverter Type
Rating plate Inverter type
Input rating Output rating
Serial number
FR-B-3700 Applied motor
capacity
(Refer to page 28)
(Refer to page 52)
(Refer to page 15)
(Refer to page 16)
(Refer to page 288)
(Refer to page 198)
(Refer to page 26)
(Refer to the Instruction Manual (applied).)
Accessory DC reactor supplied (75K or more) Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (30K or more)
M8 two pieces
(Refer to page 19)
(Refer to page 16)
(Refer to page 6)
(Refer to page 14)
3
Inverter and peripheral devices
1
O U
TL IN
E
1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices
CAUTION Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the
inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them. Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference. (Refer to page 15.)
Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
Noise filter
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Motor
Devices connected to the output
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
Install a noise filter to reduce
the electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz.
A wire should be wound 4T at
a maximum.
Power supply harmonics can be greatly suppressed. Install this as required.
Great braking capability is obtained. Install this as required. The regenerative braking
capability of the inverter can be exhibited fully. Install this as required.
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
earth leakage current breaker (ELB),
fuse
The breaker must be selected carefully
since an in-rush current flows in the inverter
at power on.
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
cause the inverter life to be shorten.
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option)
Reactors (option) must be used when power
harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a
large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors. Select the reactor according to the model.
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P1P/+ N/-P/+ U WV
High power factor converter
(MT-HC*)
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC*)
Resistor unit
(FR-BR, MT-BR5*)
Brake unit
(FR-BU, MT-BU5*)
to the 55K or less.
Noise filter
(FR-BLF)
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the
motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise
from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended
to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter.
Remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1
to connect the DC reactor
The 55K or less has a built-in common mode core.
For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
* Compatible with the FR-B-75K or more.
(Refer to page 298)
(Refer to page 4)
(Refer to page 48)
(Refer to page 48 )
Inverter (FR-B,B3) The life of the inverter is influenced by ambient temperature. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 8) Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit to protect them from noise.(Refer to page 14) Refer to page 15 for the built-in EMC filter.
4
Inverter and peripheral devices
1.2.1 Peripheral devices
Check the motor capacity of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Motor Output (kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection FR-B FR-B3 without with without with
0.4 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)400 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.75 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)750 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 1.5 FR-B-1500 FR-B3-(N)1500 30AF 15A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 2.2 FR-B-2200 FR-B3-(N)2200 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 3.7 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)3700 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, N21 S-N10 5.5 FR-B-5.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N25 S-N20, N21 7.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)7.5K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N25 11 FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K 100AF 75A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N35 15 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)15K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
18.5 FR-B3-(N)18.5K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)22K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65 30 FR-B-30K FR-B3-(N)30K 225AF 225A 225AF 175A S-N95 S-N80 37 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)37K 400AF 250A 225AF 225A S-N150 S-N125 45 FR-B-45K 400AF 300A 400AF 300A S-N180 S-N150 55 FR-B-55K 400AF 400A 400AF 350A S-N220 S-N180 75 FR-B-75K 400AF 400A S-N300
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter.
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select the MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM
5
Inverter and peripheral devices
1
O U
TL IN
E
400V class
Motor Output (kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection FR-B FR-B3 without with without with
0.4 FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)H400
30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.75 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10 1.5 FR-B-1500 FR-B3-(N)H1500 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 2.2 FR-B-2200 FR-B3-(N)H2200 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10 3.7 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)H3700 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10 5.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H5.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 20A S-N20 S-N11, N12 7.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H7.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20 S-N20 11 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H11K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N20 S-N20 15 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H15K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N20
18.5 FR-B3-(N)H18.5K 100AF 75A 100AF 60A S-N25 S-N25 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H22K 100AF 100A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N25 30 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H30K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50 37 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H37K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50 45 FR-B-55K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65 55 FR-B-55K 225AF 200A 225AF 175A S-N80 S-N80 75 FR-B-75K 225AF 225A S-N95 90 FR-B-90K 225AF 225A S-N150 110 FR-B-110K 225AF 225A S-N180
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter.
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select the MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM
6
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
1.3 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel. (These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the operation panel.
22K or less Removal
Reinstallation
Installation hook
Front cover Front cover
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover Front cover
Front cover
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover against the inverter. (Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
3) Tighten the installation screws and fix the front cover.
7
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
1
O U
TL IN
E
30K or more Removal
Reinstallation
CAUTION 1. Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover. 2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front
cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
Front cover 2
Front cover 1
Installation hook
1) Remove installation screws on the front cover 1 to remove the front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover 2.
3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to remove by pushing an installation hook on the right side using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover 2 Front cover 2
Front cover 2 Front cover 1
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the front cover 2 against the inverter. (Although installation can be done with the operation panel mounted, make sure that a connector is securely fixed.)
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the installation screws.
4) Fix the front cover 1 with the installation screws.
REMARKS For the FR-B-55K(200V class) or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.
8
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design When an inverter enclosure is to be designed and manufactured, heat generated by contained equipment, etc., the environment of an operating place, and others must be fully considered to determine the enclosure structure, size and equipment layout. The inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of operation, operate the inverter in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.
1.4.1 Inverter installation environment As the inverter installation enviromnet should satisfiy the standard specifications indicated in the following table, operation in any place that does not meet these conditions not only deteriorates the performance and life of the inverter, but also causes a failure. Refer to the following points and take adequate measures.
(1) Temperature The permissible ambient temperature of the inverter is between -10C and +50C. Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following measures so that the ambient temperature of the inverter falls within the specified range. 1)Measures against high temperature
Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 10.) Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electrical chamber. Block direct sunlight. Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source. Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.
2)Measures against low temperature Provide a space heater in the enclosure. Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)
3)Sudden temperature changes Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly. Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner. If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.
(2) Humidity Normally operate the inverter within the 45 to 90% range of the ambient humidity. Too high humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may produce a spatial electrical breakdown. The insulation distance specified in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is defined as humidity 45 to 85%. 1)Measures against high humidity
Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent. Take dry air into the enclosure from outside. Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
2)Measures against low humidity What is important in fitting or inspection of the unit in this status is to discharge your body (static electricity) beforehand and keep your body from contact with the parts and patterns, besides blowing air of proper humidity into the enclosure from outside.
3)Measures against condensation Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside- air temperature changes suddenly. Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion. Take the measures against high humidity in 1). Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)
Environmental standard specifications of inverter Item Description
Ambient temperature -10 to +50C (non-freezing) Ambient humidity 90% RH maximum (non-condensing)
Atmosphere Free from corrosive and explosive gases, dust and dirt Maximum Altitude 1,000m or less
Vibration 5.9m/s2 or less (JIS C 60068-2-6 compliant)
9
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
O U
TL IN
E
(3) Dust, dirt, oil mist Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points, reduced insulation or reduced cooling effect due to moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to clogged filter. In the atmosphere where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in a short time. Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
Countermeasures Place in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 10.) Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure pressure higher than the outside-air pressure.
(4) Corrosive gas, salt damage If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the relays and switches will result in poor contact. In such places, take the measures given in Section (3).
(5) Explosive, flammable gases As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.
(6) Highland Use the inverter at the altitude of within 1000m. If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric strength.
(7) Vibration, impact
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9m/s2 at 10 to 55Hz frequency and 1mm amplitude as specified in JIS C 60068-2-6. Vibration or impact, if less than the specified value, applied for a long time may make the mechanism loose or cause poor contact to the connectors. Especially when impact is imposed repeatedly, caution must be taken as the part pins are likely to break.
Countermeasures Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators. Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance. Install the enclosure away from sources of vibration.
10
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1.4.2 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure
From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.) and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter. The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method. 1) Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (Totally enclosed type) 2) Cooling by heat sink (Aluminum fin, etc.) 3) Cooling by ventilation (Forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type) 4) Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (Heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
1.4.3 Inverter placement
(1) Installation of the Inverter
Cooling System Enclosure Structure Comment
Natural cooling
Natural ventilation (Enclosed, open type)
Low in cost and generally used, but the enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity increases. For relatively small capacities.
Natural ventilation (Totally enclosed type)
Being a totally enclosed type, the most appropriate for hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The enclosure size increases depending on the inverter capacity.
Forced cooling
Heatsink cooling Having restrictions on the heatsink mounting position and area, and designed for relative small capacities.
Forced ventilation For general indoor installation. Appropriate for enclosure downsizing and cost reduction, and often used.
Heat pipe Totally enclosed type for enclosure downsizing.
Installation on the enclosure 22K or less 30K or more
INV
INV
INV
Heatsink
INV
INV
Heat pipe
CAUTION When encasing multiple inverters, install them in parallel as a cooling measure. Install the inverter vertically.
* Refer to the clearances on the next page.
Vertical
*
11
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1
O U
TL IN
E
(2) Clearances around the inverter To ensure ease of heat dissipation and maintenance, leave at least the shown clearances around the inverter. At least the following clearances are required under the inverter as a wiring space, and above the inverter as a heat dissipation space.
(3) Inverter mounting orientation Mount the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.
(4) Above the inverter Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be heat resistant.
(5) Arrangement of multiple inverters
(6) Placement of ventilation fan and inverter
When multiple inverters are placed in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the right figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides since heat from the bottom inverters can increase the temperatures in the top inverters, causing inverter failures.
When mounting multiple inverters, fully take caution not to make the ambient temperature of the inverter higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size.
Arrangement of multiple inverters
Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When intalling a ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)
Placement of ventilation fan and inverter
ClearancesAmbient temperature and humidity
Measurement position
Measurement position
Inverter
Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures.
55K or less 75K or more
5cm 5cm
5cm
10cm or more 20cm or more
20cm or more10cm or more
5cm or more *
5cm or more *
10cm or more
10cm or more
Temperature: -10C to 50C Ambient humidity: 90% RH maximum
(front)
*1cm or more for 3700 or less
Clearances (side)
Inverter5cm
or more
Guide Guide
Enclosure Enclosure
Guide
(a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement
Inverter
InverterInverterInverter Inverter
Inverter
Inverter Inverter
12
MEMO
13
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
2 WIRING
This chapter describes the basic "WIRING" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
2.1 Wiring ......................................................................14 2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications..........................16 2.3 Control circuit specifications....................................26 2.4 Connection of stand-alone option units ...................34
14
Wiring
2.1 Wiring 2.1.1 Terminal connection diagram
CAUTION It is mandatory to use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor with the inverter which has been approved for
combination by the Labor Ministry's explosion-proof certification. Therefore, always use the Mitsubishi pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor in combination with its approved driving inverter.
To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables. After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
Set the voltage/current input switch in right position. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
*5. Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V) and ON to select current input (4 to 200mA)
R/L1 S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
PC
10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2 3
1
1
4
FM
SD
Jumper
C1
B1
A1
U V
W
P1
+ -
AM
5 0 to 10VDC
*1
*8
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
MC
Main circuit
Control circuit
C2
B2
A2
IM
0 to 20mADC
AU
PTC
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
SG GND
S IN
K
S O
U R
C E
*4
*3
*5
*10
STF
STR
STOP
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
(+) (-)
5
ON
OFF
VCC
(+) (-)
5V
*10. FM terminal can be used for pulse train output of open collector output using Pr.291.
*2 Earth (Ground)
*8.The FR-B-750, FR-B3(N)450,750 are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always on)
R
PX PR N/-P/+
*3. JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. Use Pr.291 to select JOG/pulse.
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Sink logic
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB
Jumper
Earth (Ground)
EMC filter ON/OFF connecter
Earth (Ground)
24VDC power supply (Common for external power supply transistor)
selected
selected0 to 5VDC *5
4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC 0 to 10VDC
selected *5
Option connector 1
Option connector 2
Option connector 3
Connector for plug-in option connection
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
Frequency setting potentiometer
1/2W1k
*6
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) Forward rotation
start Reverse rotation
start
Start self- holding selection
Terminal functions vary with the input terminal assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Multi-speed selection
Jog mode
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset
Terminal 4 input selection (Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common
PU connector
Terminating resistor
Data reception
Data transmission
RS-485 terminals
(+)
(-) (0 to 10VDC) Analog signal output
Moving-coil type 1mA full-scale
(Frequency meter, etc.) Indicator
Calibration resistor *9
Open collector output common Sink/source common
Frequency detection
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous power failure
Overload
Terminal functions vary with the output terminal assignment (Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Open collector output
(Permissible load current 100mA)
Relay output 2
Relay output 1 (Alarm output)
Terminal functions vary with the output terminal assignment (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Relay output
*4. AU terminal can be used as PTC input terminal.
*2. To supply power to the control circuit separately, remove the jumper across R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*9. It is not necessary when calibrating the indicator from the operation panel.
*6. It is recommended to use 2W1k when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
Jumper
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
ON 4 2
OFF
Voltage/current input switch
*5
Auxiliary input
Terminal 4 input
(Current input)
Explosion-proof motor
24V
Inrush current limit circuit
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL) Be sure to connect the DC reactor supplied with the 75K or more. When a DC reactor is connected to the 55K or less, remove the jumper across P1-P/+.
Brake unit (Option)
CN8 *7
*7. A CN8 connector is provided with the 75K or more.
(Refer to page 166)
(Refer to page 118)
(Refer to page 125)
(Refer to page 125)
15
Wiring
2
W IR
IN G
2.1.2 EMC filter This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode core. The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter. The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF). To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position. The input side zero-phase reactor, built-in the 55K or less inverter, is always valid regardless of on/off of the EMC filter on/off connector.
The FR-B-750(200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, (N)750 are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (The EMC filter is always valid.)
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is off, wait for
at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. (Refer to page 6.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely. (If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.)
CAUTION Fit the connector to either ON or OFF. Enabling (turning on) the EMC filter increase leakage current. (Refer to page 41)
WARNING While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFFEMC filter ON EMC filter ON EMC filter ON (initial setting) (initial setting) (initial setting)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
VU W
3700 or less 5.5K, 7.5K 11K or more
FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V/400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H)1500 to 3700
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V class) FR-B-7.5K (400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
FR-B-11K(200V class) FR-B-15K(400V class) FR-B3-(N)11K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15k
FR-B-15K, 22K(200V class) FR-B-22K(400V class) FR-B3-(N)15k,22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5k,22k
FR-B-30K or more (200V class) FR-B-37K or more (400V class) FR-B3-(N)(H) 30K or more
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab With tab disengaged, pull up connector straight.
16
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications 2.2.1 Specification of main circuit terminal
2.2.2 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring.
200V class
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Description
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC power input Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1.
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a pressure-resistant, explosion-prrof motor.
R1/L11, S1/L21
Power supply for control circuit
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the alarm display and alarm output or when using the high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1, remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 and apply external power to these terminals. Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may damage the inverter. The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power (R/ L1, S/L2, T/L3) is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) is off. 15K or less : 60VA, 18.5K or more : 80VA
P/+, PR 22K or less Keep these terminals open.
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU and MT-BU5)*1, high power factor converter (MT-HC)*1 or power regeneration converter (MT-RC)*1.
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection
For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and connect the DC reactor. (For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied as standard.)
PR, PX Built-in brake circuit connection
When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (initial status), the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for the 7.5K or less.)
Earth (ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
CAUTION *1 Supports capacities of the FR-B-75K or more.
FR-B-750 FR-B3-(N)400, 750
FR-B-1500, 2200, 3700 FR-B3-(N)1500, 2200, 3700
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+
PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
As this is an inside cover fixing screw, do not remove it.
Jumper Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM Charge lamp
Jumper Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Power supply
Explosion-proof motor
17
Main circuit terminal specifications
2
W IR
IN G
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K, 7.5K
* Screw size of terminal R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, and PX is M4.
FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K
FR-B-15K, 22K FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K, 37K, 45K FR-B3-(N)30K, 37K
FR-B-55K FR-B-75K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Jumper Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
* * *
*
Explosion- proof motor
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion-proof motor
Screw size (15K:M6, 18.5K/22K:M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
Explosion- proof motor
Screw size (30K:M6, 37K/45K:M8)
Screw size (30K:M8, 37K/45K:M10)
Power supply
IM Screw size (M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
Screw size (M12)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
Explosion-proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M12)
Screw size (M10)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
DC reactor Explosion-proof motor
18
Main circuit terminal specifications
400V class FR-B-750 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700
FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H5.5K 7.5K
FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K
FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM Charge lamp
Jumper Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Power supply
Explosion-proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M4)
Jumper Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion- proof motor
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM Explosion- proof motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Explosion-proof motor
19
Main circuit terminal specifications
2
W IR
IN G
FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H30K, 37K
FR-B-55K
FR-B-75K, 90K FR-B-110K
CAUTION The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Never connect the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter.
Doing so will damage the inverter. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
Handling of the wiring cover (FR-B-15K,22K(200V), FR-B-22K(400V), FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, 22K, FR-B3-(N)H 18.5K, 22K) For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size(M4)
Power supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Explosion- proof motor
Screw size (30K: M6, 37K/45K: M8)
Screw size (30K: M6, 37K/45K: M8)
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp Screw size (M4)
Power supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M8) Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8)
Screw size (M8)
Explosion- proof motor
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
DC reactor
Screw size (M4)
Power supply
Jumper
Charge lamp
P/+
Screw size (M10)
Screw size(M10)
Explosion-proof motor
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M10)
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
Power supply DC reactor
Screw size (M10)
Explosion-proof motor
CAUTION Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more), protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type (IP00).
20
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2.3 Cables and wiring length (1) Applied cable size Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m. 200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Applicable Inverter Type Terminal Screw Size *2
Tightening Torque Nm
Crimping Terminal
Cable Sizes HIV, etc. (mm2) *1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1 Earth
(Ground) cable
FR-B FR-B3
FR-B-750 to 2200 FR-B3-(N)400 to 2200 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 FR-B-3700 FR-B3-(N)3700 M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 FR-B-5.5K FR-B3-(N)5.5K M4-M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)7.5K M4-M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 14 FR-B-11K FR-B3-(N)11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 14 FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)15K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14
- FR-B3-(N)18.5K M8-M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)22K M8-M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 FR-B-30K FR-B3-(N)30K M8-M6 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 38 FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)37K M10-M8 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 FR-B-45K - M10-M8 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 60 FR-B-55K - M12-M8 24.5 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 60 FR-B-75K - M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 *1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding). For the 5.5K and 7.5K, screw sizes are different (R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, PX - R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding)). For the 18.5K or more, screw sizes are different. (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W - a screw for earthing (grounding))
21
Main circuit terminal specifications
2
W IR
IN G
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
line voltage drop [V]=
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range.
Applicable Inverter Type Terminal Screw Size *2
Tightening Torque Nm
Crimping Terminal
Cable Sizes HIV, etc. (mm2) *1
FR-B FR-B3 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1 Earth
(Ground) Cable
FR-B-750 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700 M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 - FR-B3-(N)H5.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5
FR-B-7.5K FR-B3-(N)H7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 - FR-B3-(N)H11K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 8
FR-B-15K FR-B3-(N)H15K M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 8 - FR-B3-(N)H18.5K M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 14
FR-B-22K FR-B3-(N)H22K M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 - FR-B3-(N)H30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14
FR-B-37K FR-B3-(N)H37K M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 FR-B-55K - M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 FR-B-75K - M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 38 FR-B-90K - M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 38 FR-B-110K - M10-M12 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 *1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less. For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding). For the 110K , screw sizes are different (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding) - P/+ for option connection)
CAUTION Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction. A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
3 wire resistance[m/m] wiring distance[m] current[A]
1000
22
Main circuit terminal specifications
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding) Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter. 1)Purpose of earthing (grounding)
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use. An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case. The purpose of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it. To avoid the influence of external noises, this earthing (grounding) is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
2)Earthing (grounding) methods and earthing (grounding) work As described previously, earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noise-affected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the following work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from entering the malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding): (a) Where possible, use independent earthing (grounding) for the inverter. If independent earthing (grounding) (I)
is impossible, use joint earthing (grounding) (II) where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing (grounding) point. Joint earthing (grounding) as in (III) must be avoided as the inverter is connected with the other equipment by a common earth (ground) cable. Also a leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the earth (ground) cables of the inverter and inverter-driven motor. Therefore, they must use the independent earthing (grounding) method and be separated from the earthing (grounding) of equipment sensitive to the aforementioned noises. In a tall building, it will be a good policy to use the noise malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding) with steel frames and carry out electric shock prevention type earthing (grounding) in the independent earthing (grounding) method.
(b) This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
(c) Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. The earth (ground) cable should be of not less than the size indicated in the above table on the previous page.
(d) The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter, and the ground wire length should be as short as possible.
(e) Run the earth (ground) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run them in parallel in the minimum distance.
Inverter Other
equipment
(I)Independent earthing.......Best
Inverter Other
equipment
(II)Common earthing.......Good
Inverter Other
equipment
(III)Common earthing.......Not allowed
23
Main circuit terminal specifications
2
W IR
IN G
(3) Total wiring length The overall wiring length for connection of a motor should be within the value in the table below. (An explosion-proof test is not performed for the multiple motor connection.)
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21) Terminal screw size: M4 Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
Tightening torque: 1.5Nm
Inverter Capacity 400 750 1500 or more FR-B, B3 (at normal operation) 300m 500m 500m
FR-B3-N (at low noise operation) 200m 300m 500m
Total wiring length (1500 or more)
500m or less
24
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2.4 When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply (separate power)
FR-B-750 to 3700 (200V/400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H) 400 to 3700
FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V class), FR-B-7.5K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
1)Loosen the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Remove the jumper 4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control circuit to the lower terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
1)Remove the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Remove the jumper. 4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
Inverter
MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
Main circuit terminal block
R1/L11 S1/L21
3)
1)
2)
4)
S/L2 T/L3
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1
3)
4)
1)
2)
Main circuit
terminal block
S1/L21 R1/L11
S/ L2 T/
L3
R/ L1
R1/L11 S1/L21
25
Main circuit terminal specifications
2
W IR
IN G
FR-B-11K(200V/400V class) or more, FR-B3-(N)(H)11K or more 1)Remove the upper screws. 2)Remove the lower screws. 3)Pull the jumper toward you to
remove. 4)Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21). Never connect the power cable to the terminals in the lower stand. Doing so will damage the inverter.
CAUTION Do not turn off the control power (terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may
damage the inverter. Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 removed when supplying power from
other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper. The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC. The power capacity is 60VA or more for 15K or less, 80VA or more for 18.5K or more when separate power is supplied from R1/L11,
S1/L21. When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will
switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 are switched off.
If the main circuit power is switched off (for 0.1s or more) then on again, the inverter resets and an alarm output will not be held.
S1/L21 R1/L11
3)
4)
1)
2)
Power supply terminal block for the control circuit
Power supply terminal block for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
R1/ L11
S1/ L21 Power supply
terminal block for the control circuit
Main power supply
MC
VU W
FR-B-11K(200V) FR-B-15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)11K FR-B3-(N)H11K, 15K
FR-B-15K, 22K(200V) FR-B-22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)15K,18.5K, 22K FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K (200V/400V class) or more, FR-B3-(N)(H) 30K or more
26
Control circuit specifications
2.3 Control circuit specifications
2.3.1 Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to page 118.)
(1) Input signals
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
C on
ta ct
in pu
t
STF Forward rotation start
Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop.
When the STF and STR signals are turned on simultaneously, the stop command is given.
Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening: 21 to 27VDC Contacts at short-circuited: 4 to 6mADC
118 STR Reverse
rotation start Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.
STOP Start self- holding selection
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal. 118
RH, RM, RL
Multi-speed selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals. 118
JOG
Jog mode selection
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation. 118
Pulse train input
JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as pulse train input terminal, the Pr. 291 setting needs to be changed. (maximum input pulse: 100kpulses/s)
Input resistance 2k Contacts at short-circuited: 8 to 13mADC
118
RT Second function selection
Turn on the RT signal to select second function.
Input resistance 4.7k Voltage at opening: 21 to 27VDC Contacts at short-circuited: 4 to 6mADC
118
MRS Output stop
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output. Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.
118
RES Reset
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off. Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set to enabled only at an inverter alarm occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
118
AU
Terminal 4 input selection
Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The frequency setting signal can be set between 4 and 20mADC.) Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
166
PTC input AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC switch to PTC.
98
CS
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled. (Refer to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time page 148)
118
SD Contact input common (sink)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM. Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal). Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
--------------------
PC
External transistor common, 24VDC power supply, contact input common (source)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such as a programmable controller (PLC), when sink logic is selected, connect the external power supply common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents. Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply. When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a contact input common.
Power supply voltage range 19.2 to 28.8VDC Current consumption 100mA
30
27
Control circuit specifications
2
W IR
IN G
*1 Set Pr.73, Pr.267 and the voltage/current input switch correctly and input the analog signals in accordance with the setting. When a voltage is input with the switch ON (current input specification) or a current is input with the switch OFF (voltage input specification), a failure may occur in the inverter or the analog circuit of the external device. (Refer to page 166)
(2) Output signals
Fr eq
ue nc
y se
tti ng
10E Frequency setting power supply
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to terminal 10. Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it to terminal 10E.
10VDC0.4V Permissible load
current 10mA 166
10 5.2VDC0.2V
Permissible load current 10mA
166
2 Frequency setting (voltage)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA) provides the maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch from among input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA. Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select current input (0 to 20mA) *1
Voltage input: Input resistance 10k 1k Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC Current input: Input resistance 245 5 Maximum permissible current 30mA
166
4 Frequency setting (current)
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr.267 to switch from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) *1 Use Pr. 858 to switch terminal functions.
166
1 Frequency setting auxiliary
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10VDC adds this signal to terminal 2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr. 73 to switch between the input 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC (initial setting). Use Pr. 868 to switch terminal functions.
Input resistance 10k 1k Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC
166
5 Frequency setting common
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground). -------------------- 166
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
R el
ay
A1, B1, C1
Relay output 1 (alarm output)
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter protective function has activated and the output stopped. Abnormal: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity), Normal: Across B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C)
Contact capacity: 230VAC 0.3A (Power factor=0.4) 30VDC 0.3A
125
A2, B2, C2
Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output 125
O pe
n co
lle ct
or
RUN Inverter running
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection brake operation.*1
Permissible load 24VDC 0.1A (A voltage drop is 2.8V maximum when the signal is on.)
125
SU Up to frequency
Switched low when the output frequency reaches within the range of 10% (initial value) of the set frequency. Switched high during acceleration/deceleration and at a stop. *2
Alarm code (4bit) output (Refer to page 157)
125
OL Overload alarm
Switched low when stall prevention is activated by the stall prevention function. Switched high when stall prevention is cancelled. *2
125
IPF Instantaneous power failure
Switched low when an instantaneous power failure and under voltage protections are activated. *2
125
FU Frequency detection
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or higher than the preset detected frequency and high when less than the preset detected frequency. *2
125
SE Open collector output common Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU -------------------- -----
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
28
Control circuit specifications
*2 Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*3 Not output during inverter reset.
(3) Communication
P ul
se FM
For meter
Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. *3 The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.
Output item: Output frequency (initial setting)
Permissible load current 2mA 1440pulses/s at 60Hz
137
NPN open collector output
Signals can be output from the open collector terminals by setting Pr. 291.
Maximum output pulse: 50kpulses/s Permissible load current : 80mA
239
A na
lo g
AM Analog signal output
Output item: Output frequency (initial setting)
Output signal 0 to 10VDC Permissible load current 1mA (load impedance 10k or more) Resolution 8 bit
137
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Refer to page
R S
-4 85
-------------------- PU connector
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. (for connection on a 1:1 basis only) . Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485) . Transmission format : Multidrop link . Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps . Overall length : 500m
196
R S
-4 85
te rm
in al
s TXD+ Inverter transmission terminal
With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485. Conforming standard : EIA-485(RS-485) Transmission format : Multidrop link Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps Overall length : 500m
198
TXD-
RXD+ Inverter reception terminalRXD-
SG Earth (Ground)
Ty pe Terminal
Symbol Terminal
Name Description Rated Specifications
Refer to page
29
Control circuit specifications
2
W IR
IN G
2.3.2 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory. To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position. (The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.) 1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.) Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to source logic (SOURCE).
3)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION 1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly. 2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
Jumper connector
30
Control circuit specifications
4)Sink logic and source logic In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals. In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
When using an external power supply for transistor output
Sink logic type Use terminal PC as a common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable current. (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC- SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
Source logic type When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current.
Current
PC
STF R
STR R
Source logic
Source connector
Current
SD
STF R
STR R
Sink connector
Sink logic
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected
DC input (source type)
24VDC
RUN
SE
1
9
R
Inverter
R
Current flow
+ -+-
DC input (sink type)
Inverter
24VDC
RUN
SE
1
9
R
R
Current flow
AY40 type transistor output unit 1
2
910
24VDC SD
PC
STR
STF
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
9
Current flow
AY80 type transistor output unit
9
1
2
10
PC
STF
STR
SD
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
2 4
V D
C
Current flow
31
Control circuit specifications
2
W IR
IN G
2.3.3 Control circuit terminal layout
(1) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, 5, SE)
Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not earth (ground). Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5. Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) and frequency output signal (FM). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler. Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable. Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU). The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
(2) Signal inputs by contactless switches
Terminal screw size: M3.5 Tightening torque: 1.2Nm
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) can be controlled using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the right.
External signal input using transistor
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
1AMSDRESMRSSTOPAURTRHRMRL
PCCSJOGSTRSTFSDSDFUOLIPFSURUNSE
FM
+24V
STF, etc
Inverter
SD
32
Control circuit specifications
2.3.4 Wiring instructions
1) Terminals 5, SD and SE are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. Do not earth (ground). Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
4) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit. 5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc. 6) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
7) The maximum wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM).
Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more, separate away from wiring of the main circuit. Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with a cutter knife and such.
33
Control circuit specifications
2
W IR
IN G
2.3.5 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable When connecting the operation panel (FR-DU07) to the inverter using a cable, the operation panel can be mounted on the enclosure surface and operationality improves.
Refer to page 201 for RS-485 communication.
2.3.6 RS-485 terminal block
2.3.7 Communication operation
REMARKS Overall wiring length when the operation panel is connected: 20m Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Commercially available product examples (as of Apr, 2004)
Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485) Transmission format: Multidrop link Communication speed: MAX 38400bps Overall length: 500m Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 paires)
Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters. For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation), communication can be performed with the PU connector and RS-485 terminal. For the Modbus RTU protocol, communication can be performed with the RS-485 terminal. For further details, refer to 196.
Parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB2)(option)
Operation panel(FR-DU07)
Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP)(option)
Product Type Maker 1) 10BASE-T cable SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. 2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
RXDRDA1 (RXD1+)
RDB1 (RXD1-)
RDA2 (RXD2+)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
SDA1 (TXD1+)
SDB1 (TXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND) VCC
TXD
OPEN
100
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN". Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
34
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4 Connection of stand-alone option units The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required. Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.
2.4.1 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)(FR-B-75K or more)
When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection as shown below. (1) Connection with the FR-BU
*1 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
*2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. If twisted wires are
used, the distance should be within 10m.
CAUTION When used with the 55K or less, another explosion-proof test is necessary. If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
U
V
W
P/+
N/
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
IM
Inverter
PR
N/
P/+
P
HA
HB
HC
FR-BU
FR-BR
TH2
TH1
PR
*1
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
MC
OFFON
MC
T *2
Explosion- proof motor
*3
5m or less
35
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
W IR
IN G
(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 After making sure that the MT-BU5 is properly connected, set the following parameters. Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "1" Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty = "10%" (Refer to page 102)
2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer. *2 The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m maximum when wires are twisted and 5m
maximum when wires are not twisted.
CAUTION Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter. For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the rubber bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit to one pair of terminal (P, PR).
CAUTION Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely. Do not connect the MT-BU5 to a CN8 connector of the FR-B-55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H55K.
MC
R/L1
IM
Inverter
Brake unit MT-BU5
Resistor unit MT-BR5
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
P/+
N/ P
PR
P
PR
P
PR
P TH1
TH2
PR
CN8
W
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB
TH1
TH2
MC
OFFON
MC
CR1 CR2
CR1
CR2
T *1
Explosion- proof motor
5m or less
*2
Rubber bushes
Make cuts in rubber bush
Insert the connector until
you hear a click sound.
CN8 connector Wire clamp
36
Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.2 Connection of the high power factor converter (MT-HC)(FR-B-75K or more)
When connecting the high power factor converter (MT-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter. After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 102.)
*1 Remove the jumper across terminals R/L1 - R1/L11, S/L2 - S1/L21 of the inverter, and connect the control circuit power supply to the R1/L11 and S1/L21 terminals. The power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 must be open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option alarm) will occur. (Refer to page 273.)
*2 Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ N/- (P P/+, N N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals N, P will damage the inverter.
*3 Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 118.) For communication where the start command is sent only once, e.g. RS-485 communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.(Refer to page 103.)
*4 Connect the power supply to terminals R1 and S1 of the MT-HC via an insulated transformer.
CAUTION The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched. Use sink logic (factory setting) when the MT-HC is connected. The MT-HC cannot be connected when source logic is selected. When connecting the inverter to the MT-HC, do not connect the DC reactor provided to the inverter.
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MT-HCL01 MT-HCB
R1 S1
R1 S1 R1/ L11
S1/ L21
MT-HCL02 MT-HC Inverter
MT-HCTR Insulated transformer
R
S
T
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
R2
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
R3
S3
T3
R3
S3
T3
R4
S4
T4
R4
S4
T4
R
S
T
88R
88S
88R
88S *2
RDY
RSO
SE
X10
RES
SD
*3
*1
*1
*4
IM
P
N
P/+
N/
Explosion- proof motor
37
Connection of stand-alone option units
2
W IR
IN G
2.4.3 Connection of power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (75K or more)
When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
2.4.4 Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL)
When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1-P/+. For the 55K or less, the jumper connected across terminals P1-P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its performance. For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
CAUTION Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for connecting the power coordination reactor and others.
CAUTION 1. The wiring distance should be within 5m. 2. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page
20)
DCL
P1 P1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
R
S
T
R
S
T
R1
S1
R2
S2
T2
R2
S2
T2
RES
STF
SD
C
B
A
U
V
W
Inverter
MT-RCL
P
P/+ N/
P N
RDY
SE
MT-RC
Reset signal
Alarm signal
Ready signal
Three-phase AC power supply
MCCB MC
I M
Explosion- proof motor
P1
FR-HEL
Remove the jumper.
P/+
38
MEMO
39
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER
This chapter explains the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
3.1 Noise and leakage currents.....................................40 3.2 Installation of a reactor ............................................48 3.3 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)..................48 3.4 Precautions for use of the inverter ..........................49
40
Noise and leakage currents
3.1 Noise and leakage currents 3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current flows. Since its value depends on the capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following measures. Select the earth leakage breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting. (1) To-earth (ground) leakage currents Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
Countermeasures For leakage breakers for the inverter's own line and other line, select the ones designed for harmonic and surge
suppression. To-earth (ground) leakage currents Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current. Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter
reduces the leakage current. Increasing the motor capacity increases the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400V class is larger than
that of the 200V class. (2) Line-to-line leakage currents Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class small-capacity model (7.5K or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
Countermeasures Use Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature
sensor to directly detect motor temperature. Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side. Select the MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor (which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an earth (ground) leakage breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth (ground) leakage breaker designed for harmonics and surge suppression.
Power supply
Thermal relay
Line-to-line static capacitances
MCCB MC
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Inverter IM
Explosion- proof motor
41
Noise and leakage currents
3
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
U SE
O F
TH E
IN VE
R TE
R
(3) Selection of rated sensitivity current of earth (ground) leakage breaker When using the earth (ground) leakage circuit breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
Inverter leakage current (with and without EMC filter) Input power conditions (200V class: 220V/60Hz, 400V class: 440V/60Hz, power supply unbalance within 3%)
Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Rated sensitivity current: In 10 (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm)
Standard breaker Rated sensitivity current: In 10 {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 (Ig2 + Igm)}
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation
Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power
supply operation Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
Breaker Designed for Harmonic and Surge
Suppression Standard Breaker
Leakage current Ig1 (mA) 33 5m
= 0.17 1000m
Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
Leakage current Igi (mA) 1 (without EMC filter)
Refer to the following table for the leakage current of the inverter*
Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 33 50m
= 1.65 1000m
Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.18 Total leakage current (mA) 3.00 6.66
Rated sensitivity current (mA) ( Ig 10) 30 100 * Refer to page 15 for the EMC filter.
Voltage (V)
EMC Filter ON (mA) OFF (mA)
200 22(1)* 1
400 30 1
400 1 1
*For the FR-B-750 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)400,750 the EMC filter is always valid. The leakage current is 1mA.
CAUTION Install the earth leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter. In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is purified against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter
output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
The following models are standard breakers....BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA and NV-2F earth leakage relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression....NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H
(200V 60Hz) (200V 60Hz)
1. 5 3. 7 2. 2
7. 5 1522 11
37 30
55 455.5 18. 5
0. 1
0. 2
0. 3
0. 5 0. 7 1. 0
2. 0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
2 3.5 5.5
8 1422 30 38
60 80 100
150
Motor capacity (kW)
Example of leakage current of cable path per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
Leakage current example of three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
L e a k a g e c
u rr
e n ts
( m
A )
L e a k a g e c
u rr
e n ts
( m
A )
Power supply size (mm2)
Motor capacity (kW)
(Three-phase three-wire delta connection 400V60Hz)
Example of leakage current per 1km during the commercial power supply operation when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
Leakage current example of Three-phase induction motor during the commercial power supply operation
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type motor 400V60Hz)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
le a k a g e c
u rr
e n ts
( m
A )
le a k a g e c
u rr
e n ts
( m
A )
2 3.5 5.5
8 1422 30 38
60 80 100
150
Cable size (mm2)
0. 1
0. 2
0. 3
0. 5 0. 7 1. 0
2. 0
1. 5 3. 7 2. 2
7. 5 1522 11
37 30
55 455.5 18. 5
Noise filter
Inverter
ELB
Ig1 Ign
Igi
Ig2 Igm
IM
5.5mm2
5m 5.5mm2
60m
400V 2.2kW
3
Phase grounding
Earthed-neutral system
42
Noise and leakage currents
3.1.2 Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques
Some noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noises, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate noises. If these noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, measures should be taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths.
1)Basic techniques Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not
bundle them. Use twisted pair shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables, and connect the sheathes
of the shield cables to terminal SD. Earth (Ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2)Techniques to reduce noises that enter and malfunction the inverter When devices that generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by noises, the following measures must be taken: Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many noises to suppress noises. Fit data line filters (page 43 ) to signal cables. Earth (Ground) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
3)Techniques to reduce noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuits (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Noise propagated through power supply cable
Path 3)
Path 2)
Path 1) Noise directly radiated from inverter
Path 4), 5)
Air propagated noise
Path 6)
Electrical path propagated noise
Path 8)
Path 7)
Inverter generated noise
Electromagnetic induction noise
Electrostatic induction noise
Noise radiated from power supply cable
Noise radiated from motor connection cable
Noise from earth (ground) cable due to leakage current
Instrument Receiver
IM
Telephone
Sensor
1)
2)
3)
3)
8)
7)
5)
7)
4) 6)
Inverter
1)
Sensor power supply
Explosion- proof motor
43
Noise and leakage currents
3
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
U SE
O F
TH E
IN VE
R TE
R
Data line filter Noise entry can be prevented by providing a data line filter for the detector cable etc.
Noise reduction examples
Noise Propagation Path Measures
1) 2) 3)
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to noises, e.g. instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated noises. The following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do
not bundle them. (4) Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 15) (5) Inserting a line noise filter into the output suppresses the radiation noise from the cables. (6) Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to
produce further effects.
4) 5) 6)
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. (2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter. (3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do
not bundle them. (4) Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to
produce further effects.
7)
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same line, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: (1) Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 15) (2) Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (I/O cables) of the inverter.
8) When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may flow through the earth (ground) cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case, disconnection of the earth (ground) cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.
Sensor
Use a twisted pair shielded cable
Inverter power supply
Control power supply
Enclosure Decrease carrier frequency
IM FR- BLF
Install the filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) on the inverter output side
Power supply for sensor
EMC filter Inverter
Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) enclosure directly
Do not earth (ground) control cable
Use 4-core cable for motor power cable and use one cable as earth (ground) cable.
Explosion- proof motor
Separate the inverter, power line, and sensor circuit by more than 30cm. (at least 10cm)
44
Noise and leakage currents
3.1.3 Power supply harmonics
The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
The differences between harmonics and noises are indicated below:
Measures
Item Harmonics Noise
Frequency Normally number 40 to 50 max. (3kHz or less) High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz order)
Environment To-electric channel, power impedance To-space, distance, wiring path Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult
Generated amount Nearly proportional to load capacity Depending on the current fluctuation ratio (larger as switching is faster)
Affected equipment immunity Specified in standard per equipment Different depending on maker's equipment specifications
Suppression example Provide reactor. Increase distance.
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the input side differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side. For the output frequency and output current, we understand that they should be calculated in the conditions under the rated load at the maximum operating frequency.
CAUTION The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Do not insert power factor improving capacitor.
MCCB MC
Inverter
P o
w e
r s u
p p
ly R
S
T Z
Y
X U
V
W
P1 R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
P/+
IM
Explosion- proof motor
45
Noise and leakage currents
3
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
U SE
O F
TH E
IN VE
R TE
R
3.1.4 Harmonic suppression guideline Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents. The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less are previously covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage". However, the general-purpose inverter has been excluded from the target products covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products" in January 2004. Later, this guideline was repealed on September 6, 2004. All capacities of all models are now target products of "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage".
"Guideline for specific consumers" This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high- voltage consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
(1) Application of the harmonic suppression guideline for specific consumers
Table 1 Maximum Values of Outgoing Harmonic Currents per 1kW Contract Power Received Power
Voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd
6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70 22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36 33kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24
Table 2 Conversion factors for FR-B,B3 series Class Circuit Type Conversion Factor (Ki)
3 Three-phase bridge (Capacitor smoothing)
Without reactor K31 = 3.4 With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8 With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8 With reactor (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
5 Self-excitation three-phase bridge When high power factor converter is used K5 = 0
Table 3 Equivalent Capacity Limits Received Power Voltage Reference Capacity
6.6kV 50kVA 22/33kV 300kVA
66kV or more 2000kVA
Table 4 Harmonic content (Values of the fundamental current is 100%) Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3 Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2 Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
Install, add or renew equipment
Calculation of equivalent capacity total
Equivalent capacity total
Calculation of outgoing harmonic current
Not more than harmonic current upper
limit?
Harmonic suppression measures unnecessary
Harmonic suppression measures necessary
Equal to or less than upper limit
More than upper limit
Above reference capacity
Equal to or less than reference capacity
46
Noise and leakage currents
1)Calculation of equivalent capacity P0 of harmonic generating equipment The "equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer's harmonic generating equipment and is calculated with the following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit in Table 3, harmonics must be calculated with the following procedure:
2)Calculation of outgoing harmonic current Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) operation ratio harmonic content Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor operation time ratio during 30 minutes Harmonic content: Found in Table 4.
P0 = (Ki Pi) [kVA] * Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied motor and
found in Table 5. It should be noted that the rated capacity used here is used to calculate generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply capacity required for actual inverter drive.
Ki: Conversion factor(According to Table 2) Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment* [kVA] i : Number indicating the conversion circuit type
Table 5 Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors
Applied Motor (kW)
Rated Current (A)
Fundamental Wave Current
Converted from 6.6kV
(mA)
Rated Capacity
(kVA)
Outgoing Harmonic Current Converted from 6.6kV (mA) (No reactor, 100% operation ratio)
200V 400V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882 0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494 1.5 5.5 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006 2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320 3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092 5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42 7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97 11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18 15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48 22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96 30 98.0 49.0 2970 34.7 1931 1218 252.5 228.7 127.7 92.07 77.22 53.46 37 121 60.4 3660 42.8 2379 1501 311.1 281.8 157.4 113.5 95.16 65.88 45 147 73.5 4450 52.1 2893 1825 378.3 342.7 191.4 138.0 115.7 80.10 55 180 89.9 5450 63.7 3543 2235 463.3 419.7 234.4 169.0 141.7 98.10
Applied Motor (kW)
Rated Current (A)
Fundamental Wave Current
Converted from 6.6kV
(mA)
Rated Capacity
(kVA)
Outgoing Harmonic Current Converted from 6.6kV (mA) (With DC reactor, 100% operation ratio)
200V 400V 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
75 245 123 7455 87.2 2237 969 626 373 350 239 224 164 90 293 147 8909 104 2673 1158 748 445 419 285 267 196 110 357 179 10848 127 3254 1410 911 542 510 347 325 239
47
Noise and leakage currents
3
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
U SE
O F
TH E
IN VE
R TE
R
3)Harmonic suppression technique requirement If the outgoing harmonic current is higher than the maximum value per 1kW (contract power) contract power, a harmonic suppression technique is required.
4)Harmonic suppression techniques
No. Item Description
1 Reactor installation (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
Install an AC reactor (FR-HAL) on the AC side of the inverter or a DC reactor (FR-HEL) on its DC side or both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents.
2 High power factor converter (MT-HC)
The converter circuit is switched on-off to convert an input current waveform into a sine wave, suppressing harmonic currents substantially. The high power factor converter (MT- HC) is used with the standard accessory.
3 Installation of power factor improving capacitor
When used with a series reactor, the power factor improving capacitor has an effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
4 Transformer multi-phase operation
Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30 as in - , - combination to provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
5 Passive filter (AC filter)
A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedances at specific frequencies, producing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
6 Active filter
This filter detects the current of a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress a harmonic current at a detection point, providing a great effect of absorbing harmonic currents.
48
Installation of a reactor
3.2 Installation of a reactor When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (1000kVA or more and wiring length 10m max.) or when a power capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this, always install the optional DC reactor (FR-HEL) or AC reactor (FR-HAL)
3.3 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) (1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC) On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. ( Refer to page 4 for selection.) 1)To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter's protective function is activated or when the drive is
not functioning (e.g. emergency stop operation). 2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure 3)To reset the inverter for an extended period of time
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little power. When stopping the inverter for an extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly.
4)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.
REMARKS The wiring length between the FR-HEL and inverter should be 5m maximum and minimized. Use the same wire size as that of the power supply wire (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 20)
REMARKS Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times. (For the 200V class 37K or more, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
Inverter start/stop circuit example As shown on the left, always use the start signal (ON or OFF across terminals STF or STR-SD) to make a start or stop. (Refer to page 123) *1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down
transformer. *2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 of the
control circuit to the primary side of the MC to hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers across terminals R/ L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21. (Refer to page 24 for removal of the jumper.)
MCCB MC Inverter
AC reactor (FR-HAL)
Power supply
R
S
T Z
Y
X U
V
W
P1
DC reactor (FR-HEL) *
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
P/+
IM
5000 5300
4000
3000
2000
1000
110165 247 330 420 550 kVA
Capacities requiring installation of AC reactor
Inverter capacity
P o w
e r
s u p p ly
s y s te
m
c a p a c it y
(kVA) Explosion- proof motor
* When connecting the FR-HEL to the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1. For the 75K or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
Power supply
MCCB
RA
U
V
A1
B1
C1
W
To the motor
Inverter
MC
STF(STR)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
OFF ON
MC
Stop
Operation
RA
MC
Operation preparation
Start/Stop
RA
MC
T *1
*2
SD
3
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
U SE
O F
TH E
IN VE
R TE
R
49
Precautions for use of the inverter
3.4 Precautions for use of the inverter The FR-B, B3 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. Refer to page 20 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum. Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease or the equipment connected to the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 23.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is installed, immediately remove it.
(8) Before starting wiring or other work after the inverter is operated, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules. Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter modules.
Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on. Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter. Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter.
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits. Contact to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short terminals 10E-5.
(Refer to page 15)
(Refer to page 48)
50
Precautions for use of the inverter
(12) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.
(13) Instructions for overload operation When performing an operation of frequent start/stop with the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose a large capacity inverter and motor which have enough allowance for current.
(14) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
51
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
4 PARAMETERS
The abbreviations in the explanations below are as follows:
...FR-B series,
...FR-B3 series, Parameters with the above abbreviations are supported by the corresponding series. (Parameters without abbreviations are supported by both FR-B and FR-B3 series.)
This chapter explains the "PARAMETERS" for use of this product. Always read this instructions before use.
B
B3
52
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
Setting dial (Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter dial)
Used to change the frequency setting and parameter values.
Operation mode switchover Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode. When using the external operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.) PU: PU operation mode EXT: External operation mode
Monitor(4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
No function
Monitor indication Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode. EXT: Lit to indicate external operation mode. NET: Lit to indicate network operation mode.
Rotation direction indication
REV: Lit during reverse rotation FWD: Lit during forward rotation
Start command forward rotation
Start command reverse rotation
Stop operation
Alarms can be reset
Mode
switchover Used to change each setting mode.
Unit indication Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. A: Lit to indicate current. V: Lit to indicate voltage. (Flicker when the set frequency monitor is displayed.)
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set.
Used to set each setting. If pressed during operation, monitor changes as below;
Running frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Operation mode indication
On: Forward/reverse operation Flickering: When the frequency command is
not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
*
53
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting)
At powering on (external operation mode)
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
Parameter setting mode
PU Jog operation mode
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Display the current setting
Value change
Value change
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter and a setting value flicker alternately.
Parameter clear All parameter
clear
Alarm clear
Parameter copy
(Example)
(Example)
Frequency setting has been written and completed!!
and frequency flicker.
[Operation for displaying alarm history]
Past eight alarms can be displayed.
(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm history exists, is displayed.
Operation mode switchover
P a
ra m
e te
r s e
tt in
g A
la rm
h is
to ry
M o
n it o
r/ fr
e q
u e
n c y s
e tt
in g
(Refer to page 260)
(Refer to page 54)
54
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.3 Change the parameter setting value
4.1.4 Setting dial push
Push the setting dial ( ) to display the set frequency currently set.
Changing example Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
are displayed ... Why?
appears. ...... Write disable error appears. ...... Write error during operation appears. ...... Calibration error appears. ..... Mode designation error
For details refer to page 266.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
4. Pr. 1) appears.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
The parameter number read previously appears.
Press twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
to
55
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.2 Parameter List
4.2.1 Parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel (FR-DU07).
REMARKS indicates simple mode parameters. (initially set to extended mode) The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection. Refer to the appendix 4 (page 310) for instruction codes for communication and availability of parameter clear, all clear, and parameter
copy of each parameter.
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
Ba si
c fu
nc tio
ns
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 120/60Hz *2 79
2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 79
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 81
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 81
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 81
7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/15s *3 88
8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5/15s *3 88
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2 0.01/0.1A *2 Inverter rated current 96
D C
in je
ct io
n b
ra ke
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 3Hz 100
11 DC injection brake operation time 0.5/0s *2 0 to 10s, 8888 0.1s
0.5s/ 0s *2
0.5s 100
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 4/2/1%*4 100 13 Starting frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 90
Jo g
op er
at io
n 15 Jog frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 5Hz 83
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 0.5s 83
17 MRS input selection 0, 2 1 0 121
A cc
el er
at io
n/ de
ce le
ra tio
n ti
m es
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz *1 1 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 88
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 0, 1 1 0 88
St al
l pr
ev en
tio n 22 Stall prevention operation level
(torque limit level ) 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 74
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 74
M ul
ti- sp
ee d
se tti
ng 24 to 27 Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7 speed) 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 81
28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 0, 1 1 0 85
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0 to 5 1 0 91
30 Regenerative function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 102
56
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
Fr eq
ue nc
y ju
m p
31 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
32 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
33 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
34 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
35 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
36 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 80
37 Speed display 0, 1 to 9998 1 0 135
Fr eq
ue nc
y de
te ct
io n
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 130
42 Output frequency detection 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 130
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 130
S ec
on d
fu nc
tio ns
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5s 88
45 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 88
48 Second stall prevention operation current 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 74
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 0Hz 74
50 Second output frequency detection 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 130
M on
ito r f
un ct
io ns
52 DU/PU main display data selection
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 50 to 57, 100
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 34, 50 to 57, 100
1 0 137
54 FM terminal function selection
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53
1 1 137
55 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 142
56 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2 0.01/0.1A *2 Inverter rated current 142
A ut
om at
ic re
st ar
t
57 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999/ 0, 0.1 to 30s, 9999 *2
0.1s 9999 148
58 Fault definition 0 to 60s 0.1s 1s 148
59 Remote function selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 85
A ut
om at
ic a
cc el
er at
io n/
de ce
le ra
tio n
61 Reference current 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999 156,
94
62 Reference value at acceleration 0 to 220%, 9999 0.1% 9999 94
63 Reference value at deceleration 0 to 220%, 9999 0.1% 9999 94
65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 155
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 74
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
57
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
R et
ry
67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 155
68 Retry waiting time 0 to 10s 0.1s 1s 155
69 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 155
70 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 10% *7 0.1% 0% 102 71 Applied motor 0, 1 1 0 68, 99 73 Analog input selection 0 to 7, 10 to 17 1 1 169 74 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 171
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 177
76 Alarm code output selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 157 77 Parameter write selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 179 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 180
79 Operation mode selection 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 1 0 182
M ot
or c
on st
an ts
80 Motor capacity Inverter capacity 0.01kW Inverter
capacity 68, 70
81 Number of motor poles 4 1 4 68, 70
82 Motor excitation current Reading only. Not settable.
Reading only. Not settable. 9999 70
83 Motor rated voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200/400V *5
70
84 Rated motor frequency 10 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 70
89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector)
Reading only. Not settable.
Reading only. Not settable.
9999 68
90 Motor constant (R1) 9999 70
91 Motor constant (R2) 9999 70
92 Motor constant (L1) 9999 70
93 Motor constant (L2) 9999 70
94 Motor constant (X) 9999 70
96 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 101 1 0 70
Th ird
fu nc
tio ns
110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 88
111 Third deceleration time 0 to 3600/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 88
114 Third stall prevention operation current 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 74
115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency
0 to 120Hz, / 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0 74
116 Third output frequency detection 0 to 120Hz, / 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 130
P U
c on
ne ct
or co
m m
un ic
at io
n
117 PU communication station number 0 to 31 1 0 201
118 PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384 1 192 201
119 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 201
120 PU communication parity check 0, 1, 2 1 2 201
121 Number of PU communication retries 0 to10, 9999 1 1 201
122 PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 9999 201
123 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1 9999 201
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 0, 1, 2 1 1 201
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 172
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 172
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
58
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
P ID
o pe
ra tio
n
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 228
128 PID action selection 10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51, 60, 61 1 10 228
129 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 228
130 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 228
131 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
132 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 228
133 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 228
134 PID differential time 0.01 to 10.00s, 9999 0.01s 9999 228
B ac
kl as
h m
ea su
re s
140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 1Hz 91
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0 to 360s 0.1s 0.5s 91
142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 1Hz 91
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0 to 360s 0.1s 0.5s 91
144 Speed setting switchover 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110 1 4 135
P U 145 PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 0 253
C ur
re nt
d et
ec tio
n
148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 74
149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 0 to 220% 0.1% 200% 74
150 Output current detection level 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 132
151 Output current detection signal delay time 0 to 10s 0.1s 0s 132
152 Zero current detection level 0 to 220% 0.1% 5% 132
153 Zero current detection time 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.5s 132
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 0, 1 1 1 74
155 RT signal function validity condition selection 0, 10 1 0 122
156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 74 157 OL signal output timer 0 to 25s, 9999 0.1s 0s 74
158 AM terminal function selection 1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53
1 1 137
160 User group read selection 0, 1, 9999 1 0 180
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 253
A ut
om at
ic re
st ar
t fu
nc tio
ns
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection 0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 12 1 0 148
163 First cushion time for restart 0 to 20s 0.1s 0s 148
164 First cushion voltage for restart 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 148
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 0 to 220% 0.1% 150% 148
C ur
re nt
d et
ec tio
n
166 Output current detection signal retention time 0 to 10s, 9999 0.1s 0.1s 132
167 Output current detection operation selection 0, 1 1 0 132
168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
169
C um
ul at
iv e
m on
ito r
cl ea
r
170 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 137
171 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 137
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
59
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
U se
r g ro
up 172 User group registered display/batch clear 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 180
173 User group registration 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 180 174 User group clear 0 to 999, 9999 1 9999 180
in pu
t t er
m in
al fu
nc tio
n as
si gn
m en
t
178 STF terminal function selection
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
1 60 118
179 STR terminal function selection
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
1 61 118
180 RL terminal function selection 0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
1 0 118
181 RM terminal function selection 1 1 118
182 RH terminal function selection 1 2 118
183 RT terminal function selection 1 3 118
184 AU terminal function selection
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
1 4 118
185 JOG terminal function selection 0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
1 5 118
186 CS terminal function selection 1 6 118
187 MRS terminal function selection 1 24 118
188 STOP terminal function selection 1 25 118
189 RES terminal function selection 1 62 118
O ut
pu t t
er m
in al
fu nc
tio n
as si
gn m
en t
190 RUN terminal function selection 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
0 to 6, 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 106, 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
1 0 125
191 SU terminal function selection 1 1 125
192 IPF terminal function selection 1 2 125
193 OL terminal function selection 1 3 125
194 FU terminal function selection 1 4 125
195 ABC1 terminal function selection 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
0 to 6, 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 106, 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
1 99 125
196 ABC2 terminal function selection 1 9999 125
M ul
ti- sp
ee d
se tti
ng 232 to 239
Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15 speed)
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 125
241 Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 269
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
60
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) 0 to 100% 0.1% 100% 172
243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) 0 to 100% 0.1% 75% 169
244 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1 1 1 169
250 Stop selection 0 to 100s,1000 to 1100s 8888, 9999 0.1s 9999 104
251 Output phase failure protection selection 0, 1 1 1 158
Fr eq
ue nc
y co
m pe
ns at
io n
fu nc
tio n
252 Override bias 0 to 200% 0.1% 50% 169
253 Override gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 169
Li fe
c he
ck
255 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 247
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 247
257 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 247
258 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 247
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1 1 0 247
P ow
er fa
ilu re
s to
p
261 Power failure stop selection 0, 1, 2, 11, 12 1 0 152
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 0 to 20Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 152
263 Subtraction starting frequency 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 60Hz 152
264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 0 to 3600/360s 0.1/0.01s 5s 152
265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 0 to 3600s/360s, 9999 0.1/0.01s 9999 152
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 152
267 Terminal 4 input selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 166
268 Monitor decimal digits selection 0,1, 9999 1 9999 137
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
270 Stop-on contact/load torque high- speed frequency control selection 0, 2 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 105,
236
Lo ad
to rq
ue hi
gh s
pe ed
fr eq
ue nc
y co
nt ro
l
271 High-speed setting maximum current 0 to 220% 0.1% 50% 236
272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 0 to 220% 0.1% 100% 236
273 Current averaging range 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 236
274 Current averaging filter time constant 1 to 4000 1 16 236
St op
-o n
co nt
ac t
co nt
ro l
275 Stop-on contact excitation current low- speed multiplying factor
0 to 1000%, 9999
0.1% 9999 105
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
61
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
B ra
ke s
eq ue
nc e
fu nc
tio n
278 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 108
279 Brake opening current 0 to 220% 0.1% 130% 108
280 Brake opening current detection time 0 to 2s 0.1s 0.3s 108
281 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 108
282 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 108
283 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.3s 108
284 Deceleration detection function selection 0, 1 1 0 108
285 Overspeed detection frequency 0 to 30Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 115,
108
D ro
op c
on tro
l 286 Droop gain 0 to 100% 0.1% 0% 238
287 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.3s 238
291 Pulse train I/O selection 0, 1, 10, 11, 20, 21, 100 1 0 142, 239
292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 0, 1, 3, 7, 8, 11 1 0
156, 94, 108
293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection 0 to 2 1 0 94
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 152
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 0, 1, 9999 1 0 148
R S
-4 85
c om
m un
ic at
io n
331 RS-485 communication station number 0 to 31(0 to 247) 1 0 201
332 RS-485 communication speed 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384 1 96 201
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 201
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 0, 1, 2 1 2 201
335 RS-485 communication retry count 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 201
336 RS-485 communication check time interval 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 0s 201
337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1 9999 201
338 Communication operation command source 0, 1 1 0 191
339 Communication speed command source 0, 1, 2 1 0 191
340 Communication startup mode selection 0, 1, 2, 10, 12 1 0 190
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 0, 1, 2 1 1 201
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1 1 0 202
343 Communication error count 1 0 214
O rie
nt at
io n
co nt
ro l
350 *6 Stop position command selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 111 351 *6 Orientation speed 0 to 30Hz 0.01Hz 2Hz 111 352 *6 Creep speed 0 to 10Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 111 353 *6 Creep switchover position 0 to 16383 1 511 111 354 *6 Position loop switchover position 0 to 8191 1 96 111 355 *6 DC injection brake start position 0 to 255 1 5 111 356 *6 Internal stop position command 0 to 16383 1 0 111 357 *6 Orientation in-position zone 0 to 255 1 5 111 358 *6 Servo torque selection 0 to 13 1 1 111 359 *6 Encoder rotation direction 0, 1 1 1 111 360 *6 16 bit data selection 0 to 127 1 0 111 361 *6 Position shift 0 to 16383 1 0 111 362 *6 Orientation position loop gain 0.1 to 100 0.1 1 111 363 *6 Completion signal output delay time 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.5s 111 364 *6 Encoder stop check time 0 to 5s 0.1s 0.5s 111 365 *6 Orientation limit 0 to 60s, 9999 1s 9999 111 366 *6 Recheck time 0 to 5s, 9999 0.1s 9999 111
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
62
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
E nc
od er
fe ed
ba ck
367 *6 Speed feedback range 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999 *1
0 to 120Hz, 9999
0.01Hz 9999 242
368 *6 Feedback gain 0 to 100 0.1 1 242
369 *6 Number of encoder pulses 0 to 4096 1 1024 111, 242
374 Overspeed detection level 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 140Hz 158
376 *6 Encoder signal loss detection enable/ disable selection 0, 1 1 0 158
S -p
at te
rn a
cc el
er at
io n/
de ce
le ra
tio n
C
380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0 91
381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 to 50% 1% 0 91
382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0 91
383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 to 50% 1% 0 91
P ul
se tr
ai n
in pu
t
384 Input pulse division scaling factor 0 to 250 1 0 239
385 Frequency for zero input pulse 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0 239
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 239
R em
ot e
ou tp
ut 495 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 134
496 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 134
497 Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 134
M ai
nt en
an ce 503 Maintenance timer 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 249
504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 249
505 Speed setting reference 1 to 120Hz/ 1 to 60Hz *1
1 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 135
S -p
at te
rn a
cc el
er at
io n/
de ce
le ra
tio n
D
516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 91
517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 91
518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleraiton 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 91
519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleraiton 0.1 to 2.5s 0.1s 0.1s 91
539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval 0 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 9999 214
547 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
548
C om
m un
ic at
io n 549 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 214
550 NET mode operation command source selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 191
551 PU mode operation command source selection 1, 2, 3 1 2 191
C ur
re nt
a ve
ra ge
va lu
e m
on ito
r 555 Current average time 0.1 to 1.0s 0.1s 1s 250
556 Data output mask time 0.0 to 20.0s 0.1s 0s 250
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 0 to 500/0 to 3600A *2 0.01/0.1A *2 Rated inverter
current 250
563 Energization time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 250
564 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 250
571 Holding time at a start 0.0 to 10.0s, 9999 0.1s 9999 90
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
63
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
P ID
c on
tro l 575 Output interruption detection time 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 228
576 Output interruption detection level 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 228
577 Output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 228
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 5/15s *2 148
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 244
684 Tuning data unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 70
To rq
ue li
m it
811 Set resolution switchover 0, 1 1 0 98, 135
A dd
iti on
al fu
nc tio
n 849 Analog input offset adjustment 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 171 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 0, 4, 9999 1 0 165
859 Torque current Reading only. Not settable.
Reading only. Not settable. 9999 70
864 Torque detection 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 133
865 Low speed detection 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1
0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 1.5Hz 130
In di
ca tio
n fu
nc tio
n
866 Torque monitoring reference 0 to 400% 0.1% 150% 142
867 AM output filter 0 to 5s 0.01s 0.01s 142
868 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 to 4, 9999 1 0 165
Pr ot
ec tiv
e Fu
nc tio
ns 872 Input phase failure protection selection 0, 1 1 0 158
875 Fault definition 0, 1 1 0 159
R eg
en er
at io
n av
oi da
nc e
fu nc
tio n 882 Regeneration avoidance operation
selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 244
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 300 to 800V 0.1V 380/760VDC *5 244
884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 0 to 5 1 0 244
885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 6Hz 244
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 244
Fr ee
pa ra
m et
er s
888 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 252
889 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 252
E ne
rg y
sa vi
ng m
on ito
r
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999 160
892 Load factor 30 to 150% 0.1% 100% 160
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 0.1 to 55/0 to 3600kW *2 0.01/
0.1kW *2 Inverter
rated capacity 160
894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 160
895 Power saving rate reference value 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 160
896 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 160
897 Power saving monitor average time 0, 1 to 1000h, 9999 1 9999 160
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 160
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 160
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
64
Pa ra
m et
er L
is t
Parameter List
C al
ib ra
tio n
pa ra
m et
er s
C0 (900) FM terminal calibration 145
C1 (901) AM terminal calibration 145
C2 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 172
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 172
125 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 172
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 172
C5 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 172
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 172
126 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 60Hz 172
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 172
989 Parameter copy alarm release 10/100 1 10/100 *2 258
P U 990 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 255
991 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 255
C le
ar pa
ra m
et er
s Pr. CL Parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 256 ALLC All parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 257 Er.CL Alarm history clear 0, 1 1 0 260 PCPY Parameter copy 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 258
*1 Differ according to capacities. (22K or less/30K or more) *2 Differ according to capacities. (55K or less/75K or more) *3 Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or less/11K or more) *4 Differ according to capacities. (7.5K or less/11K to 55K/75K or more) *5 Differs according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class) *6 Setting can be made only when the FR-A7AP is mounted. *7 Setting can be made only for the 75K or more
Func- tion
Parame- ter Name
Setting Range Minimum Setting
Increments
Initial Value Refer to
Page Customer
SettingFR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
65
Pa ra
m et
er s
ac co
rd in
g to
p ur
po se
s 4
PA R
A M
ET ER
S
Parameters according to purposes 4.3 Control mode 67 4.4 Before operating the FR-B3 series 68
4.4.1 Setting the FR-B3 series (advanced magnetic flux vector control) (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89 ) ................................... 68 4.4.2 Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 684, Pr. 859) ..................................................... 70
4.5 Adjust the output torque of the motor (current) 74 4.5.1 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 114, Pr. 115,
Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 858, Pr. 868) ................................................................................... 74
4.6 Limit the output frequency 79 4.6.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ............................................................................................................. 79 4.6.2 Avoid mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)............................................................... 80
4.7 Frequency setting by external terminals 81 4.7.1 Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) .................................................. 81 4.7.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)..................................................................................................................................... 83 4.7.3 Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28) .............................................................................. 85 4.7.4 Remote setting function (Pr. 59)................................................................................................................................ 85
4.8 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern 88
4.8.1 Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111).................................................................................................................................. 88
4.8.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)............................................................................. 90 4.8.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383,
Pr. 516 to Pr. 519) ...................................................................................................................................................... 91 4.8.4 Shortest acceleraiton/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration
(automatic acceleration/deceleration) (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292, Pr. 293) .............................................................. 94
4.9 Selection and protection of a motor 96 4.9.1 Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9).............................................................. 96 4.9.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71) ................................................................................................................................................ 99
4.10 Motor brake and stop operation 100 4.10.1 DC injection brake and zero speed control, servo lock (X13 signal, Pr. 10 to Pr. 12) .......................................... 100 4.10.2 Selection of regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) (75K or more).............................................................................. 102 4.10.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250)............................................................................................................................................ 104 4.10.4 Stop-on contact control function (Pr. 6, Pr. 48, Pr. 270, Pr. 275) .......................................................................... 105 4.10.5 Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, Pr. 292)........................................................................................... 108 4.10.6 Orientation control (Pr. 350 to Pr. 366, Pr. 369)...................................................................................................... 111
4.11 Function assignment of external terminal and control 118 4.11.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189).............................................................................................. 118 4.11.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) ................................................................................................. 121 4.11.3 Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection signal (RT) and
third function selection signal (X9) (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr. 155) ........................................................................ 122 4.11.4 Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250)....................................................................................... 123 4.11.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)........................................................................................... 125 4.11.6 Detection of output frequency
(SU, FU, FU2 , FU3, LS signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116, Pr. 865) ........................................................... 130 4.11.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)................................................................................ 132 4.11.8 Detection of output torque (TU signal, Pr. 864)....................................................................................................... 133 4.11.9 Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) ...................................................................................... 134
4.12 Monitor display and monitor output signal 135 4.12.1 DU/PU, FM, AM terminal monitor display selection (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170,
Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891) ............................................................................................................. 137 4.12.2 Reference of the terminal FM (pulse train output) and AM (analog voltage
output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 291, Pr. 866, Pr. 867).................................................................................................... 142 4.12.3 Terminal FM, AM calibration (Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901))................................................. 145
4.13 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure 148 4.13.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)............................................................................................... 148 4.13.2 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294 )..................................................... 152
4.14 Operation setting at alarm occurrence 155 4.14.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ................................................................................................................... 155 4.14.2 Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76) ....................................................................................................................... 157 4.14.3 Input/output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872).......................................................................... 158
66
Pa ra
m et
er s
ac co
rd in
g to
p ur
po se
s
4.14.4 Overspeed detection (Pr. 374)................................................................................................................................. 158 4.14.5 Encoder signal loss detection (Pr. 376)................................................................................................................... 158 4.14.6 Fault definition (Pr. 875) ........................................................................................................................................... 159
4.15 Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor 160 4.15.1 Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899)............................................................................................................. 160
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) 165 4.16.1 Function assignment of analog input terminal (Pr. 858, Pr. 868)........................................................................... 165 4.16.2 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)................................................................................................................... 166 4.16.3 Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253)................................................................ 169 4.16.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74, Pr. 849) ................................................................ 171 4.16.5 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905)) .......................................................................................... 172
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction 177 4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ................................................................ 177 4.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77) ........................................................................................................................... 179 4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)........................................................................................................ 180 4.17.4 Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174) .......................................... 180
4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location 182 4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)........................................................................................................................... 182 4.18.2 Operation mode at power on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)........................................................................................................ 190 4.18.3 Operation command source and speed command source during
communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551) ............................................................................... 191
4.19 Communication operation and setting 196 4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector............................................................................................................... 196 4.19.2 Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals ........................................................................................................ 198 4.19.3 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)........................................................................................ 201 4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)............................................................................................... 202 4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)................................................................................... 203 4.19.6 Modbus-RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr.539, Pr. 549)............................................................................................... 214
4.20 Special operation and frequency control 228 4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) ................................................................................................ 228 4.20.2 Load torque high speed frequency control (Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274) ......................................................... 236 4.20.3 Droop control (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288) ........................................................................................................................... 238 4.20.4 Frequency setting by pulse train input (Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386)...................................................................... 239 4.20.5 Encoder feedback control (Pr. 144, Pr. 285, Pr. 359, Pr. 367 to Pr. 369) ............................................................ 242 4.20.6 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) ............................................................................. 244
4.21 Useful functions 246 4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)................................................................................................................ 246 4.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)..................................................................................... 247 4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)............................................................................................................ 249 4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)..................................................................................... 250 4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ........................................................................................................................... 252
4.22 Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel 253 4.22.1 PU display language selection (Pr. 145) ................................................................................................................. 253 4.22.2 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161) ............................................................ 253 4.22.3 Buzzer control (Pr. 990) ........................................................................................................................................... 255 4.22.4 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ............................................................................................................................ 255
4.23 Parameter clear 256 4.24 All parameter clear 257 4.25 Parameter copy and parameter verification 258
4.25.1 Parameter copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 258 4.25.2 Parameter verification .............................................................................................................................................. 259
4.26 Check and clear of the alarm history 260
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
67
Control mode
4.3 Control mode
(1) V/F Control (FR-B series only) It controls frequency and voltage so that the ratio of frequency (F) to voltage (V) is constant when changing frequency.
(2) Advanced magnetic flux vector control (FR-B3 series only) This control devides the inverter output current into an excitation current and a torque current by vector calculation
and makes voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the load torque.
68
Before operating the FR-B3 series
4.4 Before operating the FR-B3 series
4.4.1 Setting the FR-B3 series (advanced magnetic flux vector control) (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89 )
Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
*1 The initial value differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
For explosion-proof certification, the FR-B3 series are tested with the rotation mode under the advanced magnetic flux control after the offline auto tuning has been performed. In the initial setting, the advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected. Always perform the offline auto tuning with the rotation mode before operation.
What is advanced magnetic flux vector control? The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which meets the load torque to flow. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor actual speed approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
1 Maximum frequency 120Hz/ 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz
Set Pr.1 Maximum frequency to meet the permissible frequency of the pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor.
80 Motor capacity Inverter capacity Inverter capacity Cannot be changed.
81 Number of motor poles 4 4 Cannot be changed.
89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector) 9999 Reading only.
(Not settable.)
Motor speed fluctuation due to load fluctuation is adjusted during advanced magnetic flux vector control. 100% is a referenced value. Gain matching with the motor set in Pr. 71.
B3
69
Before operating the FR-B3 series
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Setting procedure of FR-B3 (advanced magnetic flux vector control)
(2) Adjust the motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation (speed control gain)
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
The motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation can be adjusted using Pr. 89. (It is useful when the speed command does not match the motor speed after the FR-B3 (A500 specifications) series inverter is replaced with the FR-B3 (A700 specifications) series inverter, etc.)
Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 14)
For the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80 and Pr.81), the advanced magnetic flux vector control is set in the initial setting.
(Change unnecessary) (Refer to page 68)
Test run
Set offline auto tuning. Pr.95=101 (Rotation mode)
Performing offline auto tuning. (Make sure to perform the auto tuning.)(Pr. 96) (refer to page 70)
Select the start command and speed command. (1) Start command
1. Operation panel :
Setting by pressing / of the operation panel
2. External command : Setting by forward rotation or reverse rotation command (terminal STF or STR)
(2) Speed command 1. Operation panel :
Setting by of the operation panel
2. External analog command (terminal 2 or 4) : Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 (or terminal 4).
3. Multi-speed command : The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give speed command.
Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 70)
L o
a d
t o
rq u
e
Speed
70
Before operating the FR-B3 series
4.4.2 Offline auto tuning (Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 684, Pr. 859)
Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series. What is offline auto tuning?
When performing FR-B3 series, the motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automaticaly measuring the motor constants (offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
80 Motor capacity Inverter capacity Inverter capacity Setting cannot be changed.
81 Number of motor poles 4 4 The number of motor poles is always four.
82 Motor excitation current 9999 Reading only. (Not settable.)
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) Use the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor constants
83 Motor rated voltage 200/400V* 0 to 1000V Set the rated motor voltage(V). * The initial value differs according to the
voltage level. (200V/400V) 84 Rated motor frequency 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). 90 Motor constant (R1) 9999
Reading only. (Not settable)
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) 9999: Use the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor constants
91 Motor constant (R2) 9999 92 Motor constant (L1) 9999 93 Motor constant (L2) 9999 94 Motor constant (X) 9999
96 Auto tuning setting/ status 0
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed
1 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running
101 Offline auto tuning is performed with motor running
684 Tuning data unit switchover 0
0 Internal data converter value 1 Displayed in "A, , mH, %"
859 Torque current 9999 Reading only. (Not settable)
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically set.) Use the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor constants
POINT Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. (As the load is lighter, tuning accuracy is higher.
Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large.) For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode (Pr.96 = "1") or rotation mode (Pr.96 =
"101"). Perform tuning in motor rotation mode in this case. Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
B3
71
Before operating the FR-B3 series
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Before performing offline auto tuning Check the following before performing offline auto tuning. A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start. When performing the offline auto tuning, always select the rotation mode (Pr.96="101"). Note the following when selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"101"). Torque is not enough during tuning. The motor may be run at nearly its rated speed. The brake is open. No external force is applied to rotate the motor.
(2) Setting 1) Set "101" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status .
When the setting is "101" . . . . . . Tuning is performed without motor running. It takes approximately 40s until tuning is completed. The motor runs at nearly its rated frequency.
2) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (refer to page 96 ). 3) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Motor rated voltage and rated frequency of motor
(initial value is 60Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency . (For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, use it with initial value (200V/ 60Hz or 400V/60Hz).)
72
Before operating the FR-B3 series
(3) Execution of tuning
1)When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
2)Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Reference: Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)
CAUTION Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. (Refer to 2 below)
CAUTION When selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), caution must be
taken since the motor runs.
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.) During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid:
Input signals
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequerence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto tuning is not excecuted properly.
Parameter Unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display Operation Panel (FR-DU07) Display
Pr. 96 setting 101 101
(1) Setting
(2) Tuning in progress
(3) Normal end
(4) Error end (when the inverter protective function is activated)
Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time
Rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "101")
Approximately 40s (Offline auto tuning time varies with the acceleration and deceleration time settings as indicated below. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time + deceleration time + approx. 30s)
STOP PU 101
FWD PU 102
STF
TUNE
STOP PU
103 STF
TUNE COMPLETION
Flickering
STOP PU
9
STF
TUNE ERROR
73
Before operating the FR-B3 series
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
3)When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn
off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
4)If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
5)When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
REMARKS Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (103).
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
Error Display Error Cause Remedy 8 Forced end Set "101" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again. 9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
91 Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time. Set "1" in Pr. 156 .
92 Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
93 Calculation error A motor is not connected.
Check the motor wiring and make setting again.
CAUTION The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again. An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored. The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION Note that the motor may start running suddenly. When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.
Parameters referred to Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 88
Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Refer to page 96
Pr. 80 Motor capacity, Pr. 81 Number of motor poles Refer to page 95
Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection Refer to page 74
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
74
Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
4.5 Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
4.5.1 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 114, Pr. 115, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 858, Pr. 868)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from coming to an alarm stop due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit stall prevention and fast- response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration.
Stall prevention If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the output current. Also the second stall prevention function can restrict the output frequency range in which the stall prevention function is valid. (Pr. 49) Fast-response current limit If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
22 Stall prevention operation level 150%
0 Stall prevention operation selection becomes invalid.
0.1 to 400% Set the current value at which stall prevention operation will be started.
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
9999 0 to 200% The stall operation level can be reduced when operating at
a high speed above the rated frequency.
9999 Constant according to Pr. 22
48 Second stall prevention operation current 150% 0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 220% The second stall prevention operation level can be set.
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 0Hz
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid 0.01 to 120Hz/ 0.01 to 60Hz *
0.01 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention operation of Pr. 48 is started.
9999 Pr. 48 is valid when the RT signal is on.
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
60Hz 0.01 to 120Hz/ 0.01 to 60Hz *
0.01 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the stall operation level is started to reduce.
114 Third stall prevention operation current 150%
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 220% Stall prevention operation level can be changed with the X9 signal.
115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency 0Hz
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid 0.01 to 120Hz/ 0.01 to 60Hz *
0.01 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention operation when the X9 signal is on starts.
148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 150% 0 to 220% Stall prevention operation level can be changed by the
analog signal input to terminal 1 (terminal 4).149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 200% 0 to 220%
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation
1 0 With voltage reduction You can select whether to use output
voltage reduction during stall prevention operation or not.1 Without voltage reduction
156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 0 to 31,
100, 101 You can select whether stall prevention operation and fast- response current limit operation will be performed or not.
157 OL signal output timer 0s 0 to 25s Set the output start time of the OL signal output when stall prevention is activated.
9999 Without the OL signal output
858 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0, 4, 9999 By setting "4", the stall prevention operation level can be
changed with a signal to terminal 4.
868 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0, 4, 9999 By setting "4", the stall prevention operation level can be
changed with a signal to terminal 1.
(1) Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22) Set in Pr. 22 the ratio of the output current to the rated inverter current at
which stall prevention operation will be performed. Normally set 150% (initial value).
Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration during constant speed, and stops deceleration during deceleration.
When stall prevention operation is performed, the OL signal is output.Stall prevention operation example
Pr. 22
OL
Output current
Output frequency
Acc ele
ra tio
n
Constant speed
Deceleration
Time
75
Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Stall prevention operation signal output and output timing adjustment (OL signal, Pr. 157) When the output power exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, the stall
prevention operation signal (OL signal) turns on for longer than 100ms. When the output power falls to or below the stall prevention operation level, the output signal turns off.
Use Pr. 157 OL signal output timer to set whether the OL signal is output immediately or after a preset period of time.
This operation is also performed when the regeneration avoidance function (overvoltage stall) is executed.
(3) Setting of stall prevention operation in high frequency range (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes smaller than the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not executed if the motor is at a stop. To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the high-speed range on a centrifugal separator etc. Normally, set 60Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
Formula for stall prevention operation level
f: 120Hz/60Hz (22K or less/30K or more) for FREQROL-B series and 120Hz for FREQROL-B3 series
When Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed = "9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is kept constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
CAUTION If an overload status lasts long, an inverter trip (e.g. electronic thermal relay function (E.THM)) may occur. When Pr. 156 has been set to activate the fast-response current limit (initial setting), the Pr. 22 setting should not be higher than
170%. The torque will not be developed by doing so.
Pr. 157 Setting Description 0
(initial value) Output immediately
0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s) has elapsed 9999 Not output
REMARKS The OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial setting. The OL signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by
setting "3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
CAUTION If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, an alarm (E.OLT) appears to shutoff the
inverter output. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect, the other functions.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Stall prevention operation level (%)= A + B [ Pr. 22 - A
] [ Pr. 23 - 100
] Pr. 22 - B 100
However, A = Pr. 66(Hz) Pr. 22(%)
, B = Pr. 66(Hz) Pr. 22(%)
Output frequency (H) f
Overload state (OL operation)
OL output signal
Pr.157 Set time(s)
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.22
Pr.23
When Pr.23=9999
Pr.66 f(60Hz/120Hz)
S ta
ll p
re v e
n ti o
n o
p e
ra ti o
n
le v e
l (%
)
R e
d u
c ti o
n r
a ti o
c o
m p
e n
s a
ti o
n
fa c to
r (%
)
Output frequency (Hz)
Setting example (Pr.22=120%, Pr.23=100%, Pr.66=60Hz)
S ta
ll p
re v e
n ti o
n o
p e
ra ti o
n l e
v e
l (%
)
0 10060 120
72
120
76
Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
(4) Set multiple stall prevention operation levels (Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 114, Pr. 115) Setting "9999" in Pr. 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency and turning the RT signal on make Pr. 48 Second stall
prevention operation current valid. In Pr. 48 (Pr. 114), you can set the stall prevention operation level at the output frequency from 0Hz to that set in Pr. 49
(Pr. 115). During acceleration, however, the operation level is as set in Pr. 22.
This function can also be used for stop-on-contact or similar operation by decreasing the Pr. 48 (Pr. 114) setting to weaken the deceleration torque (stopping torque).
Pr. 114 and Pr. 115 are made valid when the X9 signal is on. For the terminal used for X9 signal input, set "9" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 input terminal function selection to assign the X9 signal function.
Pr. 49 Setting
Pr. 115 Setting Operation
0 (initial value) The second (third) stall prevention operation is not performed.
FR-B-22K or less FR-B3 0.01Hz to 120Hz The second (third) stall prevention
operation is performed according to the frequency.*1FR-B-30K or
more 0.01Hz to 60Hz
9999 *2 Setting
can not be made.
The second (third) stall prevention function is performed according to the RT signal. RT signal ON ... Stall level Pr. 48 RT signal OFF ... Stall level Pr. 22
*1 The smaller setting of the stall prevention operation levels set in Pr. 22 and Pr. 48 has a higher priority.
*2 When Pr. 868 = "4" (Stall prevention operation level analog input), the stall prevention operation level also switches from the analog input (terminal 1 input) to the stall prevention operation level of Pr. 48 when the RT signal turns on. (The second stall prevention operation level cannot be input in an analog form.)
REMARKS When Pr. 49 "9999" (level changed according to frequency) and Pr. 48 = "0%", the stall prevention operation level is 0% at or
higher than the frequency set in Pr. 49. In the initial setting, the RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. The RT(X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) functions valid. (Refer
to page 122)
S ta
ll p
re v e
n ti o
n
o p
e ra
ti o
n c
u rr
e n
t
During acceleration
Running frequency
Pr.48
Pr.49
During deceleration/constant speed
Pr.114
Pr.115
Pr. 22 used
Output frequency (Hz) Output
frequency
Stall prevention level
Set frequency
Time
Pr.49
(Pr.115)
Set frequency exceeds Pr. 49(Pr.115)
Pr. 48 (Pr.114) used
Pr. 22 used
Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency
Set frequency
Time
Pr.49
(Pr.115)
Pr. 48 (Pr.114) used
Set frequency is Pr. 49 (Pr.115)or less
77
Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(5) Stall prevention operation level setting by terminal 1 (terminal 4) (analog variable) (Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 858, Pr. 868)
*1 When Pr. 868 = "4" (analog stall prevention), other functions of terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) do not function. *2 When Pr. 858 = "4" (analog stall prevention), PID control and speed command from terminal 4 do not function even if the AU signal turns on. *3 When "4" (stall prevention) is set in both Pr. 858 and Pr. 868, function of terminal 1 has higher priority and terminal 4 has no function.
(6) To further prevent an alarm stop (Pr. 154) When Pr. 154 is set to "0", the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation. By making setting to reduce
the output voltage, an overcurrent trip can further become difficult to occur. Use this function where a torque decrease will not pose a problem.
To set the stall prevention operation level using terminal 1 (analog input), set Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment to "4". Input 0 to 5V (or 0 to 10V) to terminal 1. Select 5V or 10V using Pr. 73 Analog input selection. When Pr. 73 = "1" (initial value), 0 to 10V is input.
To set stall prevention operation level using terminal 4 (analog current input), set "4" in Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment. Input 0 to 20mA to terminal 4. The AU signal need not be turned on.
Set the current limit level at the input voltage of 0V (0mA) in Pr. 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input
Set the current limit level at the input voltage of 10V/ 5V (20mA) in Pr. 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input.
Pr. 858 Setting Pr. 868 Setting V/F, Advanced Magnetic Flux Vector Control Terminal 4 function Terminal 1 function
0 (initial value)
0 (initial value) Frequency command
(AU signal-ON)
Frequency auxiliary
4 *1 Stall prevention 9999
4 *2
0 (initial value)
Stall prevention Frequency auxiliary
4 *1 *3 Stall prevention 9999 Stall prevention
9999
REMARKS The fast-response current limit level cannot be set.
Pr. 154 Setting Description 0 Output voltage reduced 1
(initial value) Output voltage not reduced
100%
50%
Current limit level (%)
(5V/10VDC) (20mA)
(-5V/10VDC) Input voltage (V)
Set the current limit level at 10V/5V input power (input current 20mA) using Pr. 149.
Set the current limit level at 0V input voltage (input current 0mA) using Pr. 148.
0V 0mA
Input current (mA)
200%
150% Initial setting
78
Adjust the output torque of the motor (current)
(7) Limit the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation according to the operating status (Pr. 156)
Refer to the following table and select whether fast-response current limit operation will be performed or not and the operation to be performed at OL signal output.
*1 When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the " " alarm code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped.
*2 Since both fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not activated, OL signal and E.OLT are not output. *3 The settings "100" and "101" allow operations to be performed in the driving and regeneration modes, respectively. The setting "101" disables the
fast-response current limit in the driving mode.
Pr. 156 Setting
Fast-response Current Limit
: Activated : Not activated
Stall Prevention Operation Selection
:Activated :Not activated
OL Signal Output
:Operation continued
:Operation not continued
*1
Pr. 156 Setting
Fast-response Current Limit
:Activated : Not activated
Stall Prevention Operation Selection
:Activated :Not activated
OL Signal Output
:Operation continued
:Operation not continued
*1Ac ce
ler ati
on
C on
st an
t sp
ee d
De ce
ler ati
on
Ac ce
ler ati
on
C on
st an
t sp
ee d
De ce
ler ati
on
0 (initial value)
16
1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 *2 31 *2
100 *3
D riv
in g
101 *3
D riv
in g
Re ge
ne rat
ion
*2
Re ge
ne rat
ion
*2
CAUTION When the load is heavy, when the lift is predetermined, or when the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention is
activated and acceleration/deceleration may not be made according to the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Set Pr. 156 and stall prevention operation level to the optimum values.
In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a drop due to gravity.
CAUTION Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will reduce. Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes. Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.
Parameters referred to Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 166 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Refer to page 165
79
Limit the output frequency
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.6 Limit the output frequency
4.6.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
*1 The initial value differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more) *2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
(2) Set minimum frequency Use Pr. 2 Minimum frequency to set the lower limit of the output frequency. The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The
frequency will not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Set upper limit and lower limit of output frequency
Maximum/minimum frequency Pr. 1, Pr. 2 79
Perform operation by avoiding mechanical resonance points Frequency jump Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 80
You can limit the motor speed. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
Parameter Number Name
Initial Value Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
1 Maximum frequency 60Hz 120Hz/60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *2 0 to 120Hz Set the upper limit of the
output frequency.
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *2 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the
output frequency.
(1) Set maximum frequency Set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency. If the frequency of the frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
REMARKS When performing operation above 60Hz using the frequency setting analog signal, change Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting
gain). If only Pr. 1 is changed, operation above 60Hz cannot be performed. Set Pr.1 Maximum frequency to within the permissible frequency of the motor.
REMARKS When Pr. 15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr. 2, the Pr. 15 setting has precedence over the Pr. 2 setting. When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr. 2 or below.
CAUTION Note that when Pr. 2 is set to any value higher than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, simply turning on the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency according to the set acceleration time even if the command frequency is not input.
Parameters referred to Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90 Pr. 15 Jog frequency Refer to page 83 Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Refer to page 172
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
Clamped at the maximum frequency
Clamped at the minimum frequency
5, 10V (20mA)
0 (4mA)
80
Limit the output frequency
4.6.2 Avoid mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value
Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3
31 Frequency jump 1A 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency jumps 9999: Function invalid
32 Frequency jump 1B 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
33 Frequency jump 2A 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
34 Frequency jump 2B 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
35 Frequency jump 3A 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
36 Frequency jump 3B 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz, 9999
0 to 120Hz, 9999
Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area.
The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.
Example 1 To fix the frequency to 30Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and 30Hz in Pr. 33.
Example 2 To jump the frequency to 35Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.
CAUTION During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.
Pr.31
Frequency jump
Pr.32
Pr.33
Pr.34
Pr.35
Pr.36
S e
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z )
Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz
Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz
81
Frequency setting by external terminals
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.7 Frequency setting by external terminals
4.7.1 Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more) The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Make frequency setting by combination of terminals Multi-speed operation Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 81
Perform jog operation Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16 83 Added compensation for multi-speed setting and remote setting
Multi-speed input compensation selection Pr. 28 85
Infinitely variable speed setting by terminals Remote setting function Pr. 59 85
Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the contact terminals. Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz Set the ferquency when RH turns on.
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 30Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz Set the ferquency when RM turns on.
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to 120Hz Set the ferquency when RL turns on.
24 Multi-speed setting (speed4) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. 9999: not selected
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 9999 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz, 9999* 0 to 120Hz, 9999
82
Frequency setting by external terminals
(1) Multi-speed setting (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) Operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 4 when the RH
signal turns on, Pr. 5 when the RM signal turns on, and Pr. 6 when the RL signal turns on.
(2) Multi-speed setting higher than speed 4 (Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239. (In the initial value setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable.).
For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function. * When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is performed at
frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned off and REX is turned on.
REMARKS The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog
input > terminal 2 analog input". (Refer to page 172 for the frequency command by analog input) Valid in external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "3" or "4"). Multi-speed parameters can also be set in the PU or external operation mode. Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them. When a value other than 0 is set in Pr. 59 Remote function selection, the RH, RM and RL signals are used as the remote setting
signals and the multi-speed setting becomes invalid. When making analog input compensation, set "1" in Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 15 Jog frequency Refer to page 83 Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
ONONON
ON
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z ) Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2 (Middle speed)
Speed 3 (Low speed)
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Time
RH
RM
RL
REMARKS In the initial setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously
selected, priority is given to the set frequency of the lower signal. For example, when the RH and RM signals turn on, the RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
The RH, RM, RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH, RM, RL in the initial setting. By setting "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", "2 (RH)" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function assignment), the signals can be assigned to other terminals.
Time
Speed 8
ONON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON RH
RM
RL
REX
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
*1
Speed 9
Speed 10
Speed 11
Speed 12
Speed 13
Speed 14
Speed 15
Multi-Speed Operation Connection Example
10
2
5
Inverter STF
REX
RH
RM
RL
M u
lt i- s p
e e
d s
e le
c ti o
n
F re
q u
e n
c y s
e tt
in g
p
o te
n ti o
m e
te r
Forward rotation
SD
83
Frequency setting by external terminals
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.7.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)
The above parameters are displayed as simple mode parameters only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected. When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is connected, the above parameters can be set only when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 180) *1 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more) *2 When the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting increments
are "0.1s", and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and the setting increments are "0.01s" (1) Jog operation from outside
When the jog signal is on, a start and stop can be made by the start signal (STF, STR). (The jog signal is assigned to the terminal JOG in the initial setting)
You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Jog operation can be performed from either the outside or PU. Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
15 Jog frequency 5Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *1 0 to 120Hz Set the frequency for jog operation.
16
Jog acceleration/ deceleration time
0.5s 0 to 3600/360s*
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Set the time taken to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency for acceleration/ deceleration time. (Initial value is 60Hz) The acceleration and deceleration time cannot be set separately.
REMARKS When you want to change the running frequency, change Pr. 15 Jog frequency . (initial value "5Hz") When you want to change the acceleration/deceleration time change Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time . (initial value
"0.5s")
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.20
Pr.15 Jog frequency setting range
Pr.16
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Time
ON
ON
ON
JOG signal
Forward rotation STF
Reverse rotation STR
STF
10
2
5
JOG
Motor
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U V W
Connection diagram for external jog operation
STR
Three-phase AC power supply
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
JOG signal
SD
1.Screen at powering on
Confirm that the external operation mode is selected.
([EXT] lit)
If not displayed, press to change to the
external [EXT] operation mode.
If the operation mode still does not change,
set Pr. 79 to change to the external operation mode.
IndicationOperation
2.Turn the JOG switch on. ON
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation
Rotates while ON
Stop
3.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
The motor rotates while start switch
(STF or STR) is ON.
Rotates at 5Hz. (Initial value of Pr. 15)
4.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
ON
OFF
84
Frequency setting by external terminals
(2) Jog operation from PU Set the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07/FR-PU04) to the
jog operation mode. Operation is performed only while the start button is pressed.
CAUTION The Pr. 15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting. The JOG signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). When terminal
assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. During jog operation, the second acceleration/deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected. (The other second functions
are valid. (Refer to page 122)) When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "4", push / of the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to make a start or push
to make a stop.
This function is invalid when Pr. 79 = "3" or "6".
Parameters referred to Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90 Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection Refer to page 91 Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Refer to page 88 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Motor
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U V W
FR-DU07
Three-phase AC power supply
1.
2.
6.
7.
8.
5.
9.
10.
IndicationOperation
Stop
The parameter number read previously appears.
Press to choose the
PU JOG operation mode.
3. Press (or ).
4. Release (or ).
The monitor mode should have been selected.
The inverter should be at a stop.
While (or ) is pressed, the
motor rotates.
Rotates at 5Hz. (initial value of Pr. 15)
Hold down.
Press to set.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
Release
Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Perform the operations in steps 1 to 4. The motor rotates at 10Hz.
Turn until Pr. 15 JOG frequency
appears.
Turn to set the value to
" ". (10Hz)
Press to show the currently set
value. (5Hz)
Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication
[When changing the frequency of PU JOG
operation]
85
Frequency setting by external terminals
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.7.3 Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28)
4.7.4 Remote setting function (Pr. 59)
* External operation frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency
(1) Remote setting function Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting storage
function in the remote setting mode is used or not. When Pr. 59 is set to any of "1 to 3" (remote setting function valid), the functions of the RH, RM and RL signals are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).
When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows: External operation ... Frequency set with RH and RM operation + external operation frequency other than multi-
speed (Pr.79 ="3" (PU operation frequency when Pr.79 ="3" (external, PU combined)) and terminal 4 input. (When making analog input compensation, set "1" in Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection. When Pr. 28 is set to "0" and acceleration/deceleration is made to reach the set frequency of the analog voltage input (terminal 2 or terminal 4) by RH/RM, the auxiliary input by terminal 1 becomes invalid.)
PU operation ............. Frequency set by RH/RM operation + PU running frequency
By inputting the frequency setting compensation signal (terminal 1, 2), the speed (frequency) can be compensated for relative to the multi-speed setting or the speed setting by remote setting function.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 0
0 Without compensation 1 With compensation
REMARKS Select the terminal (terminal 1, 2) used for compensation input voltage (0 to 5V, 0 to 10) using Pr. 73 Analog input selection. When using terminal 1 for compensation input, set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment.
Parameters referred to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (multi-speed operation) Refer to page 81 Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 166 Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Refer to page 165
Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals. By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration, deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed setter (FR-FK).
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range
Description RH, RM, RL signal
function Frequency setting storage function
59 Remote function selection 0
0 Multi-speed setting 1 Remote setting Yes 2 Remote setting No
3 Remote setting No
(Turning STF/STR off clears remotely- set
frequency.)
Acceleration
Deceleration
Clear
Inverter
STF
RH
RM 10
2
5
RL
Connection diagram for remote setting
Forward rotation
SD
Deceleration (RM)
Clear (RL)
Acceleration (RH)
Forward rotation (STF)
ON ON
Power supply ON
0Hz
*
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
When Pr. 59 = 1
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3
ON
ON
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
When Pr. 59 = 1, 2
When Pr. 59 = 3
Time
86
Frequency setting by external terminals
(2) Frequency setting storage The frequency setting storage function stores the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) into
the memory (EEPROM). When power is switched off once, then on, operation is resumed with that output frequency value. (Pr. 59 = 1)
Frequency at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns off The remotely-set frequency is stored every one minute after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both
the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals. (The frequency is written if the present frequency setting compared with the past frequency setting every one minute is different. The state of the RL signal does not affect writing.)
CAUTION The range of frequency changeable by RH
(acceleration) and RM (deceleration) is 0 to maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is (main speed + maximum frequency).
When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 44 Second acceleration/ deceleration time and Pr. 45 Second deceleration time. Note that when long time has been set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8, the acceleration/ deceleration time is as set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8. (when RT signal is off) When the RT signal is on, acceleration/deceleration is made in the time set to Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, regardless of the Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 setting.
Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the preset frequency.
When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr. 59 = "2, 3"). If set valid (Pr. 59 = "1"), frequency is written to EEPROM frequently, this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
The RH, RM, RL signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Also available for the network operation mode.
Deceleration(RM)
Acceleration(RH)
Forward rotation(STF)
0Hz ON
Time
(Hz)
Main speed setting
Pr.1
The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1 )
Output frequency is clamped at Pr.1
Set frequency
Output frequency
ON
ON
87
Frequency setting by external terminals
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
REMARKS During jog operation or PID control operation, the remote setting function is invalid.
Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals
When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
CAUTION When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine.
Parameters referred to Pr. 1 Maximum frequency Refer to page 79 Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr. 45 Second deceleration time Refer to page 88 Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Setting frequency is "0"
Clear (RL)
Acceleration (RH)
ON
Power supply ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Within 1 minute
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Time
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Deceleration (RM) OFF
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
(H z )
Forward rotation (STF)
Clear (RL)
Acceleration (RH)
Forward rotation (STF) ON
Power supply ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Time
Remotely-set frequency stored last time One minute
Deceleration (RM) OFF
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
(H z ) More than
one minute Operation is performed at the set frequency 0Hz.
88
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4.8 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
* Automatic acceleration/deceleration is supported by FR-B3 series only.
4.8.1 Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Motor acceleration/deceleration time setting Acceleration/deceleration time Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21,
Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111 88
Starting frequency Starting frequency and start- time hold Pr. 13, Pr. 571 90
Set acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application
Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures
Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383, Pr. 516 to Pr. 519
91
Automatically set appropriate acceleration/deceleration time
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration * Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292 94
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease. For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart (page 148).
Parameter Number Name Initial Value
Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3
7 Acceleration time 7.5K or less 5s
0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the motor acceleration time. 11K or more 15s
8 Deceleration time 7.5K or less 5s
0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the motor deceleration time. 11K or more 15s
20 Acceleration/ deceleration reference frequency
60Hz 1 to
120Hz/ 1 to
60Hz *2
1 to 120Hz
Set the frequency that will be the basis of acceleration/deceleration time. As acceleration/deceleration time, set the frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20.
21 Acceleration/ deceleration time increments
0 0 Increments: 0.1s
Range: 0 to 3600s Increments and setting range of acceleration/ deceleration time setting can be changed.1 Increments: 0.01s
Range: 0 to 360s
44 Second acceleration/ deceleration time
5s 0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the acceleration/deceleration time when the RT signal is on.
45 Second deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the deceleration time when the RT signal is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
110 Third acceleration/ deceleration time
9999 0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the acceleration/deceleration time when
the X9 signal is on.
9999 Without the third acceleration/deceleration function.
111 Third deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600/360s *1 Set the deceleration time when the X9 signal is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time *1 Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting
increments is "0.1s". *2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
(1) Acceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 20) Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to reach Pr.
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz. Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.
Example) When Pr. 20 = 60Hz (initial value), Pr. 13 = 0.5Hz, and acceleration can be made up to the maximum operating frequency of 50Hz in 10s
Running frequency
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Time
Pr.20
Pr.7 Pr.8
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n cy
( H
z )
Pr.110 Pr.111
Pr.44 Pr.45
(60Hz)
Acceleration time setting =
Pr. 20
Acceleration time from stop to maximum operating frequencyMaximum operating
frequency - Pr. 13
Pr. 7 = 60Hz
10s 12.1s50Hz - 0.5Hz
89
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 20) Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency. Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.
(3) Change the setting range and increments of the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 21) Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting range.
Setting "0" (initial value) ..................... 0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments 0.1s) Setting "1" .......................................... 0 to 360s (minimum setting increments 0.01s)
(4) Set multiple acceleration/deceleration time (RT signal, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111) Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on, and Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid when the X9 signal is on. When
both the RT and X9 are on, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 are valid. For the terminal used for X9 signal input, set "9" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
the function. When "9999" is set in Pr. 45 or Pr. 111, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 110). When Pr. 110 = "9999", third acceleration/deceleration time is invalid.
Example)When the frequency can be decelerated down to the maximum operating frequency of 50Hz in 10s with 120Hz set in Pr. 20 and 3Hz set in Pr. 10
CAUTION Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111, Pr.
264, Pr. 265). (The Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart setting is not affected.)
CAUTION In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 91), the set time is the period required to reach the base
frequency set in Pr. 3 Base frequency. Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher
The RT, X9 signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
REMARKS The RT (X9) signal acts as the second (third) function selection signal and makes the other second (third) function valid. (Refer
to page 122) The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the default setting. By setting "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal
function selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal. If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change. Set Pr. 125
and Pr. 126 to adjust the gains. When the Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111 settings are 0.03s or less, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.
Parameters referred to Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency Refer to page 100 Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection Refer to page 91 Pr. 125, Pr. 126 (frequency setting gain frequency) Refer to page 172 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Deceleration time setting =
Pr. 20
Deceleration time from maximum operating frequency to stop.Maximum operating
frequency - Pr. 10
Pr. 8 = 120Hz
10s 25.5s50Hz - 3Hz
The frequency for FR-B series is 60Hz and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency for FR-B3 series. Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time when Base frequency = 60Hz (0Hz to set frequency)
t = 4
T
f2 + 5
T T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting value(s) f : Set frequency(Hz)9 (Base frequency*)2 9
Frequency setting (Hz) 60 120Acceleration/
deceleration time (s) 5 5 12
15 15 35
90
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4.8.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)
You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time. Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want to smooth motor drive at a start.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
13 Starting frequency 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz
Frequency at start can be set in the range 0 to 60Hz. You can set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned on.
571 Holding time at a start 9999 0.0 to 10.0s Set the holding time of Pr. 13 Starting
frequency. 9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
(1) Starting frequency setting (Pr. 13) Frequency at start can be set in the range 0 to 60Hz. You can set the starting frequency at which the start signal is
turned on.
CAUTION The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13. For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.
(2) Start-time hold function (Pr. 571) This function holds the time set in Pr. 571 and the output
frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting frequency. This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive
at a start.
CAUTION When the start signal was turned off during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point. At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
invalid.
CAUTION Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value lower than Pr. 2 Minimum frequency, simply turning on the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.
Parameters referred to Pr. 2 Minimum frequency Refer to page 79
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
60
Pr.13
S e
tt in
g r
a n
g e
Forward rotation ON
0
Output frequency (Hz)
Time
Pr.13
Pr.571 setting timeForward rotation ON
0
60
S e
tt in
g r
a n
g e
REMARKS When Pr. 13 = "0Hz", the starting frequency is held at 0.01Hz.
91
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.8.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr. 380 to Pr. 383, Pr. 516 to Pr. 519)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application. You can also set the backlash measures that stop acceleration/deceleration once at the parameter-set frequency and time during acceleration/deceleration.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 0
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration 1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A 2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B 3 Backlash measures 4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C 5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 1Hz
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the stopping frequency and time for backlash measures. Valid when Pr. 29 = 3
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 0.5s 0 to 360s
142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 1Hz
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 0.5s 0 to 360s
380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50% Valid when S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C (Pr. 29 = 4) is set. Set the time taken for S-pattern from starting of acceleration/deceleration to linear acceleration as % to the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8 etc.). An acceleration/deceleration pattern can be changed with the X20 signal.
381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 0 0 to 50%
382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 0 0 to 50%
516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s Valid when S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration D (Pr. 29 = 5) is set. Set the time taken for S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (S-pattern operation).
517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleraiton 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleraiton 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
(1) Linear acceleration/ deceleration (Pr. 29 = "0", initial value) When the frequency is changed for acceleration, deceleration, etc. in inverter
operation, the output frequency is changed linearly (linear acceleration/ deceleration) to reach the set frequency without straining the motor and inverter. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.
(2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr. 29 = "1") For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration must be made in a short time to a high- speed range of not lower than the base frequency. In this acceleration/ deceleration pattern, base frequency (fb) is the inflection point of the S pattern and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time appropriate for motor torque reduction in a constant-power operation region of Pr. 3 Base frequency (initial value = 60Hz) or higher. FR-B series: 60Hz FR-B3 series: 60Hz (Pr.84 Rated motor frequency)
CAUTION As the acceleration/deceleration time of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time taken until base frequency (60Hz) is
reached, not Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
Setting value "0" [Linear acceleration / deceleration]
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Time
fb
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Setting value "1"
Time
[S-pattern acceleration /deceleration A]
92
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
(3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr. 29 = "2") For prevention of load shifting in conveyor and other applications
Since acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape from current frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1), this function eases shock produced at acceleration/deceleration and is effective for load collapse prevention, etc.
(4) Backlash measures (Pr. 29 = "3", Pr. 140 to Pr. 143) What is backlash?
Reduction gears have an engagement gap and have a dead zone between forward rotation and reverse rotation. This dead zone is called backlash, and this gap disables a mechanical system from following motor rotation. More specifically, a motor shaft develops excessive torque when the direction of rotation changes or when constant-speed operation shifts to deceleration, resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerative status.
To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily stopped. Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and time in Pr. 140 to Pr. 143.
CAUTION Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration/deceleration time by the stopping time.
(5) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C (Pr. 29 = "4", Pr. 380 to Pr. 383)
With the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch signal (X20), an acceleration/deceleration curve S-pattern 1 or S-pattern 2 can be selected.
For the terminal used for X20 signal input, set "20" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Parameter setting (%) Ts / T 100% Set % of time taken for forming an S-pattern in Pr. 380 to Pr. 383 as acceleration time is 100%.
CAUTION Change the S pattern acceleration/deceleration C switch (X20 signal) after the speed becomes constant. S pattern operation before switching continues even if the X20 signal is changed during acceleration or deceleration. The X20 signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). Changing
the terminal assignment may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
f1
Setting value "2" [S-pattern acceleration /deceleration B]
f2
Time
S e
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Pr. 142
Pr. 143Pr. 141
Pr. 140 Pr. 13
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z )
[Anti-backlash measure function]
Setting value "3"
Time
Pr.382
Pr.383
Pr.381
S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration C switchover (X20)
OFF OFFON
Output frequency
Set frequency
Pr.380
Frequency
Time
Operation X20 signal
During Acceleration
During Deceleration
OFF Pr. 380 Acceleration S- pattern 1
Pr. 381 Deceleration S-pattern 1
ON Pr. 382 Acceleration S- pattern 2
Pr. 383 Deceleration S-pattern 2
S-pattern acceleration
Linear acceleration
Ts
T
Ts
REMARKS At a start, the motor starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency when the
start signal turns on. If there is a difference between the speed command and speed
at a start of deceleration due to torque limit operation etc., the speed command is matched with the speed to make deceleration.
93
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(6) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D (Pr. 29 = "5", Pr. 516 to Pr. 519)
Set the time taken for S-pattern operation of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration using Pr. 516 to Pr. 519. Set each S-pattern operation time for acceleration start (Pr. 516), acceleration completion (Pr. 517), deceleration start (Pr. 518) and deceleration completion (Pr. 519).
When S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D is set, acceleration/deceleration time will become longer as follows:
Set acceleration/deceleration time T1 indicates Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 110 and Pr. 111.
For example, the actual acceleration time when starting the inverter with an S-pattern acceleration/deceleration pattern D selected for a stop to 60Hz in the parameter initial setting is as shown left:
Therefore,
Parameters referred to Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Refer to page 88 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 ( Input terminal function selection ) Refer to page 118
Pr.516
ONStart signal
Pr.517 Pr.518 Pr.519
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
Time
T2
Deceleration reference frequency (Pr.20)
T1
Starting frequency (Pr.13)
Pr.517/2
Pr.517
Pr.516
Pr.516/2 Linear acceleration Slope of Pr.7, Pr.44, Pr.110
Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at a start of acceleration+S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration) /2
Actual deceleration time T2 = set deceleration time T1 + (S-pattern time at a start of deceleration+S-pattern time at a completion of deceleration) /2
CAUTION Even if the start signal is turned off during acceleration, the
inverter will not decelerate immediately to avoid sudden frequency change. (Likewise, the inverter will not immediately accelerate when deceleration is changed to reacceleration by turning the start signal on during deceleration, etc.)
Set acceleration time T1 = (Pr. 20 - Pr. 13) Pr. 7/Pr. 20 Actual acceleration time T2 = set acceleration time T1 + (Pr. 516 + Pr. 517) /2
Set acceleration time T1 = (60Hz - 0.5Hz) 5s/60Hz 4.96s (actual acceleration time at linear acceleration)
Actual acceleration time T2 = 4.96s + (0.1s + 0.1s)/2 = 5.06s (acceleration time at
S-pattern acceleration)
94
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4.8.4 Shortest acceleraiton/deceleration and optimum acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292, Pr. 293)
Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
(1) Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 292 = "1, 11", Pr. 293) Set when you want to accelerate/decelerate the motor for the shortest time. It is desired to make acceleration/
deceleration in a shorter time for a machine tool etc. but the design values of machine constants are unknown. Acceleration/deceleration speed is automatically adjusted at a start of acceleration/deceleration so that
acceleration/deceleration is made with the maximum torque the inverter can output according to the setting value of Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (The setting values of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8are not changed)
Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the shortest time using Pr. 293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection. When the setting value is "0" (initial value), both acceleration and deceleration can be made in the shortest time.
Since the 7.5K or less inverter has a built-in brake resistor, set Pr. 292to "11". Set "11" also when a high-duty brake resistor or brake unit is connected. Deceleration time can be further shortened.
When the shortest acceleration/deceleration mode is selected, the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration becomes 150% (adjustable using Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 ). The setting of Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed operation.
It is inappropriate to use for the following applications. a)Machine with a large inertia such as a fan (more than 10 times). Since stall prevention operation will be
activated for a long time, this type of machine may be brought to an alarm stop due to motor overloading, etc. . b)It is desired to always perform operation with a constant acceleration/deceleration time. c)It is desired to perform operation making sure the inverter and motor have enough capability.
The inverter operates in the same conditions as when appropriate values are set in each parameter even if acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This function is useful when you just want to operate, etc. without fine parameter setting.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
61 Reference current 9999 0 to 500A Set the reference current during shortest/ optimum
acceleration/deceleration. 9999 Rated inverter output current value is reference
62 Reference value at acceleration 9999
0 to 220% Set the limit value/optimum value during shortest/ optimum acceleration.
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% is a limit value Optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% is an optimum value
63 Reference value at deceleration 9999
0 to 220% Set the limit value/optimum value during shortest/ optimum deceleration.
9999 Shortest acceleration/deceleration: 150% is a limit value Optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% is an optimum value
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration
0
0 Normal mode 1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brake) 11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (with brake) 3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration
7, 8 Brake sequence mode 1, 2 (Refer to page 108.)
293 Acceleration/ deceleration individual operation selection
0
0 Both acceleration and deceleration are made in the shortest/optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
1 Only acceleration is made in the shortest/optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
2 Only deceleration is made in the shortest/optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
REMARKS If outmatic acceleration/deceleration mode has been selected, inputting the jog signal (jog operation), RT signal (second
function selection) or X9 signal (third function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in automatic acceleration/deceleration mode.
Since acceleration/deceleration is made with the stall prevention operation being activated, the acceleration/deceleration speed always varies according to the load conditions.
Note that when proper values are set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 , acceleration/deceleration time may be shorter than selecting shortest acceleration/deceleration mode.
B3
95
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/deceleration pattern
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 292 = "3") The optimum operation within the rating range where the inverter can be continuously used regardless of the
inverter capability is performed. Automatically set torque boost and acceleration/deceleration time so that the average current during acceleration/ deceleration is the rated current by the self-learning of the inverter. It is appropriate for applications such as automatic transfer machine, etc. which is small in load change and is operated in a predetermined pattern.
At the initial time when the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode has been selected, operation is performed at the values set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. After operation, the average current and peak current are calculated from the motor current during acceleration/deceleration.These values are compared with the reference current (initial value is rated inverter current) and calculated, then more appropriate values are set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8. After that, operation is performed under the conditions of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 set, and more appropriate values are calculated.
Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode using Pr. 293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection. When the setting value is "0" (initial value), both acceleration and deceleration are made in the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
It is inappropriate for machines which change in load and operation conditions. Since the stored optimum values are used for the next operation, faults, e.g. acceleration/deceleration is not made if conditons change, alarm stop is made due to overcurrent protective function, may occur.
(3) Adjustment of shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63) By setting the adjustment parameters Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, the application range can be made wider.
Storage of parameters The optimum values of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8are written to both the parameter RAM and EEPROM only three times of acceleration/ deceleration after the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode has been selected or after the power is switched on or the inverter is reset. At of after the fourth attempt, they are not stored into EEPROM. Hence, after power-on or inverter reset, the values changed at the third time are valid. Note that the values changed at the fourth or later time are calculated to optimum and the values of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 are set to RAM, the values can be stored into EEPROM by reading and writting the values with the operation panel and paramter unit.
REMARKS If shortest acceleration/deceleration mode has been selected, inputting the jog signal (jog operation), RT signal (second
function selection) or X9 signal (third function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation, second function selection or third function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in shortest/optimum acceleration/deceleration mode.
Because of the learning system, this mode is not valid at the first operation after the optimum acceleration/deceleration mode is set. The optimum value are operated on only when acceleration is made from a stop to 30Hz or more or when deceleration is made
from 30Hz or more to stop. When the motor is not connected or output current is less than 5% of the rated inverter current, optimum acceleration/
deceleration mode will not function.
Parameter Number Name Setting Range Description
61 Reference current
0 to 500A
For example, when the motor and inverter are different in capacity, set the rated motor current value. Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration Optimum acceleration/deceleration: Set reference current (A) of the optimum current during acceleration/deceleration
9999 (initial value) The rated inverter current is defined as reference.
62
63
Reference value at acceleration
Reference value at deceleration
0 to 220%
Set when it is desired to change the reference level of acceleration and deceleration. Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the stall prevention operation level (ratio to the current value of Pr. 61 ) during acceleration/deceleration. Shortest acceleration/deceleration: Set the optimum current level (ratio to the current value of Pr. 61 ) during acceleration/deceleration.
9999 (initial value)
Shortest acceleration/deceleration: The 150% value during shortest acceleration/deceleration is judged as the stall prevention operation level. Optimum acceleration/deceleration: 100% is the optimum value
REMARKS Since the Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 settings automatically return to the initial value (9999) if the Pr. 292 setting is changed, set Pr. 292 first
when you need to set Pr. 61 to Pr. 63. Parameters referred to
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 88 Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level Refer to page 74 Pr. 22 Torque limit level Refer to page 98
Number of Optimum
Value Changes
Pr. 7, Pr. 8 Optimum
ConditionsEEPROM value
RAM value
1 to 3 times Updated Updated Updated
4 or more times
Unchanged from third value
Updated Updated
96
Selection and protection of a motor
4.9 Selection and protection of a motor
* Applied motor can be used only with FR-B series.
4.9.1 Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9)
*1 The initial value of the FR-B-750(200V/400V), FR-B3(N)(H)400, 750 is set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
(1) Electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 9)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Motor protection from overheat Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr. 9 96 Use the constant torque motor Applied motor * Pr. 71 99
Use the constant torque motor Offline auto tuning Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96 70
Set the current of the electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Rated inverter output current
*1
55K or less 0 to 500A Set the rated motor current.
75K or more 0 to 3600A
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output transistor, and stops the output. (The operation characteristic is shown on the left) Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr. 9. (When
the power supply specification is 200V/220V(400V/ 440V) 60Hz, set the 1.1 times the rated motor current.)
Set "0" in Pr. 9 when you do not want to activate the electronic thermal relay function, e.g. when using an external thermal relay with the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)
In FR-B series, when using the Mitsubishi explosion- proof constant-torque motor 1) Set "1" in Pr. 71. (This provides a 100% continuous
torque characteristic in the low-speed range.) 2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
*1 When a value 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is set in Pr. 9
*2 The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
*3 When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi explosion-proof constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to operation at 6Hz or higher.
CAUTION Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off. When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor. When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay. A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay. The operation time of the transistor protection thermal relay shortens when the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting increases.
Electronic thermal relay function for transistor protection
52.5% 105%
50 100 150
60
120
180
240
50
60
70
6Hz
20Hz
10Hz
6Hz
0.5Hz
30Hz or more*3
20Hz 10Hz
0.5Hz
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of inverter rating*1.2
Pr. 9 = 100% setting of inverter rating*2
(s )
u n
it d
is p
la y i n
t h
is r
e g
io n
(m in
) u
n it d
is p
la y i n
th
is r
e g
io n
O p
e ra
ti o
n t
im e
( m
in )
O p
e ra
ti o
n t
im e
( s )
Characteristic when electronic thermal relay function for motor protection is turned off (When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))
30Hz or more*3
Inverter output current (%) (% to the rated output current)
Operation region Region on the right of characteristic curve Non-operation region Region on the left of characteristic curve
97
Selection and protection of a motor
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Electronic thermal relay function alarm output and alarm signal (THP signal)
(3) External thermal relay input (OH signal)
100%: Electronic thermal relay function alarm operation value The alarm signal (THP) is output when the electronic thermal relay function cumulative value reaches 85% of the level set in Pr. 9 or Pr. 51. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/ L relay setting, electronic thermal relay function protection (E. THM/E.THT) occurs.
The inverter does not shut off the output if the alarm signal is output.
For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
External thermal relay input connection example
To protect the motor against overheat, use the OH signal when using an external thermal relay or the built-in thermal protector of the motor.
When the thermal relay operates, the inverter shuts off the output and outputs the alarm signal (E.OHT).
For the terminal used for OH signal input, assign the function by setting "7" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
OFF ON
100% 85%
Time ON
Electronic thermal relay function operation level
Electronic thermal O/L
relay alarm (THP)
Inverter
U V W OH
Thermal relay protector
IM
Explosion- proof motor
SD
98
Selection and protection of a motor
(4) PTC thermistor input (PTC signal)
Built-in PTC thermistor of the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For the terminal used for PTC signal input, assign the function by setting "63" in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection
and also set the AU/PTC switchover switch to the PTC terminal function. (The initial setting is the AU terminal function.)
If a motor overheat state is detected for more than 10s according to the input from the PTC thermistor, the inverter shuts off the output and outputs the PTC thermal alarm signal (E.PTC).
PTC thermistor input connection example
The input specifications of the PTC thermistor are shown on the right.
Motor Temperature PTC Thermistor Resistance Value () Normal 0 to 500
Boundary 500 to 4k Overheat 4k or higher
CAUTION When the PTC signal was not assigned to Pr. 184 and the AU/PTC switchover switch was set to the PTC terminal function, the
function assigned to the AU terminal is always off. Reversely, when the PTC signal was assigned to Pr. 184 and the AU/PTC switchover switch was set to the AU terminal function, a PTC thermal error (E.PTC) occurs since the function is always in a motor overheat state.
When you want to input a current, assign the AU signal to the other signal. When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function
of the AU terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 71 Applied motor Refer to page 99 Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Refer to page 269 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Specifications of the AU terminal Refer to page 26
Inverter
U AU
PTC
V W
AU(PTC)
Explosion- proof motor
SD
Inverter
AU/PTC switchover switch
AU
PTC
Factory-set to "AU". Set to the "PTC" position to validate the PTC signal input.
99
Selection and protection of a motor
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.9.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71) Setting can be made only for FR-B series.
(1) Set the motor to be used Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor. Setting is necessary when using a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function suitable for the motor is set.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
71 Applied motor 0 0.1 Selecting the variable torque motor or constant-torque motor sets the corresponding motor thermal characteristic.
Pr. 71 Setting Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal Relay Function
Motor ( : used motor) Variable torque Constant torque
0 Thermal characteristics of a variable torque motor 1 Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
CAUTION Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
B
100
Motor brake and stop operation
4.10 Motor brake and stop operation
*1 Setting can be made only for FREQROL-B3 series. *2 When the regenerative brake option is used for FREQROL-B series (55K or less) or FREQROL-B3 series, another explosion-proof test is
necessary.
4.10.1 DC injection brake and zero speed control, servo lock (X13 signal, Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Motor braking torque adjustment DC injection brake Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 *1 100 Improve the motor braking torque with an option Selection of a regenerative brake Pr. 30, Pr. 70 *2 102
Performing operation by DC current input DC current feeding mode Pr. 30 102
Coast the motor to a stop Selection of motor stopping method Pr. 250 104 Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake (vibration restraint at stop-on-contact)
Stop-on-contact control Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276 105
The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust the stop timing and braking torque. In DC injection brake operation, DC voltage is directly applied to the motor to prevent the motor shaft from rotating. The motor will not return to the original position if the motor shaft rotates due to external force.
Parameter Number Name
Initial Value Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 3Hz
0 to 120Hz Set the operation frequency of the DC injection brake (zero speed control, servo lock).
9999 Operated at Pr. 13 or less.
11 DC injection brake operation time
0.5s/ 0s * 0.5s
0 DC injection brake (zero speed control) disabled
0.5s 0.1 to 10s Set the operation time of the DC injection brake (zero speed control, servo lock).
8888 Operated when X13 signal is on
12 DC injection brake operation voltage
7.5K or less 4%
0 to 30% Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When "0" is set, DC injection brake is disabled.
11K or more 2%
B3
B3
101
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Operation voltage (torque) setting (Pr. 12) Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage. When Pr. 12 = "0%", the DC injection brake is not operated. (At a stop, the motor coasts.) When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor), change the Pr. 12 setting as follows.
3.7K or less ...4%, 5.5K or more...2%
(4) DC dynamic brake in FREQROL-B series (Pr. 11) The DC dynamic brake in FREQROL-B series can be selected to operate (Pr.11=0.5s) or not to operate (Pr.11=0s) depending on the Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time. The DC injection brake operation frequency and voltage are as follows. (The setting cannot be changed.)
When Pr. 11 = "0.1 to 10s"
When Pr. 11 = "8888"
(1) Operation frequency setting (Pr. 10) When the frequency at which the DC injection brake operates is set in Pr.
10, the DC injection brake (zero speed control, servo lock) is operated when this frequency is reached during deceleration.
At the Pr. 10 setting of "9999", the DC injection brake is operated when deceleration is made to the frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
(2) Operation time setting (X13 signal, Pr. 11) Use Pr. 11 to set the duration period the DC injection brake is applied. When Pr. 11 = "0s", the DC injection brake is not operated. (At a stop, the
motor coasts.) When Pr. 11 = "8888", the DC injection brake is applied when X13 signal is
turned on. For the terminal used for X13 signal input, set "13" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.
189 to assign the function. (Refer to page 118)
Capacity Pr.11 Initial value Operation frequency Operation voltage 7.5K or less
0.5s 3Hz 4%
11K to 55K 2%
75K or more 0 (DC injection brake disabled) 1Hz 1%
Parameters referred to Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90 Pr. 71 Applied motor Refer to page 99 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 422 Position loop gain Refer to page 135
Time
P r.
1 0 O
p e
ra ti o
n
fr e
q u
e n
c y
Time
Pr.12
Operation voltagevoltage
Pr.11 Operation time
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z )
DC injection brake
Pr. 12
OFFON
STF ON
X13 signal
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
DC injection brake
voltage ON
Time
Time
B3
B3
B3
B
102
Motor brake and stop operation
4.10.2 Selection of regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) (75K or more) Setting can be made only for FR-B series.
(1) When the built-in brake resistor, the brake unit (FR-BU) is used Set "0 (initial value)" in Pr. 30. The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows. (The built-in brake resistor is provided for the 7.5K or less.) FR-B-750 to 3700(200V)........................ 3% FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K(200V) .......................... 2% FR-B-750 to 7.5K(400V) ........................ 2% FR-B-75K or more (200V/400V)............. 0% (without built-in brake resistor)
When making frequent starts/stops, use the brake unit (FR-BU, MT-BU5) to increase the regenerative brake duty. Use a power regeneration converter (MT-RC) for continuous operation in regenerative status. Use a high power factor converter (MT-HC) to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continuously use the regenerative mode.
CAUTION The regenerative brake option (brake unit) can be used with the 75K or more of FR-B series. Cannot be used with the 55K or less.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
30 Regenerative function selection 0
0
Regeneration unit Terminal for power supply to the inverter
Built-in brake resistor, without regenerative function, brake unit (FR-BU type)
R, S, T
1
Brake unit (MT-BU5), power regeneration converter (MT-RC) Supports capacities of the FR-B- 75K or more.
R, S, T
2
High power factor converter (MT- HC) Supports capacities of the FR-B- 75K or more.
P, N
70 Special regenerative brake duty 0% 0 to 10%*
Set the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation. * Supports capacities of the FR-B-75K or more.
Regeneration Unit Power Supply to the Inverter
Pr. 30 Setting
Pr. 70 Setting
Not used R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 0 (initial value)
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1 0% (initial value)
Brake unit (MT-BU5) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 1 10% High power factor converter (FR-HC) P/+, N/- 2
(2) When using a brake unit (MT-BU5) and power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (FR-B-75K or more)
Set "1" in Pr. 30. Set "10%" in Pr. 70 when using a brake unit (MT-BU5). Set "0%" in Pr. 70 when using a power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
B
103
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) When using the high power factor converter (MT-HC) (FR-B-75K or more) When using the high power factor converter (MT-HC), another explosion-proof test is necessary. Note, however, that the test is not necessary when using the high power factor converter for power factor improvement. Set "2" in Pr. 30. The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. Use any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function assignment) to assign the following signals to the contact input
terminals. (a)X10 signal: MT-HC connection
To make protective coordination with the MT-HC, use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output. Input the RDY signal of the MT-HC.
(b)X11 signal: MT-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal) When the setting has been made to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure for RS- 485 communication operation, use this signal to hold the mode. Input the Y1 or Y2 signal (instantaneous power failure detection signal) of the MT-HC.
For the terminal used for X10 or X11 signal input, assign its function by setting "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.
(4) Regenerative brake duty alarm output and alarm signal (RBP signal) 100%: regenerative overvoltage protection operation value [RB] appears on the operation panel and an alarm signal (RBP) is
output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100% of the Pr. 70 setting, a regenerative overvoltage (E.OV1 to E.OV3) occurs.
The inverter does not shut off the output when the alarm signal is output.
For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
REMARKS The MRS signal can also be used instead of the X10 signal. (Refer to page 121.) Refer to pages 34 to 37 for the connection of brake unit, high power factor converter (MT-HC).
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) or Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal
function selection) may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 118)
CAUTION The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
Parameters referred to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 148 Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection Refer to page 152
Ratio of brake duty to the Pr. 70 setting
Regenerative brake prealarm (RBP) OFF ON
100% 85%
Time ON
104
Motor brake and stop operation
4.10.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250)
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off. Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal. You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). (Refer to page 123 for start signal selection)
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range
Description Start signal (STF/STR)
(Refer to page 123) Stop operation
250 Stop selection 9999
0 to 100s
STF signal: Forward rotation start
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor is coasted to a stop when the preset time elapses after the start signal is turned off.The motor is coasted to a stop (Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the start signal is turned off.
1000s to 1100s STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal
9999
STF signal: Forward rotation start
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
When the start signal is turned off, the motor decelerates to stop.
8888 STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal
(1) Decelerate the motor to a stop Set Pr. 250 to "9999" (initial value) or "8888". The motor decelerates to a stop when the start
signal (STF/STR) turns off.
(2) Coast the motor to a stop Use Pr. 250 to set the time from when the start signal
turns off until the output is shut off. When any of "1000" to "1100" is set, the output is shut off after (Pr. 250 1000)s.
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had turned off. The motor coasts to a stop.
The RUN signal turns off when the output stops.
REMARKS Stop selection is invalid when the following functions are activated.
Power failure stop function (Pr. 261) PU stop (Pr. 75) Deceleration stop because of fault definition (Pr. 875) Deceleration stop because of communication error (Pr. 502) Offline auto tuning (with motor running) Emergency stop by LONWORKS communication
CAUTION When the start signal is turned on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
Parameters referred to Pr. 7 Acceleration time , Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 88 Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90
Time
ON OFFStart signal
Deceleration starts when start signal turns off
Deceleration time (Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
ON OFF RUN signal
OFFONStart signal
Output is shut off when set time elapses after start signal turns off Pr.250
Motor coasts to stop
Time
OFFRUN signal
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
ON
105
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.10.4 Stop-on contact control function (Pr. 6, Pr. 48, Pr. 270, Pr. 275) Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc. of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper etc. This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications, ensuring steady precise positioning.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.
22 Stall prevention operation level 150% 0 to 400%
Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-contact control. The smaller value set in either Pr. 22 or Pr. 48 has a priority.48
Second stall prevention operation current
150% 0 to 220%
270 Stop-on contact/ load torque high- speed frequency control selection
0
0 Normal operation 1 Stop-on-contact control
2 Load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 236)
3 Stop-on-contact+load torque high speed frequency control (Refer to page 236)
275 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed multiplying factor
9999 0 to 1000%
Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control. Normally set 130% to 180%. Valid only during advanced magnetic flux vector control
9999 No compensation.
B3
Vibration Complete stop
Lift Lift
Power supply
Forward rotation command
High-speed operation command
Middle-speed operation command
Stop-on contact selection 0
Stop-on contact selection 1
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
STF
RH *
RM *
RL *
RT *
U
V
W
MC
Mechanical brake
Motor
* The input terminal used differs according to the Pr.180 to Pr.189 settings.
Sink logic
SD
(a) (b) (c)
Time
Pr.4
RH
RM
RL
RT
Pr.5
Pr.6O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
0
Normal mode Stop-on contact control mode
(a):Acceleration time (Pr.7)
(b):Deceleration time (Pr.8)
(c):Second deceleration time (Pr.44)
* ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
ON
Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when both RL and RT switch on. *RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any time difference
106
Motor brake and stop operation
(1) Set stop-on-contact control Make sure that the inverter is in external operation mode. (Refer to page 182 ) Set"1 or 3" in Pr. 270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection . Set output frequency during stop-on-contact control in Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
The frequency should be as low as possible (about 2Hz). If it is set to more than 30Hz, the operating frequency will be 30Hz.
When both the RT and RL signals are switched on, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact mode, in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 6 independently of the preceding speed.
(2) Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection
* When RL and RT are on, Pr. 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency is invalid. The smaller setting between Pr.22 and Pr.48 is valid.
CAUTION By increasing the Pr. 275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but overcurrent alarm (E.OCT) may occur or
the machine may oscillate in a stop-on-contact state. The stop-on-contact function is diferent from servo-lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period, this
function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately reset this function and use a mechanical brake to hold the load.
Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is made invalid: PU operation (Pr. 79) JOG operation (JOG signal) PU+external operation (Pr. 79) PID control function operation (Pr. 128) Remote setting function operation (Pr. 59) Orientation control function operation
When performing stop-on-contact control during encoder feedback control, encoder feedback control is made invalid due to a mode shift to the stop-on-contact control mode.
Useful Functions Normal Operation (either RL or RT is off or both are off)
With Stop-on-Contact Control (both RL and RT are on)
Output frequency Multi-speed
0 to 5V, 0 to 10V 4 to 20mA etc.
Pr. 6 setting
Stall prevention operation level Pr. 22 setting The smaller value set in either Pr. 22 or Pr. 48. * Torque limit level
Excitation current low speed scaling factor
The current is compensated for by Pr. 275 (0 to 1000%) settings before RL and RT are switched on.
Fast-response current limit Valid Invalid
107
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Set frequency when stop-on-contact control (Pr. 270 = 1, 3) is selected The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together.
Bold frame indicates stop-on-contact control is valid. Stop-on-contact control is disabled when remote setting function is selected (Pr. 59 = 1 to 3).
CAUTION Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming
the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting) Refer to page 81 Pr. 15 Jog frequency Refer to page 83 Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr. 48 Second stall prevention operation current Refer to page 74 Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182 Pr. 128 PID action selection Refer to page 228 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 270 = 2, 3 (load torque high speed frequency control) Refer to page 236
Input Signal ( = on) Set Frequency
RH RM RL RT JOG Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) By 0 to 5V(0 to 10V), 4 to 20mA input Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Pr. 25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 24 Multi-speed setting (speed4) Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) Pr. 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 15 Jog frequency Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) Pr. 15 Jog frequency By 0 to 5V(0 to 10V), 4 to 20mA input
Input Signal ( = on) Set Frequency
RH RM RL RT JOG
108
Motor brake and stop operation
4.10.5 Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, Pr. 292) Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake operation timing signal in vertical lift and other applications. This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
278 Brake opening frequency 3Hz 0 to 30Hz Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about 1.0Hz. This parameter may be only set if Pr. 278 Pr. 282.
279 Brake opening current 130% 0 to 220% Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop due to gravity at start. Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.
280 Brake opening current detection time 0.3s 0 to 2s Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3s.
281 Brake operation time at start 0.3s 0 to 5s Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened. Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2s when Pr. 292 = "8".
282 Brake operation frequency 6Hz 0 to 30Hz
Set the frequency to activate the mechanical brake by turning off the brake opening request signal (BOF). Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3 to 4Hz. Setting is enabled only when Pr. 282 Pr. 278.
283 Brake operation time at stop 0.3s 0 to 5s Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.1s when Pr. 292=7. Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is closed + 0.2 to 0.3s when Pr. 292 = 8.
284 Deceleration detection function selection 0
0 Deceleration is not detected.
1 If deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation, the inverter alarm is provided.
285 Overspeed detection frequency 9999
0 to 30Hz If (detected frequency) - (output frequency) Pr. 285 during encoder feedback control, the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided.
9999 Overspeed is not detected.
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 0
0 Normal operation mode 1, 11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Refer to page 94)
3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode (Refer to page 95) 7 Brake sequence mode 1 8 Brake sequence mode 2
CAUTION When brake sequence mode is selected, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is invalid. When using this function, set the acceleration time to 1s or longer. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
B3
Mechanical brake
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Motor
MC
STF
RH
AU(BRI) *1
SD
MC
24VDC
Brake opening request signal (BOF)
Start signal
Multi-speed signal
Brake opening completion signal (BRI
Sink logic
Pr.184 15
Pr.190 20
Power supply
U
V
W
RUN(BOF)
SE
*2 *3
MCCB
*1 The input signal terminal used differs according to the Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 settings.
*2 The output signal terminal used differs according to the Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 settings.
*3 The current should be within the permissible current of transistor in the inverter. (24V 0.1ADC)
109
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Set the brake sequence mode The brake sequence function is valid only when the external operation mode, external/PU combined operation mode
1 or network operation mode is selected. Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 292 .
To ensure more complete sequence control, it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal input) in Pr. 292 .
Set "15" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) and assign the brake opening completion signal (BRI) to the input terminal.
Set "20 (positive logic)" or 120 (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) and assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the output terminal.
(2) With brake opening completion signal input (Pr. 292 = "7")
When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279 , the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed. When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed.
When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr. 282 during deceleration, the BOF signal is turned off. When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the electromagnetic brake operation was completed and the BRI signal was turned off, the inverter output is switched off.
(3) Without brake opening completion signal input (Pr. 292 = "8")
When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279 , the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed. When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the BOF signal is output, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed.
When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr. 282 during deceleration, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is turned off. When the time set in Pr. 283 has elapsed after the BOF signal is turned off, the inverter output is switched off.
REMARKS Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the jog signal (jog operation), RT signal (second
function selection) or X9 signal (third function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation or second and third function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during automatic acceleration/deceleration operation.
STF ON
Output I
Brake opening request (BOF signal)
ON
Electromagnetic brake operation
OpenedClosed Closed
Time
Brake opening completion (BRI signal)
ON
Pr.278
Pr.282
Target frequency
Pr.13
Pr.280
Pr.281
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.283
Pr.279
STF ON
I
ON
Pr.278 Pr.282
Target frequency
(Hz)
Pr.281
Pr.283
Pr.280
Pr.279
Pr.13
Output frequency
Output
Brake opening request (BOF signal)
Electromagnetic brake operation
Closed Opened Closed
Time
110
Motor brake and stop operation
(4) Protective functions If any of the following errors occurs in the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in an alarm, shuts off the output, and turns off the brake opening request signal (BOF). Error Display Description
E.MB1 (Detection frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 during encoder feedback control When Pr. 285 Overspeed detection frequency = 9999, overspeed is not detected.
E.MB2 Deceleration is not normal during deceleration operation from the set frequency to the frequency set in Pr. 282. (when Pr. 284 =1) (except stall prevention operation)
E.MB3 Brake opening request signal (BOF) turned on though the motor is at a stop. (gravity drop prevention function)
E.MB4 Although more than 2s have elapsed after the start command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, the brake opening request signal (BOF) does not turn on.
E.MB5 Although more than 2s have elapsed after the brake opening request signal (BOF) turned on, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn on.
E.MB6 Though the inverter had turned on the brake opening request signal (BOF), the brake opening completion signal (BRI) turned off midway.
E.MB7 Although more than 2s have elapsed after the brake opening request signal (BOF) turned off at a stop, the brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn off.
CAUTION Overspeed detection (Pr. 285) is valid under encoder feedback control (used with the FR-A7AP option) even if a value other than
"7 or 8" is set in Pr. 292. A too large setting of Pr. 278 Brake opening frequency activates stall prevention operation and may cause E.MB4.
Parameters referred to Pr. 180 to Pr. 186 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr. 195 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Encoder feedback control Refer to page 242
111
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.10.6 Orientation control (Pr. 350 to Pr. 366, Pr. 369)
This function is used with a position detector (encoder) installed to the spindle of a machine tool, etc. to allow a rotation shaft to be stopped at the specified position (oriented). Option FR-A7AP is necessary. Pr. 350 Stop position command selection is initially set to "9999", orientation control function is invalid.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
350 Stop position command selection 9999
0 Internal stop position command (Pr. 356) 1 External stop position command (FR-A7AX 16-bit data)
9999 Orientation control invalid
351 Orientation speed 2Hz 0 to 30Hz Decrease the motor speed to the set value when the orientation command (X22) is given.
352 Creep speed 0.5Hz 0 to 10Hz After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed decreases to the creep speed set in Pr. 352 as soon as the current position pulse reaches the creep switchover position set in Pr. 353.
353 Creep switchover position 511 0 to 16383*
354 Position loop switchover position 96 0 to 8191
As soon as the current position pulse reaches the set position loop switchover position, control is changed to position loop.
355 DC injection brake start position 5 0 to 255
After changed to position loop, DC injection brake is applied and the motor stops as soon as the current position pulse reaches the set DC injection brake start position.
356 Internal stop position command 0 0 to 16383*
When "0" is set in Pr. 350, the internal position command is activated and the setting value of Pr. 356 becomes a stop position.
357 Orientation in-position zone 5 0 to 255 Set the in-position zone at a stop of the orientation.
358 Servo torque selection 1 0 to 13 Functions at orientation completion can be selected.
359 Encoder rotation direction 1
0
1
360 16 bit data selection 0
0 Speed command When 1 is set in Pr. 350 and the FR-A7AX is mounted, set a stop position using 16- bit data. Stop position command is input as binary regardless of the Pr. 304 setting.
1 16 bit data is used as external position command as is.
2 to 127
Set the stop position dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular intervals.
361 Position shift 0 0 to 16383*
Shift the origin using a compensation value without changing the origin of the encoder. The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting value of Pr. 361 to the position command.
362 Orientation position loop gain 1 0.1 to 100
When servo torque function is selected using Pr. 358, output frequency for generating servo torque increases to the creep speed of Pr. 352 gradually according to the slope set in Pr. 362. Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, a machine may hunt, etc.
363 Completion signal output delay time 0.5s 0 to 5.0s
The orientation complete signal is output delaying the set time after in-position zone is entered. Also, the signal turns off delaying the set time after in-position zone is out.
364 Encoder stop check time 0.5s 0 to 5.0s
Orientation fault signal (ORM) is output when the encoder remains stopped for the set time without orientation completion in the state where no orientation complete signal (ORA) is output. ORM signal is output when orientation is not completed again in the set time in the state where ORA signal is output.
A
Encoder
CW
Clockwise direction as viewed from A is forward rotation
CCW
A
Encoder Counter clockwise direction as viewed from A is forward rotation
112
Motor brake and stop operation
(1) Setting If the orientation command signal (X22) is turned on during operation after the various parameters have been set, the speed will decelerate to the "orientation switchover speed". After the "orientation stop distance" is calculated, the speed will further decelerate, and the "orientation state" (servo lock) will be entered. The "orientation complete signal" (ORA) will be output when the "orientation complete width" is entered.
(2) Setting I/O singals
365 Orientation limit 9999 0 to 60.0s Measure the time taken after passing the creep switchover position and output the orientation fault signal (ORM) if orientation is not completed within the set time.
9999 Set to 120s.
366 Recheck time 9999 0 to 5.0s
Turning off the start signal with orientation command (X22) on after stopping the motor by orientation control, the present position is checked again after the set time elapses and the orientation complete signal (ORA) or orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
9999 Not checked.
369 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses of the encoder.
Set the number of pulses before multiplied by four. The above parameters can be set when the FR-A7AP (option) is mounted. * When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the maximum setting is 9999. When a parameter unit is used, up to the maximum value within
the setting range can be set.
Termi nal Terminal Name Application Explanation
X22*1 Orientation command input Used to enter an orientation signal for orientation. For the terminal used for X22 signal input, set "22" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the function.
SD Contact input common Common terminal for the orientation signal.
ORA*2 Orientaiton complete signal output
Switched low if the orientation has stopped within the in-position zone while the start and orientation signals are input. For the terminal used for the ORA signal output, assign the function by setting "27 (positive logic) or 127 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196.
ORM*2 Orientation fault signal output Switched low if the orientation has not stopped within the in-position zone while the start and orientation signals are input. For the terminal used for the ORM signal output, assign the function by setting "28 (positive logic) or 128 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196.
SE Open collector output common Common terminal for the ORA and ORM open collector output terminals. *1 For X22 signals, assign functions to any of terminal using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (ouput terminal function selection). (Refer to page 118) *2 For ORA and ORM signals, assign functions to any of terminal using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (ouput terminal function selection). (Refer to page 125)
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
113
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Selecting stop position command (Pr. 350 Stop position command selection ) Select either the internal stop position command (Pr. 356) or the external stop position command (16-bit data using
the FR-A7AX).
2)External stop position command (Pr. 350 = "1") Mount the option FR-A7AX and set a stop position using 16-bit data (binary input). The value set in Pr. 360 16 bit data selection should be the number of stop positions less 1.
Pr.350 Setting Stop Position Command Source 0 Internal stop position command (Pr. 356: 0 to 16383) 1 External stop position command (FR-A7AX) 16-bit data
1) Internal stop position command (Pr. 350 = "0") The value set in Pr. 356 is the stop position. When the number of encoder pulses is 1024p/r, one revolution of the encoder is divided into 4096 positions, i.e. 360/4096 pulses = 0.0879/pulses per address, as shown on the right. The stop positions (addresses) are indicated in parentheses.
Pr. 360 Setting Description 0 External position command is made invalid (speed command or torque command with the FR-A7AX)
1
Position command direct input The 16-bit digital signal from the FR-A7AX is directly serves as stop position command.
2 to 127
Set the stop position command dividing up to 128 stop positions at regular intervals. If the external stop command entered is greater than the setting, the stop positions are the same as those in the maximum external stop command value.
[Example] When Pr. 369 = "1024" [Example 2] 8 stop positions [Example 3] 120 stop positions
When Pr. 360 = "1" When Pr. 360 = "7" When Pr. 360 = "119" CAUTION
Values in parentheses indicate binary data entered from the terminals. Even if the position pulse monitor (Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection = 19) is selected, the data monitored is not the number of stop positions but is 0 to 65535 pulses.
FR-A7AX parameters (Pr. 300 to Pr. 305) are invalid. (Valid when Pr. 360 = "0") When the option is not fitted or Pr. 360 = "0", the stop position is 0 even if the external stop position command is selected with the
Pr. 350 setting.
Origin (0) Origin (0) CW CCW
270 (3072)
90 (1024)
Pr. 359 = 1
270 (3072)
180 (2048)
Pr. 359 = 1
180 (2048)
90 (1024)
270 (3071(HBFF))
180 (2047(H7FF))
90 (1023(H3FF))
CW Origin (0) Origin(0)(7 or more)
315
(6)270
(5)225
(1) 45
135 (3)180
(4)
90 (2)
Origin (0) CW
At intervals of 3
270 (90)
180 (60)
90 (30)
114
Motor brake and stop operation
Relationship between stop position command and 16-bit data
3)Pr. 361 Position shift (initial value "0") The stop position is a position obtained by adding the setting value of Pr. 361 to the position command.
(4) Monitor display change
(5) Pr. 357 Orientation in-position zone (initial value "5")
Pr. 350 Stop position
command selection
Pr. 360 16 bit data selection
Operation
Stop position command 16 bit data (FR-A7AX) Speed command
0:internal 0: speed command Internal (Pr. 356) Speed command 16 bit data 1, 2 to 127: position command Internal (Pr. 356) Invalid External command
(or PU)
1: external
0: speed command Internal (Pr. 356) Speed command 16 bit data
1, 2 to 127: position command
External (Internal when the FR-A7AX is not
mounted (Pr. 356)) Position command External command
(or PU)
REMARKS When orientation control is made valid using Pr. 350 Stop position command selection with the FR-A7AP mounted, the rotation
direction of encoder is displayed on the rotation direction display of the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Set the parameter so that turning on the STF signal displays FWD or turning on the STR signal displays REV.
Monitor REMARKS
Position pulse monitor When "19" is set in Pr. 52 , position pulse monitor is displayed instead of output voltage monitor of the PU. (Displayed only when the FR-A7AP is mounted.)
Orientation status
When "22" is set in Pr. 52 , orientation status is displayed instead of output voltage monitor of the PU. (Displayed only when the FR-A7AP is mounted.) 0-Other than orientation operation or orientation speed is not reached 1-Orientation speed is reached 2-Creep speed is reached 3-Position loop is reached 4-Orientation complete 5-Orientatino fault (pulse stop) 6-Orientatino fault (orientation limit) 7-Orientation fault (recheck) 8-Continuous multi-point orientation
The positioning width for orientation stop can be set. The initial setting of Pr. 357 is "5". To change the value, finely adjust with 10 increments, and make fine adjustment.
If the position detection value from the encoder enters during orientation stop, the orientation complete signal (ORA) will be output.
Example of operation
Set
Pr.369
Number of encoder pulses
360 Pr. 357
four times
115
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(6) Orientation operation (under V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control) Orientation during running
1) When the orientation command (X22) is input, the motor speed decreases to the orientation speed set in Pr. 351 Orientation speed . (Pr. 351 initial value: 2Hz)
2) After the speed reaches the orientation speed, the speed decreases to the creep speed set in Pr. 352 Creep speed as soon as the current position pulse reaches the creep switchover position set in Pr. 353 Creep switchover position (Pr. 352 initial value:0.5Hz, Pr. 353 initial value: 511)
3) Moreover, as soon as the current position pulse reaches the set position loop switchover position in Pr. 354 Position loop switchover position , control is changed to position loop. (Pr. 354 initial value: 96)
4) After switching to position loop, the inverter decelerates and stops with DC injection brake as soon as the current position pulse has rached the DC injection brake start position set in Pr. 355 DC injection brake start position. (Pr. 355 initial value: 5)
5) When the position pulse has stopped within the in-position zone set in Pr. 357 Orientation in-position zone , the orientation completion signal (ORA) is output after the comletion signal output delay time set in Pr. 363 Completion signal output delay time has elapsed. If the motor does not stop within the in-position zone due to external force, etc., the orientation completion signal is turned off after the time set in Pr. 363 Completion signal output delay time has elapsed. (Pr. 357 initial value: 5)
6) If the orientation is not completed continusouly for the time set in Pr. 365 Orientation limit after passing the creep switchover position, the orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
7) When the motor stops before the position pulse reaching the in-position zone due to external force after orientation start and orientation completion signal (ORA) is not output, orientation fault signal (ORM) is output after the time set in encoder stop check time set in Pr. 364 Encoder stop check time has elapsed. Moreover, the orientation complete signal (ORA) is turned off after the time set in Pr. 363 Completion signal output delay time has elapsed if the position pulse is outside the in-position zone due to external force, etc. after outputting the orientation complete signal (ORA), and the orientation fault signal (ORM) is output if the orientation has not completed within the time set in Pr. 364 Encoder stop check time .
8) When the start signal (STF or STR) is turned off with the orientation command on after outputting the orientation completion signal (ORA) and orientation fault signal (ORM), the orientation complete signal (ORM) or orientation fault signal (ORM) is output again after recheck time set in Pr. 366 Recheck time has elapsed.
9) The orientation completion signal (ORA) and orientation fault signal (ORM) are not output when the orientation command is off.
Action time chart
REMARKS When the orientation command is off with the start signal on, the speed accelerates to the command speed.
If the motor shaft hants, set a larger value in Pr. 354 Position loop switchover position or a smaller value in Pr. 352 Creep speed to prevent it.
Orientation stop position command DC injection brake
Position loop switchover positionCreep switchover position
Orientation speed Origin
Creep speed
Position loop
Main spindle speed (encoder) Pr. 351 Pr. 352
Start signal (STF, STR)
Orientation command (X22)
Current position signal
Origin signal
Orientation speed (set with Pr. 351 )
Creep speed (set with Pr. 352 )
Creep switchover position (set with Pr. 353)
Position loop switchover (set with Pr. 354 )
DC injection brake start position (set with Pr. 355 ) Stop position command
0
DC injection brake OFF OFFON
Orientation completion signal (ORA) OFF OFFON
OFF
OFF
Time
ON
OFF ON
1) 2) 3) 4)
5)
116
Motor brake and stop operation
Orientation from stop After turning on the orientation command (X22), turning on the start signal will increase the motor speed to the orientation speed set in Pr. 351 Orientation speed, then orientation operation same as when "orientation during running" is performed. Note that, DC injection brake is operated if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position. Action time chart
Continuous multi-point orientation Orientation command and orientation with STF/STR on (Orientation in servo in status)
Read the position data at starting up of DY (refer to the FR-A7AX instruction manual ). When the position signal is within the creep switchover position, the speed starts up to the creep speed not to the
orientation speed. When the position signal is not within the creep switchover position, the speed starts up tp the orientation speed. The DC injection brake is operated if the position signal is within the DC injection brake start position. 16-bit data with the FR-A7AX is valid only when the DY signal is on.
CAUTION The encoder should be coupled with the motor shaft or main spindle oriented with a speed ratio of 1 to 1 without any mechanical
looseness. DC injection brake operates when orientation stop is made. Release the DC injection brake in a time as short as possible (within
several seconds) since continuous operation of the DC injection brake will cause the motor to overheat, leading to burnout. Since no servo lock function is available after orientation stop, provide a holding mechanism such as mechanical brake or knock
pin when secure holding of a main spindle is required. To ensure correct positioning, the encoder must be set in the proper rotation direction and the A and B phases connected correctly. When the pulse signal from the encoder stops due to the encoder signal loss, etc. during orientation, the orientation fault signal
(ORM) may be output. When the DC injection brake is set to disabled using parameter for DC injection brake adjustment (voltage, frequency, speed, time)
when performing orientation control, orientation operation can not be completed. Always set the DC injection brake enabled. To terminate orientation, the start signal (STF or STR) must be first switched off and the orientation signal (X22) must be switched
off. As soon as this orientation signal is switched off, orientation control ends.(Depending on the Pr. 358 Servo torque selection setting, orientation status continues if the orientation signal remains on even if DC injection brake is released at turning off of the start signal. Therefore, the orientation status of the monitor function is not 0.)
When retry function of Pr. 358 Servo torque selection is selected, this retry function is performed three times including the first orientation. When performing orientation control, make proper setting of Pr. 350 Stop position command selection and Pr. 360 16 bit data selection
(external position command selection). If the values set are incorrect, proper orientation control will not be performed. When Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time = "8888" (DC injection brake external selection), DC injection brake does not operate if the
X13 signal is not turned on. Note that the DC injection brake is applied under orientation control regardless of the X13 signal status. When orientation control is exercised, PID control is invalid.
Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)
Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)
Time OFF ON
ON
ON
ONOFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Main spindle speed (encoder)
Pr. 351
Pr. 352
Start signal (STF, STR)
Orientation command (X22)
DC injection brake
Orientation completion signal (ORA)
DY
Position signal
Servo-in
ON
ON
Position command latch
50ms or more is necessary
Servo-in
ON ON
Position command latch
Main spindle speed (encoder)
Pr. 351 Pr. 352
Start signal
Orientation command
Orientation completion signal
Orientation speed (orientation switchover speed)
Creep speed (orientation deceleration ratio)
117
Motor brake and stop operation
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Servo torque selection (Pr. 358 )
1)Servo torque function selection until output of the orientation completion signal Whether servo torque is available or not is selected using Pr. 358 Servo torque selection. Servo torque is not generated if the current position pulse is in between the orientation stop position and DC injection brake start position. Although, the shaft is retained by the DC injection brake, servo torque is generated to return the shaft within the width if the shaft moves out of the width by external force, etc. Once the orientation completion signal (ORA) is output, the motor runs according to the setting made in 4).
2)Retry function selection Select retry function using Pr. 358 Servo torque selection . Note that servo torque function can not be used together. When the motor shaft is not stopped within the in-position zone when the motor stop is checked, orientation operation is performed again by retry function. With this retry function, three orientations including the first one are performed. More than three times retry operations are not made. (The orientation fault signal (ORM) is not output during retry operation)
3)Frequency compensation function when the motor stops outside the orinetation in-position zone When the motor stops before entering the in-position zone due to external force, etc., output frequency is increased to move the shaft to the orientation stop position. The output frequency is gradually increased to the creep speed of Pr. 352 Creep speed . Note that retry function can not be used together.
4)DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse comes off the in-position zone after output of the orientation completion signal (ORA) If the position pulse comes off the orientation in-position width, you can select a setting either fixing a shaft with the DC injection brake or returning the motor to the orientation stop position with servo torque.
5)Orientation operation end switch operation selection between DC injection brake or servo torque When ending the orientation operation, turn off the start signal (STF or STR), then turn off the orientation command (X22). At this time, you can select when to turn off the orientation completion signal (ORA) from between at turning off of the start signal or turning off of the orientation command signal.
6)Selection of completion signal off or on when the motor stops outside of the in-position zone after output of the orientation completion signal (ORA) You can select the mode to turn off the completion signal or keep the completion signal on (orientation fault signal (ORM) is not output) when the motor stops outside of the in-position zone. Position loop gain (Pr. 362 ) When servo torque function is selected using Pr. 358 Servo torque selection , output frequency for generating servo torque increases to the creep speed of Pr. 352 Creep speed gradually according to the slope set in Pr. 362 Orientation position loop gain . Although the operation becomes faster when the value is increased, a machine may hunt, etc.
Pr. 358 Setting Function Remarks
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1) Servo torque function selection
until output of the orientation completion signal (ORA)
: With servo torque function : Without servo torque function
2) Retry function selection : With retry function : Without retry function
3) Output frequency is compensated when the motor stops outside the in-position zone
: With frequency compensation : Without frequency compensation
4) DC injection brake and servo torque selection when the position pulse comes off the in-position zone after output of the orientation completion signal (ORA)
: With DC injection brake : With servo torque
5) End switch selection of the DC injection brake and orientation completion signal (ORA)
: When the start signal (STF, STR) or
orientation command is turned off : When the orientation command is
turned off
6) Completion signal off selection when the position pulse comes off the in-position zone after output of the orientation completion signal (ORA)
: Turnes off the completion signal when the motor stops outside of the in- position zone
: Completion signal remains on even if the position pulse comes off the completion zone (orientation fault singal (ORM) is not output)
REMARKS When the orientation command is off with the start signal on, the speed accelerates to the command speed. When the motor shaft stops outside of the set setting range of stop position, the motor shaft is returned to the stop position by
servo torque function (if enough torque is generated).
118
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11 Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Assign function to input terminal Input terminal function selection Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 118
Set MRS signal (output shutoff) to normally closed contact specification MRS input selection Pr. 17 121
Make the second (third) function valid only during constant speed operation
RT reflection time selection Pr. 155 122
Assign start signal and forward/ reverse command to other signals
Start signal (STF/STR) operation selection Pr. 250 123
Assign function to output terminal Output terminal function assignment Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 125
Detect output frequency Up-to-frequency sensitivity Output frequency detection Low speed detection
Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116, Pr. 865 130
Detect output current Output current detection Zero current detection
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167 132
Remote output function Remote output Pr. 495 to Pr. 497 134 Detect output torque Output torque detection Pr. 864 133
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Initial Signal Setting Range
FR-B FR-B3
178 STF terminal function selection 60 STF (forward rotation
command)
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
179 STR terminal function selection 61 STR (reverse rotation
command)
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 22, 24, 25, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
180 RL terminal function selection 0 RL (low-speed operation
command)
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
181 RM terminal function selection 1 RM (middle-speed operation
command)
182 RH terminal function selection 2 RH (high speed operation
command)
183 RT terminal function selection 3 RT (second function
selection)
184 AU terminal function selection 4 AU (terminal 4 input
selection)
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62 to 67, 9999
185 AM terminal function selection 5 JOG (Jog operation
selection)
0 to 12, 14, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
0 to 9, 12 to 16, 19, 20, 22, 24, 25, 62, 64 to 67, 9999
186 CS terminal function selection 6
CS (selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure)
187 MRS terminal function selection 24 MRS (output stop)
188 STOP terminal function selection 25 STOP (start self-holding
selection)
189 RES terminal function selection 62 RES (inverter reset)
119
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Input terminal function assignment Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to set the functions of the input terminals. Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
*1 When Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "1 or 2", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as listed above. *2 When Pr. 270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection = "1 or 3", the functions of the RL and RM signals change as listed above. *3 The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens". *4 The FR-A7AX (16-bit digital input) is needed to externally input a stop position under orientation control. *5 Available only when used with the FR-A7AP (option).
Setting Signal Name Function
Application :Corres-
pondence :Non-corres-
pondence
Related Parameters Refer to Page
FR-B FR-B3
0 RL
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)
Low-speed operation command
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 81
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *1 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr. 59 85
Pr. 270 = 1, 3 *2 Stop-on-contact selection 0 Pr. 270, Pr. 275 105
1 RM Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)
Middle-speed operation command
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 81
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *1 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr. 59 85
2 RH
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)
High-speed operation command
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 81
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 *1 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr. 59 85
3 RT Second function selection Pr. 44, Pr.45, Pr.48 to Pr.50 122 Pr. 270 = 1, 3 *2 Stop-on-contact selection 1 Pr. 270, Pr. 275 105
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr. 267 166 5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr. 15, Pr. 16 83
6 CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start
Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr.162 to Pr.165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611 148
7 OH External thermal relay input *3 Pr. 9 96
8 REX 15 speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 81
9 X9 Third function selection Pr. 110, Pr. 111, Pr. 114 to Pr.116 122
10 X10 Inverter operation enable signal (MT-HC connection) Pr. 30, Pr. 70 102
11 X11 MT-HC connection, instantaneous power failure detection Pr. 30, Pr. 70 102
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr. 79 182 13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 100
14 X14 PID control valid terminal Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 228
15 BRI Brake opening completion signal Pr. 278 to Pr. 285 108 16 X16 PU-external operation switchover Pr. 79, Pr. 340 188 19 X19 Load torque high-speed frequency Pr. 270 to Pr. 274 236
20 X20 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration C switching terminal Pr. 380 to Pr. 383 91
22 X22 Orientation command *4, *6 Pr. 350 to Pr. 369 111 24 MRS Output stop Pr. 17 121 25 STOP Start self-holding selection 123
60 STF Forward rotation command (assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only) 123
61 STR Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only) 123
62 RES Inverter reset
63 PTC PTC thermistor input (assigned to AU terminal (Pr. 184) only) Pr. 9 96
64 X64 PID forward/reverse action switchover Pr. 127 to Pr. 134 228 65 X65 PU-NET operation switchover Pr. 79, Pr. 340 189 66 X66 External-NET operation switchover Pr. 79, Pr. 340 189 67 X67 Command source switchover Pr. 338, Pr. 339 195
9999 No function
120
Function assignment of external terminal and control
(2) Response time of each signal The response time of the X10 signal is within 2ms. However, when the X10 signal is not assigned at the Pr. 30
Regenerative function selection setting of "2" (MT-HC connection), the response time of the MRS signal is within 2ms. Pr. 17 MRS input selection is made invalid.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the terminal inputs are ORed. The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) and PID (X14). When the X10 signal (MT-HC connection - inverter operation enable signal) is not set or when the PU operation external
interlock (X12) signal is not assigned at the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting of "7", the MRS signal shares this function. Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (speed 7) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)
Pr. 30 Setting
MRS Assignment
X10 Assignment
Response Time Pr. 17MRS X10
2 Within 2ms Invalid
Within 2ms Within 20ms Within 2ms Valid
Other than 2 Within 20ms Valid
Within 20ms Valid
121
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.11.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)
The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
17 MRS input selection 0 0 Normally open input 2 Normally closed input (NC contact input specifications)
(1) Output shutoff signal (MRS signal) Turning on the output shutoff signal (MRS) during inverter running shuts
off the output immediately. Terminal MRS may be used as described below. (a) When mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) is used to stop
motor The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
(b) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter With the MRS signal on, the inverter cannot be operated if the start signal is entered into the inverter.
(c) Coast the motor to a stop When the start signal is turned off, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is turned on, the motor coasts to a stop
(2) MRS signal logic inversion (Pr. 17 = "2") When Pr. 17 is set to "2", the MRS signal (output stop) can be changed
to the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. When the MRS signal turns on (opens), the inverter shuts off the output.
REMARKS The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting. By setting "24" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal
function selection), the MRS signal can be assigned to the other terminal. The MRS signal can shut off the output, independently of the PU, external or network operation mode.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
ON
ON
MRS signal
STF (STR) signal
Motor coasts to stop
Time
(Initial value)
Output stop
Output stop
MRS
Inverter
MRS
Inverter
Setting value "0" Setting value "2"
SD SD
122
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11.3 Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection signal (RT) and third function selection signal (X9) (RT signal, X9 signal, Pr. 155)
When the RT signal turns on, the second function becomes valid. When the X9 signal turns on, the third function becomes valid.
For the X9 signal, set "9" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function. The second (third) function has the following applications.
(a)Switching between normal use and emergency use (b)Switching between heavy load and light load (c)Changing of acceleration/deceleration time by broken line acceleration/deceleration (d)Switching of characteristic between main motor and sub motor
Functions that can be set as second and third functions
You can select the second (third) function using the RT(X9) signal. You can also set the condition (reflection conditon) where the second function and third function become valid.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
155 RT signal function validity condition selection 0
0 Second (third) function is immediately made valid with on of the RT(X9) signal.
10 Second (third) function is valid only during the RT (X9) signal is on and constant speed operation. (invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
Second function connection diagram
Second acceleration/deceleration time example
Function First Function Parameter Number
Second Function Parameter Number
Third Function Parameter Number
Refer to Page
Acceleration time Pr. 7 Pr. 44 Pr. 110 88 Deceleration time Pr. 8 Pr. 44, Pr. 45 Pr. 110, Pr. 111 88 Stall prevention Pr. 22 Pr. 48, Pr. 49 Pr. 114, Pr. 115 74
REMARKS The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the initial setting. By setting "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal.
CAUTION When the RT (X9) signal is on, the other functions such as the second (third) are also selected. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
STF(STR)
Inverter
Start Second function selection
RT
High speed RH
Middle speed RM
SD
(initial value)
RT
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
Setting value "0"
RH
RM
Acceleration time is reflected
Time
123
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.11.4 Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250)
(1) 2-wire type (STF, STR signal) A two-wire type connection is shown below. In the initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) are used as start and stop signals. Turn on
either of the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. If both are turned off (or on) during operation, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminal 2-5, by setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (high, middle, low speeds), etc. (For multi-speed operation, refer to page 81)
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a forward/reverse command.
You can select the operation of the start signal (STF/STR). Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off. Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal. (Refer to page 104 for stop selection)
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description
Start signal (STF/STR) Stop operation (Refer to page 104)
250 Stop selection 9999
0 to 100s
STF signal: Forward rotation start
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor is coasted to a stop when the preset time elapses after the start signal is turned off. When the setting is any of 1000s to 1100s, the inverter coasts to a stop in (Pr. 250 - 1000)s.
1000s to 1100s
STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal
9999
STF signal: Forward rotation start
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
When the start signal is turned off, the motor decelerates to stop.
8888 STF signal: Start signal STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal
2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999") 2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")
REMARKS When Pr. 250 is set to any of "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor coasts to a stop if the start command is turned off. (Refer to page
104) The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial setting. The STF signal can be assigned to
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection and the STR signal to Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection only.
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF ON
Time
STF
STR Inverter
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
ONSTR
10
2
5
F o
rw a
rd
ro ta
ti o
n R
e v e
rs e
ro
ta ti o
n
SD
Start signal
Forward/ reverse signal
STF
Time
STF
STR Inverter
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
STR
10
2
5
F o
rw a
rd
ro ta
ti o
n R
e v e
rs e
ro
ta ti o
n
ON
ON
SD
124
Function assignment of external terminal and control
(2) 3-wire type (STF, STR, STOP signal) A three-wire type connection is shown below. The start self-holding selection becomes valid when the STOP signal is turned on. In this case, the forward/reverse
rotation signal functions only as a start signal. If the start signal (STF or STR) is turned on and then off, the start signal is held and makes a start. When changing
the direction of rotation, turn STR (STF) on once and then off. To stop the inverter, turning off the STOP signal once decelerates it to a stop.
(3) Start signal selection
Three-Wire Type Connection Example (Pr. 250 = "9999") Three-Wire Type Connection Example (Pr. 250 = "8888")
REMARKS The STOP signal is assigned to the terminal STOP in the initial setting. By setting "25" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, the STOP signal can
also be assigned to the other terminal. When the JOG signal is turned on to enable jog operation, the STOP signal becomes invalid. If the MRS signal is turned on to stop the output, the self-holding function is not canceled.
STF STR Pr. 250 Setting Inverter Status
0 to 100s, 9999 1000s to 1100s, 8888 OFF OFF Stop
Stop OFF ON Reverse rotation ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation ON ON Stop Reverse rotation
Parameters referred to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 (Multi-speed setting) Refer to page 81 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Stop Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
STOP
Inverter
Time
STF
STR
ON
STOP
OFF
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
ON
F o
rw a
rd
ro ta
ti o
n R
e v e
rs e
ro
ta ti o
n
OFF
ON
SD
Time
Stop
Forward rotation /reverse rotation
Start
STF
STR
ON
STOP ON
STF
STR
STOP
Inverter
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
ON
ON
OFF OFF
F o
rw a
rd
ro ta
ti o
n R
e v e
rs e
ro
ta ti o
n
SD
125
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.11.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)
(1) Output signal list You can set the functions of the output terminals. Refer to the following table and set the parameters: (0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative logic)
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Initial Signal
Setting Range FR-B FR-B3
190 RUN terminal function selection
Open collector output
terminal
0 RUN (inverter running) 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
0 to 6, 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90 to 99, 100 to 106, 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190 to 199, 9999
191 SU terminal function selection 1 SU (up to frequency)
192 IPF terminal function selection 2
IPF (instantaneous power failure, undervoltage)
193 OL terminal function selection 3 OL (overload alarm)
194 FU terminal function selection 4 FU (output frequency
detection)
195 ABC1 terminal function selection
Relay output
terminal
99 ALM (alarm output) 0 to 8, 10 to 16, 25 to 28, 34, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 108, 110 to 116, 125 to 128, 134, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
0 to 6, 8, 10 to 16, 20, 25 to 28, 34, 35, 45 to 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 94 to 99, 100 to 106, 108, 110 to 116, 120, 125 to 128, 134, 135, 145 to 147, 164, 170, 190, 191, 194 to 199, 9999
196 ABC2 terminal function selection 9999 No function
Setting Signal Name Function Operation
Application :Corres-
pondence :Non-corres-
pondence
Related Parameters
Refer to
Page Positive Logic
Negative Logic FR-B FR-B3
0 100 RUN Inverter running Output during operation when the inverter output frequency rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
128
1 101 SU Up to frequency *1 Output when the output frequency is reached to the set frequency. *3 Pr. 41 130
2 102 IPF Instantaneous power failure/ undervoltage
Output at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or when undervoltage protection is activated.
Pr. 57 148
3 103 OL Overload alarm Output while stall prevention function is activated.
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154
74
4 104 FU Output frequency detection
Output when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr. 42 (Pr. 43 for reverse rotation). *3
Pr. 42, Pr. 43 130
5 105 FU2 Second output frequency detection
Output when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr. 50. *3 Pr. 50 130
6 106 FU3 Third output frequency detection
Output when the output frequency reaches the frequency set in Pr. 116. *3 Pr. 116 130
7 107 RBP Regenerative brake prealarm
Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. (75K or more)
Pr. 70 102
8 108 THP Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Output when the electronic thermal relay function cumulative value reaches 85%. (Electronic thermal relay function protection (E.THT/E.THM) activates, when the value reached 100%.)
Pr. 9 97
10 110 PU PU operation mode Output when the PU operation mode is selected. Pr. 79 182
126
Function assignment of external terminal and control
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready
Output when the inverter power is turned on, then output after reset process is completed (when the inverter can be started by switching the start signal on or while it is running).
128
12 112 Y12 Output current detection
Output when the output current is higher than the Pr. 150 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 151.
Pr. 150, Pr. 151 132
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection
Output when the output power is lower than the Pr. 152 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 153.
Pr. 152, Pr. 153 132
14 114 FDN PID lower limit Output when the feedback value falls below the lower limit of PID control.
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 22815 115 FUP PID upper limit Output when the feedback value rises
above the upper limit of PID control
16 116 RL PID forward/ reverse rotation output
Output when forward rotation is performed in PID control.
20 120 BOF Brake opening request
Output to open the brake when the brake sequence function is selected. Pr. 278 to Pr. 285,
Pr. 292 108
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Output at the time of a fan fault. Pr. 244 246
26 126 FIN Heatsink overheat pre-alarm
Output when the heatsink temperature reaches about 85% of the heatsink overheat protection providing temperature.
271
27 127 ORA Orientation in- position When orientation is valid *4 Pr. 350 to Pr. 366,
Pr. 369 111 28 128 ORM Orientation error
34 134 LS Low speed output Output when the output frequency reduces below the Pr. 865 setting. Pr. 865 130
35 135 TU Torque detection Output when the motor torque rises above the Pr. 864 value. Pr. 864 133
45 145 RUN3 Inverter running and start command is on
Output when the inverter running and start commands are on. 128
46 146 Y46
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure (retained until release)
Output when the power failure-time deceleration function is executed. Pr. 261 to Pr. 266 152
47 147 PID During PID control activated Output during PID control. Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 228
64 164 Y64 During retry Output during retry processing. Pr. 65 to Pr. 69 155
70 170 SLEE P
PID output interruption
Output when the PID output interruption function is executed.
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 228
90 190 Y90 Life alarm
Output when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor and inrush current limit circuit or the cooling fan approaches the end of its service life.
Pr. 255 to Pr. 259 247
91 191 Y91 Alarm output 3 (power-off signal)
Output when an error occurs due to the circuit failure or connection alarm of the inverter.
129
92 192 Y92 Energy saving average value updated timing
Turned on and off alternately every time the power saving average value is updated when the power saving monitor is used. Cannot be set to Pr. 195 and Pr. 196 (relay output terminal).
Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
160
Setting Signal Name Function Operation
Application :Corres-
pondence :Non-corres-
pondence
Related Parameters
Refer to
Page Positive Logic
Negative Logic FR-B FR-B3
127
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
93 193 Y93 Current average value monitor signal
Average current value and maintenance timer value are output as pulses. Cannot be set to Pr. 195 and Pr. 196 (relay output terminal).
Pr. 555 to Pr. 557 250
94 194 ALM2 Alarm output 2
Output when the inverter protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault). Continue outputting the signal during inverter reset and stop outputting after reset is cancelled. *2
129
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer signal
Output when Pr. 503 rises to or above the Pr. 504 setting. Pr. 503, Pr. 504 249
96 196 REM Remote output Output to the terminal when a value is set to the parameter. Pr. 495 to Pr. 497 134
97 197 ER Minor fault output 2 Output when the inverter protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault)
Pr. 875 159
98 198 LF Minor fault output Output when a minor fault (fan failure or communication error warning) occurs. Pr. 121, Pr. 244 201,
246
99 199 ALM Alarm output
Output when the inverter protective function is activated to stop the output (major fault). The signal output is stopped when a reset turns on.
129
9999 No function
*1 Note that when the frequency setting is varied using an analog signal or of the operation panel (FR-DU07), the output of the SU (up to
frequency) signal may alternate on and off depending on that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed due to acceleration/deceleration time setting. (The output will not alternate on and off when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s".)
*2 When a power supply reset is performed, the alarm output 2 signal (ALM2) turns off as soon as the power supply switches off. *3 Up to frequency SU, frequency detection FU, FU2, FU3 under encoder feed back control signals are as below.
SU, FU: Output when the actual speed (frequency) by the encoder feedback signal exceeds detected specification frequency. FU2, FU3: Output when the inverter output frequency exceeds detected specification frequency.
*4 This parameter is valid when the FR-A7AP (option) is mounted.
REMARKS The same function may be set to more than one terminal. When the function is executed, the terminal conducts at the setting of any of "0" to "99", and does not conduct at the setting of
any of "100" to "199". The signal will not function if a value other than the above is set to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. When Pr. 76 Alarm code output selection = "1", the output signals of the terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU are switched as set in Pr.
76. (When an inverter alarm occurs, the signal output is switched to the alarm output.) The output assignment of the terminal RUN and alarm output relay are as set above regardless of Pr. 76.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. Do not assign signals which repeat frequent ON/OFF to A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact
decreases.
Setting Signal Name Function Operation
Application :Corres-
pondence :Non-corres-
pondence
Related Parameters
Refer to
Page Positive Logic
Negative Logic FR-B FR-B3
128
Function assignment of external terminal and control
(2) Inverter operation ready signal (RY signal) and inverter running signal (RUN, RUN3 signal)
*1 This signal turns off during power failure or undervoltage.
When the inverter is ready to operate, the output of the operation ready signal (RY) is on. (It is also on during inverter running.)
When the output frequency of the inverter rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency, the output of the inverter running signals (RUN) is turned on. During an inverter stop or DC injection brake operation, the output is off.
For the RUN3 signal, output is on while the inverter running and the start signal is on. (For the RUN3 signal, output is on if the starting command is on even when the inverter protective function is activated or the MRS signal is on.)
The output is on during DC injection brake operation and off during an inverter stop.
Inverter Status
Output Signal
Start Signal is
OFF (during stop)
Start Signal is
ON (during stop)
Start Signal is
ON (during
running)
Under DC Injection
Brake
At Alarm Occurrence or MRS Signal is on
(output shutoff)
Automatic Restart after Instantaneous Power Failure
Coasting RestartingStart signal
is ON Start signal
is OFF Start signal
is ON Start signal
is OFF RY ON ON ON ON OFF ON *1 ON
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
When using the RY, RY2, RUN, RUN2 and RUN3 signals, assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal selection function) referring to the table on the left.
REMARKS The RUN signal is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial setting.
Power supply
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
STF
RH
RY
RUN3
Pr. 13
Starting
frequency
DC injection brake operation point
DC injection brake operation
Reset processing Time
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RUN
Output Signal
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Setting Positive logic Negative logic
RY 11 111 RUN 0 100 RUN3 45 145
129
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Alarm output signal (ALM, ALM2 signal)
(4) Input MC shutoff signal (Y91 signal) The Y91 signal is output at occurrence of an alarm attributable to the failure of the inverter circuit or an alarm
caused by a wiring mistake. When using the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic)" or "191 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. The following table indicates the alarms that will output the Y91 signal. (Refer to page 266 for the alarm description.)
If the inverter comes to an alarm stop, the ALM and ALM2 signals are output.
The ALM2 signal remains on during a reset period after alarm occurrence.
When using the ALM2 signal, set "94 (positive logic)" or "194 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
The ALM signal is assigned to the A1B1C1 contact in the initial setting.
No. Alarm Description 1 Inrush current limit circuit alarm (E.IOH) 2 CPU error (E.CPU) 3 CPU error (E.6) 4 CPU error (E.7) 5 Parameter storage device alarm (E.PE) 6 Parameter storage device alarm (E.PE2) 7 24VDC power output short circuit (E.P24)
8 Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit(E.CTE)
9 Output side earth(ground) fault overcurrent protection(E.GF) 10 Output phase failure (E.LF) 11 Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Parameters referred to Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90 . Pr. 76 Alarm code output selection Refer to page 157
ON OFF
ON
ON OFF
Reset ON
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
ALM
ALM2
RES
OFF
Inverter alarm occurrence (output shutoff)
Reset processing (about 1s)
Time
REMARKS Refer to page 266 for the inverter alarm description.
130
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 , FU3, LS signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116, Pr. 865)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
The inverter output frequency is detected and output to the output signal.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns on.
42 Output frequency detection 6Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU (FB) signal turns on.
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency where the FU (FB) signal turns on in reverse rotation.
9999 Same as Pr. 42 setting
50 Second output frequency detection 30Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to
120Hz Set the frequency where the FU2 (FB2) signal turns on.
116 Third output frequency detection 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz* 0 to
120Hz Set the frequency where the FU3 (FB3) signal turns on.
865 Low speed detection 1.5Hz 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz*
0 to 120Hz Set the frequency where the LS signal turns on.
(1) Up-to-frequency sensitivity (SU signal, Pr. 41) When the output frequency reaches the running frequency, the up-to-
frequency signal (SU) is output. The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range 1% to 100% on the
assumption that the set frequency is 100%. This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been
reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.
(2) Output frequency detection (FU signal, FU2 signal, FU3 signal, Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116) When the output frequency rises to or above the Pr. 42 setting, the output frequency detection signal (FU) is output. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc. The FU (FU2, FU3) signal is output when the output frequency reaches the set frequency. When the detection frequency is set in Pr. 43, frequency detection used exclusively for reverse rotation can also be
set. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during elevator operation, etc.
When Pr. 43 "9999", the Pr. 42 setting applies to forward rotation and the Pr. 43 setting applies to reverse rotation. When outputting a frequency detection signal besides the FU signal, set the detection frequency in Pr. 50 or Pr. 116.
The FU2 signal (FU3 signal if Pr. 116 or more) is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr. 50 setting.
For each signal, assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) referring to the table below.
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
ON
Running frequency Adjustment range Pr.41
SU
Time
OFFOFF
Forward rotation
Pr.116
Pr.50
Pr.42
Pr.43
Pr.50
Pr.116
OFFONOFFONOFF
Time
(Hz)
FU
FU2
FU3
Output signal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
c y
Reverse rotation
Parameter Number
Output Signal
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Setting
Positive logic
Negative logic
42, 43 FU 4 104
50 FU2 5 105
116 FU3 6 106
131
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Low speed detection (LS signal, Pr. 865) The low speed detection signal (LS) is output when the
output frequency reduces below the Pr. 865 Low speed detection setting.
For the LS signal, set "34 (positive logic) or 134 (nega- tive logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) and assign functions to the output terminal.
REMARKS The FU signal is assigned to the terminal FU and the SU signal is assigned to the terminal SU in the initial setting. All signals are OFF during DC injection brake.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
ONLS ONOFF
Pr.865
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Time
132
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11.7 Output current detection function (Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
The output power during inverter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
150 Output current detection level 150% 0 to 220% Set the output current detection level. 100%
is the rated inverter current.
151 Output current detection signal delay time 0s 0 to 10s
Set the output current detection period. Set the time from when the output current has risen above the setting until the output current detection signal (Y12) is output.
152 Zero current detection level 5% 0 to 220% Set the zero current detection level. The rated inverter current is assumed to be 100%.
153 Zero current detection time 0.5s 0 to 1s
Set this parameter to define the period from when the output current drops below the Pr. 152 value until the zero current detection signal (Y13) is output.
166 Output current detection signal retention time 0.1s
0 to 10s Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is on.
9999 The Y12 signal on status is retained. The signal is turned off at the next start.
167 Output current detection operation selection 0
0 Operation continues when the Y12 signal is on
1 The inverter is brought to an alarm stop when the Y12 signal is on. (E.CDO)
(1) Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
The output current detection function can be used for excessive torque detection, etc.
If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the Y12 signal turns on, the ON state is held for the time set in Pr. 166 .
When Pr. 166 = "9999", the ON state is held until a next start. At the Pr. 167 setting of "1", the inverter output is stopped and the
output current detection alarm (E.CDO) is displayed when the Y12 signal turns on. When an alarm stop occurs, the Y12 signal is on for the time set in Pr. 166 at the Pr. 166 setting of other than 9999, and remains on until a reset is made at the Pr. 166 setting of 9999. E.CDO does not occur even if "1" is set in Pr. 167 while Y12 is ON. The Pr. 167 setting is made valid after Y12 turns OFF.
Set "12 (positive logic)" or "112 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function of the Y12 signal to the output terminal.
Time
Pr.150
OFF ON OFF Output current
detection signal (Y12)
Pr.166 Minimum 100ms (initial value)
Output current
Pr.166 9999, Pr.167 = 0
Pr.151
133
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.11.8 Detection of output torque (TU signal, Pr. 864) Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153) If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a drop due to gravity when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
Set "13 (positive logic)" or "113 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function of the Y13 signal to the output terminal.
CAUTION This function is also valid during execution of the offline auto tuning. The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 350ms. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
CAUTION The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting not too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current. To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake.
Parameters referred to Offline auto tuning Refer to page 70 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
Output the signal when the motor torque rises above the setting value. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
864 Torque detection 150% 0 to 400% Set the torque value where the TU signal turns on.
When the output torque reaches or exceeds the detected torque value set in Pr. 864 the torque detection signal (TU) turns on. It turns off when the torque falls below the detection torque value.
For the TU signal, set "35 (positive logic) or 135 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) and assign functions to the output terminal.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions maybe
affected. Please make setteing after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
OFF ON Start signal
Time
Output current
OFF ONZero current detection time (Y13) Pr. 153
Detection time Pr. 153 Detection time
Pr.152
OFF ON
0[A] 100ms*
Pr.152
* Once turned on, the zero current detection time signal (Y13) is held on for at least 100ms.
B3
O u
tp u
t to
rq u
e (
% )
Time ONTU OFF
Pr.864
134
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.11.9 Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable logic controller.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
495 Remote output selection 0
0 Remote output data clear at powering off Remote output data
clear at inverter reset1 Remote output data held at
powering off
10 Remote output data clear at powering off Remote output data
held at inverter reset 11 Remote output data held at
powering off 496 * Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095
Refer to the following diagram. 497 * Remote output data 2 0 0 to 4095
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Pr. 497
*1 As desired *2 Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A7AY)
is fitted *3 RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR) is
fitted
The output terminal can be turned on/off depending on the Pr. 496 or Pr. 497 setting. The remote output selection can be controlled on/off by computer link communication from the PU connector or RS-485 port or by communication from the communication option.
Set "96" (positive logic) or "196" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), and assign the remote output (REM) signal to the terminal used for remote output,
When you refer to the diagram on the left and set 1 to the terminal bit (terminal where the REM signal has been assigned) of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497, the output terminal turns on (off for negative logic). By setting 0, the output terminal turns off (on for negative logic).
Example)When "96" (positive logic) is set in Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection and "1" (H01) is set in Pr. 496, the terminal RUN turns on.
ON/OFF example for positive logic When Pr. 495 = "0 (initial value), 10", performing a power supply reset (including a power failure) clears the REM signal output. (The ON/OFF status of the terminals are as set in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196.) The Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 settings are also "0". When Pr. 495 = "1, 11", the remote output data before power supply-off is stored into the EEPROM, so the signal output at power recovery is the same as before power supply-off. However, it is not stored when the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset request through communication). (See the chart on the left)
When Pr. 495 = "10, 11", the signal before reset is held even an inverter reset is made.
REMARKS The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 does not turn on/off if 0/1 is set to the
terminal bit of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497 . (It turns on/off with the assigned function.) When the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset request through communication), Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 values turn to "0". When Pr.
495 = "1, 11", however, they are the settings at power supply-off. (The settings are stored at power supply-off.) When Pr. 495 = "10, 11", they are the same as before an inverter reset is made.
CAUTION When Pr. 495 = "1" (remote output data retention even at powering off), take such a step as to connect R1/L11, S1/L21 and P/+,
N/- to ensure that control power will be retained to some degree. If you do not take such a step, the output signals provided after power-on are not guaranteed.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
b11 b0
A B
C 1
A B
C 2
*1*1*1*1*1
F U
O L
IP F
S U
R U
N
b11 b0
Y 5
*2
Y 6
*2
R A
1 *3
R A
2 *3
R A
3 *3
*1*1
Y 4
*2
Y 3
*2
Y 2
*2
Y 1
*2
Y 0
*2
Power supply
Power supply
OFF OFF
ONOFF REMREM
REM signal clear REM signal held
Inverter reset time (about 1s)
Pr. 495 = 0, 10 Pr. 495 = 1, 11
135
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.12 Monitor display and monitor output signal
Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505, Pr. 811)
* The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and it can be calculated from the following formula.
Note that Pr.37 (set maximum value) is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for operation with frequency set in Pr. 505. For example, when Pr. 505 = "60Hz" and Pr. 37 = "1000", "1000" is displayed on the running speed monitor when the running frequency is 60Hz. When running frequency is 30Hz, "500" is displayed.
When displaying the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) or number of motor poles + 100 (102, 104, 106, 108, 110) in Pr. 144. When the number of motor poles are set by Pr.81 Number of motor poles, the Pr.144 setting is automatically changed.If the Pr.144 setting is changed, the Pr.81 setting is not automatically changed. Example 1) When Pr.81 is set to "2" or "12" from the initial value, Pr.144 changes from "4" to "2". Example 2) If Pr.81 is set to "2" when Pr.144 is "104", Pr.144 changes from "104" to "102".
When "1" is set in Pr. 811, the setting increments of speed setting from the PU, speed setting from RS-485 communication or communication options (other than FR-A7ND, FR-A7NL) and running speed monitor is 0.1r/min.
When both Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 have been set, their priorities are as given below. Pr. 144, 102 to 110 > Pr. 37, 1 to 9998 > Pr. 144, 2 to 10
When the running speed monitor is selected, each monitor and setting are determined by the combination of Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 as listed below. (The units within the thick frame are the initial values.)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Display motor speed Set speed
Speed display and speed setting Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505, Pr. 811 135
Change PU monitor display data DU/PU main display data selection Cumulative monitor clear
Pr. 52, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 891 137
Change of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM
Terminal FM, AM function selection Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 291, Pr. 866, Pr. 867 137
Set the reference of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM
Setting of reference of terminal FM and AM Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 291, Pr. 866, Pr. 867 142
Adjust terminal FM, AM outputs Terminal FM, AM calibration Pr. 900, Pr. 901 145
You can change the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) monitor display or frequency setting to motor speed or machine speed.
Paramete r Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
37 Speed display 0 0 Frequency display, setting
1 to 9998 * Set the machine speed at Pr. 505.
144 Speed setting switchover 4 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110
Set the number of motor poles when displaying the motor speed.
505 Speed setting reference 60Hz 1 to 120Hz Set the reference speed for Pr. 37.
811 Set resolution switchover 0
Speed setting and running speed monitor increments from the PU, RS-485 communication or communication option.
0 1r/min 1 0.1r/min
Pr.37 (set maximum value) < 65535 x Pr. 505 (Hz) Pr.1(Hz)
Pr. 37 Setting
Pr. 144 Setting
Output Frequency Monitor
Set Frequency Monitor
Running Speed Monitor
Frequency Setting Parameter Setting
0 (initial value)
0 Hz Hz r/min *1 Hz 2 to 10 Hz Hz r/min *1 Hz
102 to 110 r/min *1 r/min *1 r/min *1 r/min *1
1 to 9998 0 Hz Hz Machine speed *1 Hz
2 to 10 Machine speed *1 Machine speed *1 Machine speed *1 Machine speed *1 102 to 110 Hz Hz r/min *1 Hz
*1 Motor speed r/min conversion formula............ frequency 120/number of motor poles (Pr. 144) Machine speed conversion formula................... Pr. 37 frequency/Pr. 505 For Pr. 144 in the above formula, the value is "Pr. 144 - 100" when "102 to 110" is set in Pr. 144 and the value is "4" when Pr. 37 = 0 and Pr. 144 = 0.
*2 The increments for Hz are 0.01Hz, machine speed are 1m/min, and r/min are 1r/min. *3 Pr. 505 is always set as frequency (Hz).
136
Monitor display and monitor output signal
CAUTION In the FR-B series, the output frequency of the inverter is displayed in terms of synchronous speed, and therefore, it is unequal
to the actual speed by motor slip. Since the FREQROL-B3 series are operated by the advanced magnetic flux vector control, this display changes to the actual speed (estimated value calculated based on the motor slip) and actual speed from the encoder when encoder feed back control is performed. When performing the encoder feed back control, however, another explosion-proof test is necessary.
When the running speed display is selected at the setting of Pr. 37 = "0" and Pr. 144 = "0", the monitor display is provided on the assumption that the number of motor poles is 4. (1800r/min is displayed at 60Hz)
Refer to Pr. 52 when you want to change the PU main monitor (PU main display). Since the panel display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is
displayed "----". After setting the running speed in 0.1r/min increments (Pr. 811 = "0"), changing the setting increments to 1r/min increments (Pr.
811 = "1") changes the speed resolution from 0.1r/min to 0.3r/min (four poles), which may round down 0.1r/min increments. When the machine speed is displayed on the FR-PU04/FR-PU07, do not change the speed by using an up/down key in the
state where the set speed exceeding 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become arbitrary value.
CAUTION Make sure that the settings of the running speed and number of motor poles are correct. Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.
Parameters referred to Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection Refer to page 137 Pr. 80 Motor capacity, Pr. 81 Number of motor poles Refer to page 68
137
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.12.1 DU/PU, FM, AM terminal monitor display selection (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)
(1) Monitor description list (Pr. 52) Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) in Pr.
52 DU/PU main display data selection. Set the monitor to be output to the terminal FM (pulse train output) in Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection. Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (analog voltage output (0 to 10VDC voltage output)) in Pr. 158 AM
terminal function selection. Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The signals marked cannot be selected for
monitoring)
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel (FR-DU07)/parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR- PU07) can be selected. In addition, signals to be output from the terminal FM (pulse train output) and AM (analog voltage output) can be selected.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
52* DU/PU main display data selection
0 (output
frequency)
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 50 to 57, 100
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 34, 50 to 57, 100
Select the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit. Refer to the following table for monitor description.
54* FM terminal function selection 1
(output frequency)
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 34, 50, 52, 53
Select the monitor output to terminal FM.
158* AM terminal function selection Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
170 Watt-hour meter clear 9999
0 Set 0 to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
10 Set the maximum value when monitoring from communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
9999 Set the maximum value when monitoring from communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
171 Operation hour meter clear 9999 0, 9999
Set 0 in the parameter to clear the watt-hour monitor. Setting 9999 has no effect.
268* Monitor decimal digits selection 9999
0 Displayed as integral value 1 Displayed in 0.1 increments
9999 No function
563 Energization time carrying-over times 0 0 to 65535
(reading only)
The numbers of cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed. Reading only
564 Operating time carrying-over times 0 0 to 65535
(reading only)
The numbers of operation time monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed. Reading only
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
9999
0 to 4
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative power monitor digit. Clamp the monitoring value at maximum.
9999 No shift Clear the monitor value when it exceeds the maximum value.
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Types of Monitor Increments Pr. 52 Setting Pr. 54 (FM)
Pr. 158 (AM) Setting
Full-scale Value of the Terminal FM
and AM DescriptionDU LED PU main
monitor
Output frequency 0.01Hz 0/100 1 Pr. 55 Displays the inverter output frequency.
Output current 0.01A/0.1A *7
0/100 2 Pr. 56 Displays the inverter output current effective value.
Output voltage 0.1V 0/100 3
200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V
Displays the inverter output voltage.
138
Monitor display and monitor output signal
Alarm display 0/100 Displays 8 past alarms individually. Frequency setting 0.01Hz 5 *1 5 Pr. 55 Displays the set frequency.
Running speed 1(r/min) 6 *1 6
The value converted with the Pr. 37 value from Pr. 55
Displays the motor speed (depending on Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings, for details, refer to page 135)
Motor torque *3 0.1% 7 *1 7 Pr. 866 Displays the motor torque in percentage on the assumption that the rated motor torque is 100%
Converter output voltage 0.1V 8 *1 8
200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V
Displays the DC bus voltage value.
Regenerative brake duty 0.1% 9 *1 9 Pr. 70 Brake duty set in Pr. 30 and Pr. 70
Electronic thermal relay function load factor
0.1% 10 *1 10 100% Displays the motor thermal cumulative value on the assumption that the thermal operation level is 100%.
Output current peak value
0.01A/0.1A *7
11 *1 11 Pr. 56 Retains the peak value of the output current monitor and displays (clears at every start)
Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V 12 *1 12
200V class: 400V 400V class: 800V
Retains the peak value of the DC bus voltage value and displays (clears at every start)
Input power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *7 13 *1 13
Rated inverter power 2
Displays power on the inverter input side
Output power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *7 14 *1 14
Rated inverter power 2
Displays power on the inverter output side
Load meter 0.1% 17 17 100% Torque current is displayed in % on the assumption that the Pr. 866 setting is 100%
Motor excitation current
0.01A/0.1A *7
18 18 Pr. 56 Displays the excitation current of the motor
Position pulse *2 19 Displays the number of pulses per rotation of the motor when orientation control is valid
Cumulative energization time *4, *8
1h 20 Cumulative energization time since the inverter shipment is displayed. You can check the numbers of the monitor value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563.
Reference voltage output 21
Terminal FM: 1440 pulse/s is output when Pr. 291 = 0, 1. 50k pulse/s is output when Pr. 291 0, 1. Terminal AM: 10V is output
Orientation status *2 1 22 Displays only when orientation control is valid (Refer to page 111)
Actual operation time*4, *5, *8
1h 23
Cumulative inverter running time is displayed. You can check the numbers of the monitor value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564. Use Pr. 171 to clear the value. (Refer to page 141)
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 24 200%
On the assumption that the rated inverter current value is 100%, the output current value is displayed in %. Monitor value = output current monitor value/ rated inverter current 100 [%]
Cumulative power *8 0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *6 *7 25 Cumulative power amount is displayed according to the output power monitor. Use Pr. 170 to clear the value. (Refer to page 141)
Motor output *3 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *7 34 34 Rated motor
capacity Multiplys the motor speed by the then output torque and displays the machine output of the motor shaft end
Power saving effect Variable
according to
parameters
50 50 Inverter capacity
Displays energy saving effect monitor You can change the monitor to power saving, power saving average value, charge display and % display using parameters. (For details, refer to page 161)
Cumulative saving power *8
51
Types of Monitor Increments Pr. 52 Setting Pr. 54 (FM)
Pr. 158 (AM) Setting
Full-scale Value of the Terminal FM
and AM DescriptionDU LED PU main
monitor
139
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
*1 Frequency setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07). *2 Position pulse and orientation status function when used with an option (FR-A7AP). When orientation control is invalid, "0" remains displayed and these
functions are invalid. When performing the orient control, another explosion-proof test is necessary. *3 Valid only for FR-B3 series. *4 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) on the assumption that 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
*5 The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation time before power supply-off is less than 1h. *6 When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed. *7 The setting depends on the inverter capacity. (55K or less / 75K or more) *8 Since the panel display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed "----".
PID set point 0.1% 52 52 100% Displays the set point, measured value and deviation during PID control (For details, refer to page 233)
PID measured value 0.1% 53 53 100%
PID deviation 0.1% 54 Input terminal status
55 *1 Displays the input terminal ON/OFF status
on the PU (refer to page 140 for DU display) Output terminal status *1 Displays the output terminal ON/OFF status
on the PU (refer to page 140 for DU display)
Option input terminal status 56
Displays the input terminal ON/OFF status of the digital input option (FR-A7AX) on the DU (refer to page 140 for details)
Option output terminal status 57
Displays the output terminal ON/OFF states of the digital output option (FR-A7AY) or relay output option (FR-A7AR) on the DU (refer to page 140 for details)
REMARKS
By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output frequency to alarm display can be selected in sequence by .
When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the displayed units are Hz, V and A only and the others are not displayed. The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the third monitor position. (The output voltage monitor is changed.)
* The monitor displayed at powering on is the first monitor. Display the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold down
for 1s. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
Example)When Pr. 52 is set to "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as described below.
Types of Monitor Increments Pr. 52 Setting Pr. 54 (FM)
Pr. 158 (AM) Setting
Full-scale Value of the Terminal FM
and AM DescriptionDU LED PU main
monitor
Initial value
Power-on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Alarm monitor
With alarm
Output current monitor Output voltage monitorOutput frequency monitor
Power-on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Alarm monitor
With alarm
Output current monitorOutput frequency monitor Cumulative energization time monitor
140
Monitor display and monitor output signal
(3) Operation panel (FR-DU07) I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52) When Pr. 52 is set to any of "55 to 57", the I/O terminal states can be monitored on the operation panel (FR-DU07). The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor. The LED is on when the terminal is on, and the LED is off when the terminal is off. The center line of LED is always on.
On the unit I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal status and the lower the output terminal status.
On the input option terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "56"), the decimal point LED of the first digit LED is on.
On the input option terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "57"), the decimal point LED of the second digit LED is on.
(2) Display set frequency during stop (Pr. 52)
When Pr. 52 is set to "100", the set frequency monitor is displayed during a stop and the output frequency monitor is displayed during operation. (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during running.)
Type of Monitor Pr. 52
0 100 During running/stop During stop During running
Output frequency Output frequency Set frequency Output frequency
Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Alarm display Alarm display
REMARKS During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears. During MRS, the values displayed are the same as during a stop. In FR-B3 series, the tuning status monitor has priority.
Pr. 52 Setting Monitor Description 55 Display the I/O and output terminal ON/OFF status of the inverter unit.
56 * Display the input terminal ON/OFF status of the digital input option (FR-A7AX).
57 * Display the output terminal ON/OFF status of the digital output option (FR-A7AY) or relay output option (FR-A7AR). * You can set "56" or "57" even if the option is not fitted. When the option is not fitted, the monitor displays are all off.
RM
RL
RH
RT MRS STR
AU RES JOG
SU IPF
OLRUN FU
Free Free
Free Free Free
ABC1 ABC2
STOP STF CS
Center line is always on
Input terminal
- Display example - When signals STF, RH and RUN are on
Output terminal
MON P.RUN
EXT NETPU
FWDREV
Hz
A
V
X1
X0
X2
X3 X6 X9
X4 X7
X13 X14
X15X12 Free
Free DY
Free
Free
FreeX10 X11
X5 X8
Center line is always on
Decimal point LED of first digit LED is always on
Y1
Y0
Y2
Y3 Y6
Y4
RA3 RA1
RA2
Y5
Center line is always on
Decimal point LED of second digit LED is always on
FR-A7AY
FR-A7AR
141
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Cumulative power monitor and clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 891) On the cumulative power monitor (Pr. 52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 1h
increments. The operation panel (FR-DU07), parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication,
communication option) display increments and display ranges are as indicated below.
The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891 settings. For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 891 = "2", the PU/DU display is 12.78 (display in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
(5) Cumulative energization time and actual operation time monitor (Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr. 564) On the cumulative energization time monitor (Pr. 52 = "20"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. On the actual operation time monitor (Pr. 52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not
added up during a stop.) If the numbers of monitor value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check the numbers of cumulative
energization time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Writing "0" in Pr. 171 clears the actual operation time monitor. (Energization time monitor can not be cleared.)
(6) You can select the decimal digits of the monitor (Pr. 268) As the operation panel (FR-DU07) display is 4 digits long, the decimal places may vary at analog input, etc. The
decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits. In such a case, the decimal digits can be selected by Pr. 268.
Operation Panel *1 Parameter Unit *2 Communication
Range Increments Range Increments Range
Increments Pr. 170 = 10 Pr. 170 = 9999
0 to 99.99kWh 0.01kWh 0 to 999.99kWh 0.01kWh 0 to 9999kWh 0 to 65535kWh
(initial value) 1kWh100.0 to 999.9kWh 0.1kWh 1000.0 to 9999.9kWh 0.1kWh 1000 to 9999kWh 1kWh 10000 to 99999kWh 1kWh
*1 Power is measured in the range 0 to 9999.99kWh, and displayed in 4 digits. When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
*2 Power is measured in the range 0 to 99999.99.99kWh, and displayed in 5 digits. When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
REMARKS If "0" is written in Pr. 170 and Pr. 170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.
REMARKS The actual operation time is not added up unless the inverter is operated one or more hours continuously. If "0" is written in Pr. 171 and Pr. 171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual operation
time meter.
Pr. 268 Setting Description 9999 (initial value) No function
0 When 1 or 2 decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) are monitored, the decimal places are dropped and the monitor displays an integer value (1 increments). The monitor value of 0.99 or less is displayed as 0.
1 When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). When the monitor display digit is originally in 1 increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1 increments.
REMARKS The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr. 52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr. 52 = "23"), cumulative
power (Pr. 52 = "25") or cumulative saving power monitor (Pr. 52 = "51") does not change.
Parameters referred to Pr. 37 Speed display, Pr. 144 Speed setting switchover Refer to page 135 Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference, Pr. 866 Torque monitoring reference Refer to page 142 Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection Refer to page 142
142
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.12.2 Reference of the terminal FM (pulse train output) and AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 291, Pr. 866, Pr. 867)
(1) Pulse train output of the terminal FM (Pr. 291) Two types of pulse train can be output to the terminal FM.
Two types of monitor output, pulse train output from the terminal FM and analog voltage output from the terminal AM, are available. In addition, pulse train output by voltage output and by open collector output can be selected for terminal FM. Set the reference of the signal output from terminal FM and AM.
Parameter Number Name
Initial Value Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3 FR-B FR-B3
55 Frequency monitoring reference
60Hz 0 to
120Hz/0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
Set the full-scale value to output the output frequency monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
56 Current monitoring reference
Rated inverter output current
0 to 500A/0 to 3600A *3
0 to 500A
Set the full-scale value to output the output current monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
291 Pulse train I/O selection 0
Pulse train input Pulse train output
0 Terminal JOG FM output
1 Pulse train input FM output
10 Terminal JOG High speed pulse train output (50%Duty)
11 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output (50%Duty)
20 Terminal JOG High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same)
21 Pulse train input
High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same)
100 Pulse train input
High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same) The inverter outputs the signal input as pulse train as is
866 *1 Torque monitoring reference - 150% - 0 to
400% Set the full-scale value to output the torque monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
867 AM output filter 0.01s 0 to 5s Set the output filter of terminal AM. *1 *The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection. setting can be made only for FR-B3 series. *2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more) *3 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
FM output circuit When Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection = "0 (initial value) or 1", FM output is selected and pulse train with maximum of 8VDC 2400pulses/s is output. The pulse width can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) FM terminal calibration using the operation panel and parameter unit.
Output frequency, etc. of the inverter can be indicated by connecting a DC ammeter of full-scale 1mA, digital indicator, etc.
Inverter
24V
2.2K
20K
3.3K
SD
FM
8VDC
T2
T1
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr. 55 (frequency monitor) Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
(Digital indicator)
(-)1440 pulses/s(+) FM
SD
Indicator 1mA full-scale analog meter
(+)
1mA FM
SD
Calibration resistor*1
(-)
143
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
High speed pulse train output specifications
* The output pulse rate is 50kpps when a monitor output value is 100%.
*1 Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used for calibration. This resistor is used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter. Note that the needle of the frequency meter may not deflect to full-scale when the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use this resistor and operation panel or parameter unit together.
*2 The initial setting is 1mA full-scale and 1440 pulse/s teminal FM frequency at 60Hz.
High speed pulse train output circuit (connection example with a pulse counter)
When Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, 100", high speed pulse train is output by open collector output. Pulse train of maximum of 55k pulses/s is output. Two types of pulse width, 50% Duty and fixed ON width, are available. Adjustment by calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) FM terminal calibration can not be performed.
* When the output wiring length is long, a pulse shape is deformed due to the stray capacitances of the wiring and output pulse can not be recognized. If the wiring length is long, connect the open collector output signal and the power supply using an external pull up resistance. Check specifications of a pulse counter for a resistance value to pull up. Select an appropriate resistance value so that the load current is 80mA or less.
Pulse when Pr. 291 = "10, 11" When Pr. 291 = "10, 11", the pulse cycle is 50% Duty (ON width and OFF width are the same).
When Pr. 291 = "20, 21, 100", fixed ON width of pulse is out- put (approx. 10s).
When the setting value is "100", the pulse train from the pulse train input (terminal JOG) is output as is. Use this value for synchronous speed operation of multiple inverters. (Refer to page 239)
* Hi indicates that the open collector output transistor is on.
Pulse when Pr. 291 = "20, 21, 100"
Item Specifications Output method NPN open collector output
Voltage between a collector and emitter 30V (max) Maximum permissible load current 80mA
Output pulse rate 0 to 55kpps *
Output resolution 3pps (excluding a jitter)
CAUTION Input specifications of terminal JOG (pulse train input or contact input) can be selected with Pr. 291.
Change the setting value using care not to change input specifications of terminal JOG. (Refer to page 239 for pulse train input.) After changing a setting value of Pr. 291, connect a meter between terminal FM and SD. Take care that a voltage should not be
applied to terminal FM when FM output (voltage output) pulse train is selected. The FM output of the inverter can not be connected to devices which have source logic type pulse input. When high speed pulse train output (Pr. 291 = "10, 11, 20, 21, 100") is
selected, performing parameter all clear returns the Pr. 291 setting to the initial value of "0", changing the terminal FM output from high speed pulse train output to FM output (voltage output).
FM
SD
Inverter
Pull up resistance *
Pulse counter
Hi * Low
50%duty 50%duty
Hi * Low
Approx. 10s Approx. 10s
3.3k
Terminal FM 0, 1
10, 11, 20, 21, 100
Pr.291
8.2V
FM output circuit
Open collector output circuit
144
Monitor display and monitor output signal
(2) Frequency monitoring reference (Pr. 55) Set the frequency to be based when the frequency is selected as the output of the terminal FM and terminal AM. Set the inverter output frequency (set frequency) at which the pulse speed of the terminal FM is 1440 pulses/s (50K
pulses/s). The pulse speed and inverter output frequency are proportional to each other. Note that the maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s (55K pulses/s).
Set the reference value of the frequency at which the output voltage of the terminal AM is 10VDC. The output voltage and frequency are proportional to each other. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
(3) Current monitoring reference (Pr. 56) Set the current at which the pulse speed of the terminal FM is 1440 pulses/s (50K pulses/s). The pulse speed and current value are proportional to each other. (The maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s
(55K pulses/s). ) Set the reference value of the current at which the output voltage of the terminal AM is 10VDC. The output voltage and current value are proportional to each other. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
(4) Reference of torque monitor (Pr. 866) Set the torque at which the pulse speed of the terminal FM is 1440 pulses/s (50k pulses/s). Pulse speed and torque monitor value are proportional. (The maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s (55k
pulses/s). Set the torque reference value at which the output voltage of the terminal AM is 10VDC. Output voltage and torque monitor value are proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
(5) Terminal AM response adjustment (Pr. 867) Using Pr. 867, the output voltage response of the terminal AM can be adjusted within the range 0 to 5s. Increasing the setting stabilizes the terminal AM output more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to 4ms)
2400 (55K)
1440 (50K)
1Hz 120Hz Output frequency
Setting range of Pr. 55
P u
ls e
s p
e e
d (
p u
ls e
s /s
)
60Hz (initial value)
Setting range of Pr. 55
1Hz 120Hz60Hz (initial value)
O u tp
u t vo
lta g e
10VDC
2400 (55K)
1440 (50K)
Rated output current (initial value)
500A
Setting range of Pr. 56
P u
ls e
s p
e e
d (
p u
ls e
s /s
)
Setting range of Pr. 56
Rated output current (initial value)
10VDC
500A
O u
tp u
t v o
lt a
g e
B3
2400 (55k)
1440 (50k)
(Pulse/s)
150% (initial value)
400%
Setting range of Pr. 866
P u
ls e
s p
e e
d (
p u
ls e
s /s
)
10VDC
150% (initial value)
400%
Setting range of Pr.866
O u
tp u
t v o
lt a
g e
145
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.12.3 Terminal FM, AM calibration (Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901))
(1) FM terminal calibration (C0(Pr. 900)) The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), the meter connected to
the inverter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor. Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital display can be provided by a digital counter. The monitor
value is 1440 pulses/s output at the full-scale value of the table on the previous page (Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection).
Calibrate the terminal FM in the following procedure. 1) Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across the terminals FM-SD of the inverter. (Note the polarity. The
terminal FM is positive.) 2) When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor. 3) Refer to the output signal list (page 137) and set Pr. 54. When you selected the running frequency or inverter
output current as the output signal, preset the running frequency or current value, at which the output signal will be 1440 pulses/s, to Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference or Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference. At 1440 pulses/s, the meter generally deflects to full-scale.
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal FM and terminal AM to full scale deflection.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
C0(900) FM terminal calibration Calibrate the scale of the meter connected to terminal FM.
C1(901) AM terminal calibration Calibrate the scale of the analog meter connected to terminal AM.
*1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). *2 The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.
*1 Not needed when the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used for calibration. This resistor is used when calibration must be made near the frequency meter for such a reason as a remote frequency meter. Note that the needle of the frequency meter may not deflect to full-scale when the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use this resistor and operation panel or parameter unit together.
*2 The initial settings are 1mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM frequency at 60Hz.
REMARKS When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr. 54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and make calibration. 1440 pulses/s are output from the terminal FM. The wiring length of the terminal FM should be 200m maximum.
CAUTION The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) is set to 1mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s FM output frequency at
60Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s. When a frequency meter is connected to across terminals FM-SD to monitor the running frequency, the FM terminal output is
filled to capacity at the initial setting if the maximum output frequency reaches or exceeds 100Hz. In this case, the Pr. 55 setting must be changed to the maximum frequency.
When Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection = "10, 11, 20, 21, 100" (high speed pulse train output), calibration using calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) can not be made.
8VDC
T2
T1
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr. 55 (frequency monitor) Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
(Digital indicator)
(-)1440 pulses/s(+) FM
SD
Indicator 1mA full-scale analog meter
(+)
1mA FM
SD
Calibration resistor*1
(-)
146
Monitor display and monitor output signal
(2) AM terminal calibration (C1 (Pr. 901))
Calibrate the AM terminal in the following procedure. 1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) to across inverter terminals AM-5. (Note the polarity. The terminal
AM is positive.) 2) Refer to the monitor description list (page 137) and set Pr. 158.
When you selected the running frequency, inverter output current, etc. as monitor, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10V.
3) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21" (reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for example) in Pr. 158.
Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.
REMARKS When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr. 54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and make calibration. 10VDC is output from the terminal AM.
AM
Inverter
10VDC
5
147
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) How to calibrate the terminal FM when using the operation panel (FR-DU07)
REMARKS Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in external operation mode, and make calibration in the
above procedure. Calibration can be made even during operation. For the operating procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the parameter unit instruction manual.
Parameters referred to Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection Refer to page 137 Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference Refer to page 142 Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference Refer to page 142 Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection Refer to page 137 Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection Refer to page 239
Press to return to the indication (step 4).
9. Press . Setting is complete.
2. Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3. Turn until appears.
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
1.Confirmation of the RUN indication and
operation mode indication
4. Press to display .
6. Press to enable setting.
7. If the inverter is at a stop, (press
or ) to start the inverter.
(Motor needs not be connected.)
8. Turn to adjust the indicator needle
to the desired position.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
(When Pr. 54=1)
Press twice to show the next parameter ( ).
DisplayOperation
( )
+
-
The parameter number read previously appears.
C0 to C7 setting is enabled.
Analog indicator
5. Turn until appears.
Set to C0 FM terminal calibration.
The monitor set to Pr. 54 FM terminal
function selection is displayed.
148
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4.13 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4.13.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page At instantaneous power failure occurrence, restart inverter without stopping motor
Automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure/flying start
Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611 148
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.
Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function
Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294 152
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases. when power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure when motor is coasting at start
Parameter Number Name Initial Value
Setting Range Description
FR-B FR-B3
57 Restart coasting time 9999
0
1.5K or less ................................................. 0.5s, 2.2K to 7.5K ........................................... 1s, 11K to 55K ............................................. 3.0s, 75K or more ................................................ 5.0s, The above times are coasting time.
0.1 to 5s/ 0.1 to 30s *
0.1 to 5s
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
58 Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart.
162
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
0
0 With frequency search 1 Without frequency search (reduced voltage system) 2 Encoder detection frequency search
10 Frequency search at every start 11 Reduced voltage system at every start 12 Encoder detection frequency search at every start
163 First cushion time for restart 0s 0 to 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider using these parameters according to the load (moment of inertia, torque) magnitude.164 First cushion
voltage for restart 0% 0 to 100%
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart
150% 0 to 220% Consider the rated inverter current as 100% and set the stall prevention operation level during restart operation.
299
Rotation direction detection selection at restarting
0
0 Without rotation direction detection 1 With rotation direction detection
9999 When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is detected. When Pr. 78 = "1","2", the rotation direction is not detected.
611 Acceleration time at a restart
55K or less 5s
0 to 3600s, 9999
Set the acceleration time to reach the set frequency at a restart. Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7 ) when "9999" is set.
75K or more
15 s
149
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation When instantaneous power failure protection (E.IPF) and undervotage
protection (E.UVT) are activated, the inverter output is shut off. (Refer to page 272 for E.IPF and E.UVT.) When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation is set, the motor can be restarted if power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is corrected. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)
When E.IPF and E.UVT are activated, instantaneous power failure/under voltage signal (IPF) is output.
The IPF signal is assigned to the terminal IPF in the initial setting. The IPF signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by setting "2 (positive logic) or 102 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
(2) Connection (CS signal) When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
selection signal (CS) is turned on, automatic restart operation is enabled.
When Pr. 57 is set to other than "9999" (automatic restart operation enabled), the inverter will not operate if used with the CS signal remained off.
(3) Automatic restart operation selection (Pr. 162, Pr. 299)
With frequency search When "0 (initial value), 10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed upon power restoration.
During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is detected.
You can select whether to make rotation direction detection or not with Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting. When capacities of the motor and inverter differ, set "0" (without rotation direction detection) in Pr. 299.
ON Power supply OFF
15ms to 100ms
ONIPF OFF
For use for only automatic restart after instantaneous power failure or flying start, short CS-SD in advance.
STF
IM
MCCB
CS SD
S1/L21 R1/L11
T/L3 S/L2 R/L1
MC1
W V U
REMARKS The CS signal is assigned to the terminal CS in the initial setting.
By setting "6" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection), you can assign the CS signal to the other terminal.
When Pr. 162 = 0, 10 (with frequency search)
Instaneous (power failure) time Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz)
Inverter output voltage E(V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
Speed detection time
+
Acceleration time at a restart (Pr.611 setting)
Restart cushion time (Pr.58 setting)
*
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
:with rotation direction detection :without rotation direction detection
Pr. 299 Setting Pr. 78 Setting
0 1 2 9999
0 (initial value) 1
REMARKS Speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to
the motor speed. (maximum 500ms) If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, the inverter
functions abnormally. (The inverter does not start smoothly.) Since the DC injection brake is operated instantaneously when
the speed is detected at a restart, the speed may reduce if the moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
When reverse rotation is detected when Pr. 78 = "1" (reverse rotation disabled), the rotation direction is changed to forward rotation after decelerates in reverse rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter will not start when the start command is reverse rotation.
150
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
Without frequency search When Pr. 162 = "1" or "11", automatic restart operation is performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting speed of the motor.
Encoder detection frequency search When "2 or 12" is set in Pr. 162 under encoder feedback
control, the motor starts at the motor speed and in the rotation direction detected from the encoder at power restoration.
The Pr. 58 and Pr. 299 settings are invalid for encoder detection frequency search.
Restart operation at every start When Pr. 162 = "10, 11 or 12", automatic restart operation is also performed every start, in addition to the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 162 = "0" or "2", automatic restart operation is performed at the first start after power supply-on, but the inverter starts at the starting frequency at the second time or later.
When Pr. 162 = 1, 11 (without frequency serch)
Coasting time Pr.57 setting
*
Instaneous (power failure) time
Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz)
Inverter output voltage E(V)
Restart cushion time (Pr.58 setting)
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
REMARKS This system stores the output frequency prior to an
instantaneous power failure and increases the voltage. Therefore, if the instantaneous power failure time exceeds 0.2s, the inverter starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency (initial value = 0.5Hz) since the stored output frequency cannot be retained.
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N (r/min)
Inverter output frequency f(Hz) Output voltage E(V)
Coasting time (Pr.57)
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
*
Acceleration time at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)
When Pr. 162 = 2, 12 (encoder detection frequency search)
REMARKS When encoder feedback control is invalid, setting "2 or 12" in Pr.
162 enables frequency search (Pr. 162 = "0, 10").
151
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Restart coasting time (Pr. 57) Coasting time is the time from when the motor speed is detected until automatic restart control is started. Set Pr. 57 to "0" to perform automatic restart operation. The coasting time is automatically set to the value below.
Generally this setting will pose no problems. 1500 or less . . . . . 0.5s, 2200 to 7.5K . . . . . 1s, 11K to 55K . . . . . . . . 3.0s, 75K or more . . . . . 5.0s
Operation may not be performed well depending on the magnitude of the moment (J) of inertia of the load or running frequency. Adjust the coasting time between 0.1s and 5s according to the load specifications.
(5) Restart cushion time (Pr. 58) Cushion time is the length of time taken to raise the voltage appropriate to the detected motor speed (output
frequency prior to instantaneous power failure when Pr. 162 = "1" or "11"). Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation, but adjust it according to the magnitude of the
moment (J) of inertia of the load or torque. Pr. 58 is invalid during encoder feedback control (Pr. 162 = "2, 12").
(6) Automatic restart operation adjustment (Pr. 163 to Pr. 165, Pr. 611)
Using Pr. 163 and Pr. 164, you can adjust the voltage rise time at a restart as shown on the left.
Using Pr. 165, you can set the stall prevention operation level at a restart.
Using Pr. 611, you can set the acceleration time until the set frequency is reached after automatic restart operation is performed besides the normal acceleration time.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. When automatic restart operation is selected, undervotage protection (E.UVT) and instantaneous power failure protection
(E.IPF) among the alarm output signals will not be provided at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. The SU and FU signals are not output during a restart. They are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed. Automatic restart operation will also be performed after a reset made by an inverter reset is canceled or when a retry is made
by the retry function. Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is invalid when load torque high speed frequency control (Pr. 270 =
"2, 3") is set.
CAUTION When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the instruction manual (basic).
Parameters referred to Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Refer to page 88 Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 90 Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 Retry function Refer to page 155 Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection Refer to page 180 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
Voltage
100%
Pr.164
(Pr.163) Pr.58 Time REMARKS If the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is
changed, the setting increments of Pr. 611 does not change.
152
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4.13.2 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294 )
*1 When the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting increments are "0.1s", and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and the setting increments are "0.01s"
*2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-accelerated to the set frequency.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
261 Power failure stop selection 0
0 Coasting to stop When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
1 Without under voltage avoidance When undervoltage or a power failure
occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.11 With under
voltage avoidance
2 Without under voltage avoidance
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop. If power is restored during a power failure, the inverter accelerates again.
12 With under voltage avoidance
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 3Hz 0 to 20Hz
Normally operation can be performed with the initial value unchanged. But adjust the frequency according to the magnitude of the load specifications (moment of inertia, torque).
263 Subtraction starting frequency 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
When output frequency Pr. 263 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
When output frequency < Pr. 263 Decelerate from output frequency
9999 Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 5s 0 to 3600/ 360s *1 Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 266.
265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 9999 0 to 3600/ 360s *1 Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 266.
9999 Same slope as in Pr. 264
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 60Hz
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is switched from the Pr. 264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 100% 0 to 200% Adjust the response level during undervoltage avoidance operation. A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change.
(1) Connection and parameter setting Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and
across terminals S/L2-S1/L21, and connect terminals R1/ L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
When Pr. 261 is set to "1" or "2", the inverter decelerates to a stop if an undervoltage or power failure occurs.
(2) Operation outline of deceleration to stop at power failure
If an undervoltage or power failure occurs, the output frequency is dropped by the frequency set in Pr. 262 .
Deceleration is made in the deceleration time set in Pr. 264. (The deceleration time setting is the time required from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency to a stop.)
When the frequency is low and enough regeneration energy is not provided, for example, the deceleration time (slope) from Pr. 265 to a stop can be changed.
Power supply
Remove the jumper
Inverter
S/L2 T/L3
S1/L21 P/+ N/
R1/L11
R/L1
Connect terminals R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
Pr.264 Power-failure deceleration time 1
Pr.265 Power-failure deceleration time 2
Time
Power supply
Output frequency
Subtracted frequency at deceleration start Pr.262
Power-failure deceleration time switchover frequency Pr.266
153
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2, 12") When power is restored during deceleration after an instantaneous power failure, acceleration is made again up to
the set frequency. When this function is used in combination with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation,
deceleration can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made again after power restoration. When power is restored after a stop by deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, automatic restart operation is performed if automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected (Pr. 57 "9999")
(5) Undervoltage avoidance function (Pr. 261 = "11, 12", Pr. 294) When Pr. 261 = "11, 12", the deceleration time is automatically adjusted (shortened) to prevent undervoltage from
occuring during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure. Adjust the slope of frequency decrease and response level with Pr. 294. A larger setting will improve
responsiveness to the bus voltage. Since the regeneration amount is large when the inertia is large, decrease the setting value.
(3) Power failure stop mode (Pr. 261 = "1, 11") If power is restored during power failure deceleration, deceleration to
a stop is continued and the inverter remains stopped. To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it on again.
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
During stop at occurrence of power failure
STF
Y46
Time
Turn off STF once to make acceleration again
Power supply
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
Pr.261 = 1
REMARKS
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 "9999"), deceleration to stop function is invalid and the restart after instantaneous power failure operation is performed.
After a power failure stop, the inverter will not start if the power supply is switched on with the start signal (STF/STR) input. After switching on the power supply, turn off the start signal once and then on again to make a start.
STF
Power supply
Y46
Not started as inverter is stopped due to power failure
ON
OFF ON
Output frequency
Time
IPF Power supply
Time
Output frequency
Y46
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
Reacceleration
When power is restored during deceleration
Pr.261 = 2
During power failure
Power supply
Output frequency
Y46
During deceleration at occurrence of power failure
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
Reset time + Pr.57
Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57 9999 When used with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
Time
154
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure
(6) Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal) After deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, inverter can not start even if the start command is given. In
this case, check the power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal). (at occurrence of input phase failure protection (E.ILF), etc.)
The Y46 signal is on during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure or during a stop after deceleration at an instantaneous power failure.
For the Y46 signal, set "46 (positive logic)" or "146 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) to assign the function.
REMARKS When Pr. 872 = "1" (input phase failure protection provided) and Pr. 261 "0" (power failure stop function valid), input phase failure protection (E.ILF) is not provided but power-failure deceleration is made.
CAUTION When Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "2" (MT-HC is used), the power failure deceleration function is invalid. When the (output frequency - Pr. 262) at undervoltage or power failure occurrence is negative, the calculation result is regarded
as 0Hz. (DC injection brake operation is performed without deceleration). During a stop or error, the power failure stop selection is not performed. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
CAUTION If power-failure deceleration operation is set, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is given from the motor.
Parameters referred to Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage Refer to page 100 Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Refer to page 88 Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection Refer to page 102 Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 148 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection Refer to page 158
155
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.14 Operation setting at alarm occurrence
4.14.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
Retry operation automatically resets an alarm and restarts the inverter at the starting frequency when the time set in Pr. 68 elapses after the inverter stopped due to the alarm.
Retry operation is performed by setting Pr. 67 to any value other than "0". Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence in Pr. 67.
When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr. 67 , a retry count excess alarm (E.RET) occurs, stopping the inverter output. (Refer to retry failure example)
Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a retry is made in the range 0 to 10s. (When the setting value is "0s", the actual time is 0.1s.)
Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The cumulative count in Pr. 69 is increased by 1 when a retry is regarded as successful after normal operation continues without alarms occurring for more than four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68 after a retry start.
Writing "0" in Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count. During a retry, the Y64 signal is on. For the Y64 signal,
assign the function by setting "64 (positive logic)" or "164 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal fnction selection) .
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Recover by retry operation at alarm occurrence Retry operatoin Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 155
Output alarm code from terminal Alarm code output function Pr. 76 157 Do not output input/output phase failure alarm
Input/output phase failure protection selection Pr. 251, Pr. 872 158
The motor is decelerated to stop at motor thermal activation Fault definition Pr. 875 159
If an alarm occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the alarm description for a retry. When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time "9999"), restart operation is performed at retry operation as at an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 148 for the restart function.)
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
65 Retry selection 0 0 to 5 An alarm for retry can be selected. (Refer to the next page)
67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 0
0 No retry function
1 to 10 Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. An alarm output is not provided during retry operation.
101 to 110 Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. (The setting value of minus 100 is the number of retries.) An alarm output is provided during retry operation.
68 Retry waiting time 1s 0 to 10s Set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm occurs until a retry is made.
69 Retry count display erase 0 0 Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retry.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Retry failure example
Inverter output frequency
Alarm occurrence
First retry Alarm
occurrence
Second retry Alarm
occurrence
Third retry Retry failure
(E.RET)
ON
0
Alarm signal (ALM)
Pr.68 Pr.68 Pr.68
Time
Y64 ON ON ON
Inverter output frequency
0
Y64
Pr.68
Pr.68 5
Retry success Retry success example
Success count + 1
Time
ON
Alarm occurrence
Retry success count
Retry start
156
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Using Pr. 65 you can select the alarm that will cause a retry to be executed. No retry will be made for the alarm not indicated. (Refer to page 266 for the alarm description.)
indicates the errors selected for retry.
Alarm Display for
Retry
Pr. 65 Setting Alarm Display for
Retry
Pr. 65 Setting
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
E.OC1 E. PE E.OC2 E.MB1 E.OC3 E.MB2 E.OV1 E.MB3 E.OV2 E.MB4 E.OV3 E.MB5 E.THM E.MB6 E.THT E.MB7 E.IPF E.OS E.UVT E.PTC E. BE E.CDO E. GF E.SER E.OHT E.ILF E.OLT E.OPT E.OP3
CAUTION For a retry error, only the description of the first alarm is stored. When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal relay
function, regeneration converter duty etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)
CAUTION When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm. When you have selected the retry function, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the instruction manual (basic).
Parameters referred to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 148
157
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.14.2 Alarm code output selection (Pr. 76)
By setting Pr. 76 to "1" or "2", the alarm code can be output to the output terminals. When the setting is "2", an alarm code is output at only alarm occurrence, and during normal operation, the terminals
output the signals assigned to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). The following table indicates alarm codes to be output. (0: output transistor off, 1: output transistor on)
At alarm occurrence, its description can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals.The alarm code can be read by a programmable controller, etc., and its corrective action can be shown on a display, etc.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
76 Alarm code output selection 0
0 Without alarm code output
1 With alarm code output (Refer to the following table)
2 Alarm code output at alarm occurrence only (Refer to the following table)
Operation Panel Indication (FR-DU07)
Output of Output Terminals Alarm Code
SU IPF OL FU
Normal * 0 0 0 0 0 E.OC1 0 0 0 1 1 E.OC2 0 0 1 0 2 E.OC3 0 0 1 1 3
E.OV1 to E.OV3 0 1 0 0 4 E.THM 0 1 0 1 5 E.THT 0 1 1 0 6 E.IPF 0 1 1 1 7 E.UVT 1 0 0 0 8 E.FIN 1 0 0 1 9 E. BE 1 0 1 0 A E. GF 1 0 1 1 B E.OHT 1 1 0 0 C E.OLT 1 1 0 1 D E.OPT 1 1 1 0 E E.OP3 1 1 1 0 E
Other than the above 1 1 1 1 F * When Pr. 76 = "2", the output terminals output the signals assigned to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 .
CAUTION When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 76
When an alarm occurs, the output terminals SU, IPF, OL, FU output the signal in the above table, independently of the Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) settings. Please be careful when inverter control setting has been made with the output signals of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
158
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
4.14.3 Input/output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872)
(1) Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251) When Pr. 251 is set to "0", output phase failure protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.
(2) Input phase failure protection selection (Pr. 872) When Pr. 872 is set to "1", input phase failure protection (E.ILF) is provided if a phase failure of one phase among
the three phases is detected for 1s continuously.
4.14.4 Overspeed detection (Pr. 374)
4.14.5 Encoder signal loss detection (Pr. 376)
* Setting can be made only when the FR-A7AP is mounted.
You can disable the output phase failure protection function that stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load side) three phases (U, V, W) opens. The input phase failure protection function of the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be made valid.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
251 Output phase failure protection selection 1
0 Without output phase failure protection 1 With output phase failure protection
872 Input phase failure protection selection 0
0 Without input phase failure protection 1 With input phase failure protection
REMARKS If an input phase failure has occurred when Pr. 872 = "1" (input phase failure protected) and a value other than "0" (power failure stop function valid) is set in Pr. 261, input phase failure protection (E.ILF) is not provided but power-failure deceleration is made.
CAUTION When an input phase failure occurs in the R/L1 and S/L2 phases, input phase failure protection is not provided but the
inverter output is shut off. If an input phase failure continues for a long time, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be shorter.
Parameters referred to Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection Refer to page 152
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
374 Overspeed detection level 140Hz 0 to 400Hz
When the motor speed reaches or exceeds the speed set in Pr. 374 during encoder feedback control, real sensorless vector control, or vector control, over speed (E.OS) occurs and stops the inverter output.
When the encoder signal is lost during encoder feedback control, orientation control, signal loss detection (E.ECT) is activated to stop the inverter output.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection
0 0 Signal loss detection is invalid
1 Signal loss detection is valid
ALM
Motor speed
Time
E.OS
Coast to stop
ON
Pr. 374
159
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.14.6 Fault definition (Pr. 875) When motor thermal protection is activated, an alarm can be output after the motor decelerates to a stop.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
875 Fault definition 0 0 Normal operation 1 The motor decelerates to stop when motor thermal protection is activated.
(1) Output is immediately shutoff at occurrence of any alarm (setting value is "0", initial value)
Output is immediately shutoff and an alarm output is provided at alarm occurrence.
(2) The motor decelerates to stop when motor thermal protection is activated (setting value is "1")
When external thermal relay (OHT), motor overload shutoff (electronic thermal relay function) (THM) or PTC thermistor
(PTC) is activated, turning on the minor fault output 2 signal (ER) starts the motor to decelerate and an alarm is provided after deceleration to a stop.
When the ER signal turns on, decrease load, etc. to allow the inverter to decelerate.
At occurrence of an alarm other than OHT, THM and PTC, output is immediately shut off and an alarm is output.
Set "97 (positive logic) or 197 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) and assign the ER signal to the output terminal.
CAUTION The value "0" is recommended for the system in which the motor continues running without deceleration due to a large torque
on the load side. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
Output speed
Alarm output (ALM, ALM2)
OHT occurrence
Minor fault output 2
(ER) E.OHT display
ON
ON
When Pr.875 = "1"
160
Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
4.15 Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
4.15.1 Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
How much energy can be saved Energy saving monitor Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 891 to Pr. 899 160
From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of the inverter can be monitored/output.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
52 DU/PU main display data selection
0 (output
frequency)
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 50 to 57, 100
0, 5 to 14, 17 to 20, 22 to 25, 34, 50 to 57,
100
50:Power saving monitor 51:Cumulative saving power monitor
54 FM terminal function selection 1
(output frequency)
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24, 50, 52, 53
1 to 3, 5 to 14, 17, 18, 21, 24,
50, 52, 53 50:Power saving monitor
158 AM terminal function selection
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times
9999
0 to 4 Set the number of times to shift the cumulative power monitor digit Clamps the monitoring value at maximum.
9999 No shift Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the maximum value.
892 Load factor 100% 30 to 150%
Set the load factor for commercial power- supply operation. Multiplied by the power consumption rate (page 163) during commercial power supply operation.
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity)
Inverter rated
capacity 0.1 to 55kW/0 to 3600kW *
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Set when calculating power saving rate, power saving rate average value, commercial operation power.
894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
0
0 Discharge damper control (fan) 1 Inlet damper control (fan) 2 Valve control (pump)
3 Commercial power-supply drive (fixed value)
895 Power saving rate reference value 9999
0 Consider the value during commercial power-supply operation as 100%
1 Consider the Pr. 893 setting as 100%. 9999 No function
896 Power unit cost 9999 0 to 500
Set the power unit cost. Displays the power saving amount charge on the energy saving monitor.
9999 No function
897 Power saving monitor average time 9999
0 Average for 30 minutes 1 to 1000h Average for the set time
9999 No function
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear
9999
0 Cumulative monitor value clear 1 Cumulative monitor value hold
10 Totalization continued (communication data upper limit 9999)
9999 Totalization continued (communication data upper limit 65535)
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 9999
0 to 100% Use for calculation of annual power saving amount. Set the annual operation ratio (consider 365 days 24hr as 100%).
9999 No function The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. * The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
161
Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Energy saving monitor list The following provides the items that can be monitored by the power saving monitor (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158 = "50").
(Only 1) power saving and 3) power saving average value can be output to Pr. 54 (terminal FM) and Pr. 158 (terminal AM))
The following shows the items which can be monitored by the cumulative saving power monitor (Pr. 52 = "51"). (The monitor value of the cumulative monitor can be shifted to the right with Pr. 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.)
Energy Saving Monitor Item Description and Formula Incre-
ments Parameter Setting
Pr. 895 Pr. 896 Pr. 897 Pr. 899
1) Power saving
Difference between the estimated value of power necessary for commercial power supply operation and the input power calculated by the inverter Power during commercial power supply operation input power monitor
0.01kW/ 0.1kW *3 9999
9999
2) Power saving rate
Ratio of power saving on the assumption that power during commercial power supply operation is 100%
100
0.1%
0
Ratio of power saving on the assumption that Pr. 893 is 100%
100 1
3) Power saving average value
Average value of power saving amount per hour during predetermined time (Pr. 897) 0.01kWh
/0.1kWh *3
9999
9999 0 to
1000h4) Power saving rate average value
Ratio of power saving average value on the assumption that the value during commercial power supply operation is 100%
100 0.1%
0
Ratio of power saving average value on the assumption that Pr. 893 is 100%
100 1
5) Power saving amount average value
Power saving average value represented in terms of charge 3) Power saving average value Pr. 896
0.01/0.1 *3
0 to 500
Energy Saving Monitor Item Description and Formula Incre-
ments Parameter Setting
Pr. 895 Pr. 896 Pr. 897 Pr. 899
6) Power saving amount
Power saving is added up per hour. ( 1) Power saving t)
0.01kWh /0.1kWh
*1*2*3
9999
9999
7) Power saving amount charge
Power saving amount represented in terms of charge 6) Power saving amount Pr. 896
0.01/0.1
*1*3
0 to 500
8) Annual power saving amount
Estimated value of annual power saving amount
24 365 0.01kWh /0.1kWh
*1*2*3
9999 0 to
100%
9) Annual power saving amount charge
Annual power saving amount represented in terms of charge 8) Annual power saving amount Pr. 896
0.01/0.1
*1*3
0 to 500
*1 For communication (RS-485 communication, communication option), the display increments are 1. For example, the communication data is "10" for "10.00kWh".
*2 When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed. *3 The setting depends on capacities. (55K or less/75K or more)
REMARKS As the operation panel (FR-DU07) is 4-digit display, it displays in 0.1 increments since a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", when a
monitor value in 0.01 increments exceeds "99.99". The maximum display is "9999". As the operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is 5-digit display, it displays in 0.1 increments since a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0",
when a monitor value in 0.01 increments exceeds "999.99". The maximum display is "99999". The upper limit of communication (RS-485 communication, communication option) is "65535" when Pr. 898 Power saving cumulative
monitor clear = "9999". The upper limit of 0.01 increments monitor is "655.35" and that of 0.1 increments monitor is "6553.5".
Power during commercial power supply operation
1) Power saving
1) Power saving Pr. 893
( 1) Power saving t) Pr. 897
( 2) Power saving rate t) Pr. 897
3) Power saving average value Pr. 893
6) Power saving amount Operation time during accumulation
of power saving amount
Pr. 899 100
162
Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(2) Power saving instantaneous monitor ( 1) power savings, 2) power saving rate ) On the power saving monitor ( 1)), an energy saving effect as compared to the power consumption during
commercial power supply operation (estimated value) is calculated and displays on the main monitor. In the following case, the power saving monitor ( 1)) is "0".
(a)Calculated values of the power saving monitor are negative values. (b)During the DC injection brake operation (c)Motor is not connected (output current monitor is 0A)
On the power saving rate monitor ( 2)), setting "0" in Pr. 895 Power saving rate reference value displays the power saving rate on the assumption that power (estimated value) during commercial power supply operation is 100%. When Pr. 895 = "1", the power saving rate on the assumption that the Pr. 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) value is 100% is displayed.
(3) Power saving average value monitor ( 3) power saving average value, 4) average power saving rate average value, 5) power saving amount average value)
Power saving average value monitor can be displayed when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 897 Power saving monitor average time.
The power saving average value monitor ( 3)) displays the average value per unit time of the power saving amount at averaging.
The average value is updated every time an average time has elapsed after the Pr. 897 setting is changed, power is turned on or the inverter is reset, assuming as a starting point.The power savings average value update timing signal (Y92) is inverted every time the average value is updated.
The power saving average value monitor ( 4)) displays the average value per unit time of power saving rate ( 2)) at every average time by setting "0" or "1" in Pr. 895 Power saving rate reference value.
By setting the charge (power unit) per 1kWh of power amount in Pr. 896 Power unit cost, the power saving amount average value monitor ( 5)) displays the charge relative to the power saving average value (power saving average value ( 3)) Pr. 896).
(4) Cumulative saving power monitor ( 6) power saving amount, 7) power saving amount charge, 8) annual power saving amount, 9) annual power saving amount charge)
On the cumulative saving power monitor, the monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times settings. For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 891 = "2", the PU/DU display is 12.78 (display in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted. The other monitors are clamped at the display maximum value.
The cumulative saving power monitor ( 6)) can measure the power amount during a predetermined period. Measure according to the following steps 1) Write "9999" or "10" in Pr. 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear. 2) Write "0" in Pr. 898 at measurement start timing to clear the cumulative saving power monitor value and start
totalization of power saving. 3) Write "1" in Pr. 898 at measurement end timing to hold the cumulative saving power monitor value.
REMARKS The cumulative saving power monitor value is stored every hour. Hence, when the power supply is switched on again within one
hour after it was switched off, the previously stored monitor value is displayed and totalization starts. (The cumulative monitor value may decrease)
0 4 8 12 16 20 T
When Pr.897=4 [Hr]
Power saving
instantaneous
value [kW]
Pr. 897 setting
Power saving
average value
[kW]
Y92: power saving average value update timing signal
Operation start
0 in the first measurement
Average Average
During stop
Average
Average
Power is off
Last value
Stores Hi/Low when the power is off and starts.
40 8 12 16 0 4
163
Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(5) Power estimated value of commercial power supply operation (Pr. 892, Pr. 893, Pr. 894) Select the commercial power supply operation pattern from among the four patterns of discharge damper control
(fan), inlet damper control (fan), valve control (pump) and commercial power supply drive, and set it to Pr. 894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation.
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity) in Pr. 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity). The power consumption rate (%) during commercial power supply operation is estimated from the operation
pattern and the ratio of speed to rating (current output frequency/60Hz) in the following chart.
From the motor capacity set in Pr. 893 and Pr. 892 Load factor, the power estimated value (kW) during commercial power supply operation is found by the following formula.
Power estimated value (kW) during commercial power supply operation
= Pr. 893 (kW)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]
Discharge side damper control (fan)
Inlet damper control (fan)
Valve control (pump)
Commercial power-supply drive
P o
w e
r c o
n s u
m p
ti o
n [
% ]
Power consumption (%) 100
Pr. 892 (%) 100
164
Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(6) Annual power saving amount, power charge (Pr. 899) By setting the operation time rate [%] (ratio of time when the motor is actually driven by the inverter during a year)
in Pr. 899, the annual energy saving effect can be predicted. When the operation pattern is predetermined to some degree, the estimated value of the annual power saving
amount can be found by measurement of the power saving amount during a given measurement period. Refer to the following and set the operation time rate.
1) Predict the average time [h/day] of operation in a day. 2) Find the annual operation days [days/year]. (Monthly average operation days 12 months) 3) Calculate the annual operation time [h/year] from 1) and 2).
4) Calculate the operation time rate and set it to Pr. 899.
Calculate the annual power saving amount from Pr. 899 Operation time rate (estimated value) and power saving average value monitor
The annual power saving amount charge can be monitored by setting the power charge per hour in Pr. 896 Power unit cost. Calculate the annual power saving amount charge in the following method.
Annual operation time (h/year) = Average time (h/day) Operation days (days/year)
Operation time rate (%) = 100(%)
REMARKS Operation time rate setting example: When operation is performed for about 21 hours per day and the monthly average
operation days are 16 days Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) 16 (days/month) 12 months = 4032 (h/year)
Operation time rate (%) = 100(%) = 46.03%
Set 46.03% to Pr. 899.
Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) = 24h 365 days
Annual power saving amount charge = Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) Pr. 896
REMARKS In the regeneration mode, make calculation on the assumption that "power saving = power during commercial power supply operation (input power = 0)".
Parameters referred to Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection Refer to page 137 Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection Refer to page 137 Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection Refer to page 137
Annual operation time (h/year) 24 (h/day) 365 (days/year)
4032 (h/year) 24 (h/day) 365 (days/year)
Power saving average value (kW) during totalization
when Pr. 898 = 10 or 9999
Pr. 899 100
165
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.1 Function assignment of analog input terminal (Pr. 858, Pr. 868)
For the terminal 1 and terminal 4 used for analog input, frequency (speed) command, magnetic flux command, torque command, etc. can be selected. Functions change according to the control mode as in the table below.
Terminal 1/ Terminal 4 function
:No function
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Function assignment of analog input terminal
Terminal 1 and terminal 4 function assignment Pr. 858, Pr. 868 165
Selection of voltage/current input (terminal 1, 2, 4) Perform forward/ reverse rotation by analog input
Analog input selection Pr. 73, Pr. 267 166
Adjust the main speed by analog auxiliary input
Analog auxliary input and compensation (added compensation and override function)
Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253 169
Adjustment (calibration) of analog input frequency and voltage (current)
Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905) 172
Function assignment of terminal 1 and terminal 4 of analog input can be selected and changed by parameter.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
858 Terminal 4 function assignment 0 0, 4, 9999 Select the terminal 4 function. (Refer to the following list)
868 Terminal 1 function assignment 0 0, 4, 9999 Select the terminal 1 function. (Refer to the following list)
Setting value
Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment
Pr. 858 Terminal 1 function assignment
0 (Initial value)
Frequency command (AU signal-ON) Frequency setting auxiliary
4 Stall prevention operation level input Stall prevention operation level input 9999
REMARKS When "4" is set in both Pr. 868 and Pr. 858, terminal 1 is made valid and terminal 4 has no function. When "4" (stall prevention) is set in Pr. 868, functions of terminal 4 become valid independently of whether the AU terminal is on
or off.
Parameters referred to Advanced magnetic flux vector control Refer to page 68
166
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.2 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)
(1) Selection of analog input specifications For the terminals 2, 4 used for analog input, voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (0 to 20mA) can be
selected. Change parameters (Pr.73, Pr.267) and a voltage/current input switch (switch 1, 2) to change input specifications. (refer to the table below)
Switch 1:Terminal 4 input ON: Current input (initial status) OFF: Voltage input
Switch 2: Terminal 2 input ON: Current input OFF: Voltage input (initial status)
Rated specifications of terminal 2, 4 Voltage input: Input resistance 10k 1k, Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC Current input: Input resistance 245 5, Maximum permissible current 30mA
You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog input terminal selection specifications, the override function and the input signal polarity.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description Voltage/current
input switch
73 Analog input selection 1
0 to 5, 10 to 15
Switch 2 - OFF (initial status)
You can select the input specifications of terminal 2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) and input specifications of terminal 1 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V). Override and reversible operation can be selected.
6, 7, 16, 17 Switch 2 - ON
267 Terminal 4 input selection 0 0 Switch 1 - ON
(initial status) Terminal 4 input 4 to 20mA
1 Switch 1 - OFF
Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V 2 Terminal 4 input 0 to 10V
CAUTION Set Pr.73, Pr.267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the
setting. Incorrect setting as in the table below may result in failure. Incorrect settings other than below can cause abnormal operation.
Voltage/current input switch
24
Switch 1
Switch 2
Setting Causing Failure Operation
Switch setting Terminal input ON
(current input) Voltage input This could lead to damage to the analog signal output circuit of external devices. (electrical load in the analog signal output circuit of external devices increases)
OFF (voltage input) Current input This could lead to damage to the input circuit of the inverter.
(output power in the analog signal output circuit of external devices increases)
167
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Refer to the following table and set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267. ( indicates the main speed setting)
Set the voltage/current input switch referring to the table below. ( )
Pr. 73 Setting
Terminal 2 Input
Terminal 1 Input
Terminal 4 Input
Pr. 73 Setting
Compensation Input Terminal and
Compensation Method
Polarity Reversible
0 0 to 10V 0 to 10V
When the AU signal is off
0 Terminal 1
Added compensation
No (Indicates that a frequency command signal of negative
polarity is not accepted.)
1 (initial value) 0 to to 5V 0 to 10V 1 (initial value) 2 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 2 3 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 3 4 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 4 Terminal 2
Override5 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 5 6 0 to 20mA 0 to 10V 6
Terminal 1 Added compensation
7 0 to 20mA 0 to 5V 7 10 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 10
Yes
11 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 11 12 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 12 13 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 13 14 0 to 10V 0 to 10V 14 Terminal 2
Override15 0 to 5V 0 to 5V 15 16 0 to 20mA 0 to 10V 16 Terminal 1
Added compensation17 0 to 20mA 0 to 5V 17 0
0 to 10V
According to Pr. 267 setting when the AU signal is on 0: 0 to 20mA (initial value) 1: 0 to 5V 2: 0 to 10V
0 Terminal 1
Added compensation
No (Indicates that a frequency command signal of negative
polarity is not accepted.)
1 (initial value) 0 to 10V 1 (initial value) 2 0 to 5V 2 3 0 to 5V 3 4 0 to 10V
4 Terminal 2
Override5 0 to 5V 5 6
0 to 10V 6
Terminal 1 Added compensation
7 0 to 5V 7 10
0 to 10V 10
Yes
11 0 to 10V 11 12 0 to 5V 12 13 0 to 5V 13 14 0 to 10V
14 Terminal 2
Override15 0 to 5V 15 16
0 to 10V 16 Terminal 1
Added compensation17 0 to 5V 17
Terminal 2 Input Specifications Pr. 73 Setting Switch 2 Terminal 4 Input
Specifications Pr. 267 Setting Switch 1
Voltage input (0 to 10V) 0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14 OFF Voltage input (0 to 10V) 2 OFF Voltage input (0 to 5V) 1 (initial value), 3, 5, 11, 13, 15 OFF Voltage input (0 to 5V) 1 OFF Current input (0 to 20mA) 6, 7, 16, 17 ON Current input (0 to 20mA) 0 (initial value) ON
CAUTION Turn the AU signal on to make terminal 4 valid. Match the setting of parameter and switch. A different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. The terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) signal is added to the main speed setting signal of the terminal 2 or 4. When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or 4 is used for the main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal
(50% to 150% at 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V). (When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input, compensation by the terminal 2 is made invalid.))
Use Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at input of the maximum output frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
When Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4", the value of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is as set to the stall prevention operation level. When terminal 1 and terminal 4 are used for frequency setting, set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 858 and Pr. 868.
indicates an initial value.
168
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(2) Perform operation by analog input voltage The frequency setting signal inputs 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10VDC) to across
the terminals 2-5. The 5V (10V) input is the maximum output frequency. The maximum output frequency is reached when 5V (10V) is input.
The power supply 5V (10V) can be input by either using the internal power supply or preparing an external power supply. The internal power supply outputs 5VDC across terminals 10-5, or 10V across terminals 10E-5.
When inputting 10VDC to the terminal 2, set any of "0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14" in Pr. 73. (The initial value is 0 to 5V)
Setting "1 (0 to 5VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10VDC)" in Pr. 267 and a voltage/ current input switch in the OFF position changes the terminal 4 to the voltage input specification. When the AU signal turns on, the terminal 4 input becomes valid.
(3) Perform operation by analog input current When the pressure or temperature is controlled constant by a fan, pump,
etc., automatic operation can be performed by inputting the output signal 0 to 20mADC of the adjuster to across the terminals 4-5.
The AU signal must be turned on to use the terminal 4. Setting any of "6, 7, 16, 17" in Pr. 73 and a voltage/current input switch in
the ON position changes the terminal 2 to the current input specification. At this time, the AU signal need not be turned on.
Compensation input characteristic when STF is on
(4) Perform forward/reverse rotation by analog input (polarity reversible operation)
Setting any of "10 to 17" in Pr. 73 enables polarity reversible operation. Providing input (0 to 5V or 0 to 10V) to the terminal 1 enables
forward/reverse rotation operation according to the polarity.
Parameters referred to Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level Refer to page 74 Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Refer to page 172 Pr. 252, Pr. 253 Override bias/gain Refer to page 169 Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment Refer to page 165
STF InverterForward
rotation
Frequency setting
0 to 5VDC 10
2
5
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 5VDC)
SD
STF Inverter
Forward rotation
Frequency setting
0 to 10VDC 10E
2
5
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 10VDC)
SD
Terminal Inverter Built-in Power Supply Voltage
Frequency Setting Resolution
Pr. 73 (terminal 2 input voltage)
10 5VDC 0.030Hz/60Hz 0 to 5VDC input 10E 10VDC 0.015Hz/60Hz 0 to 10VDC input
REMARKS The wiring length of the terminal 10, 2, 5 should be 30m maximum.
STF
Inverter
Forward rotation
Frequency setting
4
5
AU
Connection diagram using terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)
4 to 20mADC Current
input equipment
SD
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Terminal 1 input (V)
+5 (+10)
-5 (-10)
0
60
Set frequency (Hz)
Reversible
Not reversible
169
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.16.3 Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253)
(1) Added compensation (Pr. 242, Pr. 243)
Auxiliary input characteristics
A fixed ratio of analog compensation (override) can be made by the added compensation or terminal 2 as an auxiliary input for multi-speed operation or the speed setting signal (main speed) of the terminal 2 or terminal 4.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting
Range Description
73 Analog input selection 1 0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, 17 Added compensation
4, 5, 14, 15 Override compensation
242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) 100% 0 to 100% Set the ratio of added compensation amount
when terminal 2 is the main speed.
243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) 75% 0 to 100% Set the ratio of added compensation amount
when terminal 4 is the main speed.
252 Override bias 50% 0 to 200% Set the bias side compensation value of override function.
253 Override gain 150% 0 to 200% Set the gain side compensation value of override function.
Added compensation connection example
The compensation signal can be input for the main speed setting for synchronous/continuous speed control operation, etc.
Setting any of "0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, 17" in Pr. 73 adds the voltage across terminals 1-5 to the voltage signal across terminals 2-5.
If the result of addition is negative, it is regarded as 0 at the Pr. 73 setting of any of "0 to 3, 6, 7", or reverse rotation operation (polarity reversible operation) is performed when the STF signal turns on at the Pr. 73 setting of any of "10 to 13, 16, 17".
The compensation input of the terminal 1 can also be added to the multi-speed setting or terminal 4 (initial value 4 to 20mA).
The added compensation for terminal 2 can be adjusted by Pr. 242, and the compensation for terminal 4 by Pr. 243.
Analog command value using terminal 2
= Terminal 2 input + Terminal 1 input
Analog command value using terminal 4
= Terminal 4 input + Terminal 1 input
CAUTION When the Pr. 73 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure
or malfunction. (Refer to page 166 for setting.)
10
2
5
Forward rotation
Inverter
STF
1Auxiliary input 0 to 10V( 5V)
SD
Pr. 242 100(%)
Pr. 243 100(%)
Output frequency
When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V)
When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V
+5V (+10V)
Terminal 10-2.5V (-5V)
-5V (-10V)
STF signal is ON
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
(a) When Pr. 73 setting is 0 to 5
Output frequency
When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 2.5V (5V)
When voltage across terminals 2-5 is 0V
+5V (+10V)
Terminal 10-2.5V (-5V)
-5V (-10V)
Forward rotation
Forward rotation
(b) When Pr. 73 setting is 10 to 15
Reverse rotation
Reverse rotation
+2.5V (+5V)
+2.5V (+5V)
STF signal is ON
STF signal is ON
STF signal is ON
170
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(2) Override function (Pr. 252, Pr. 253)
Override connection diagram
Use the override function to change the main speed at a fixed ratio. Set any of "4, 5, 14, 15" in Pr. 73 to select an override. When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is used for the main speed
setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal. (When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input, compensation made by the terminal 2 becomes invalid.)
Using Pr. 252 and Pr. 253, set the override range. How to find the set frequency for override
Set frequency (Hz) = Main speed set frequency (Hz)
Main speed set frequency (Hz): Terminal 1, 4 input, multi-speed setting Compensation amount (%): Terminal 2 input
Example)When Pr. 73 = "5" The set frequency changes as shown below according to the terminal 1 (main speed) and terminal 2 (auxiliary) inputs.
CAUTION When the Pr. 73 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure
or malfunction. (Refer to page 166 for setting.)
REMARKS The AU signal must be turned on to use the terminal 4. When inputting compensation to multi-speed operation or remote setting, set "1" (compensation made) in Pr. 28 Multi-speed input
compensation selection. (Initial value is "0")
Parameters referred to Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 166
10
2
5
Forward rotation
Main speed
Inverter
STF
1 (-)
(+)
Override setting
SD
Compensation amount (%) 100(%)
Pr.252
0V 2.5V (5V)
5V (10V)
0
50
100
150
200
Initial value (50% to 150%)
Voltage across terminals 2-5
Pr.253
O v e
rr id
e v
a lu
e (
% )
0 2.5 5 0
Terminal 1 input voltage (V)
S e
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (
H z )
Terminal 2 5VDC input(150%)
Terminal 2 0V input(50%)
Terminal 2 2.5VDC input(100%)
30
15
60
45
90
171
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.16.4 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74, Pr. 849)
(1) Time constant of analog input (Pr. 74) Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit. Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannnot be performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response (The time constant can be set between approximately 10ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8).
Response level and stability of frequency reference command by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) signal can be adjusted.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
74 Input filter time constant 1 0 to 8 The primary delay filter time constant for the analog input can be set. A larger setting results in slower response.
849 Analog input offset adjustment 100% 0 to 200%
This function provides speed command by analog input (terminal 2) with offset. Motor rotation due to noise, etc. by analog input can be avoided at zero speed command.
(2) Offset adjustment of analog speed command input (Pr. 849)
When speed command by analog input is set, create the range where the motor remains stop to prevent malfunction at very low speed.
On the assumption that the Pr. 849 setting 100% as 0, the offset voltage is offset as follows: 100% < Pr. 849........ positive side 100% > Pr. 849........ negative side The offset voltage is found by the following formula.
Parameters referred to Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 166 Pr. 125, C2 to C4 (Bias and gain of the terminal 2 frequency setting) Refer to page 172
0% 100% (10V or 5V)
Pr.849 setting
F re
q u
e n
c y
c o
m m
a n
d
Speed setting signal
Slope determined according to Pr.125 and C2 to C4
Slope does not change.
0% 200%100%
* According to the Pr. 73 setting
Offset voltage = Voltage at 100% (5V or 10V *)
Pr. 849 100 [V]100
172
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.5 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905))
(1) The relationship between analog input terminal and calibration parameter Terminal 1 functional calibration parameter
Terminal 4 functional calibration parameter
: No function
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 0 to 20mADC). Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch to switch between 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC and 0 to 20mADC. (Refer to page 165)
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *3 0 to 120Hz Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
(maximum).
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *3 0 to 120Hz Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
(maximum).
241 *2 Analog input display unit switchover 0
0 Displayed in % Select the unit of analog input display.1 Displayed in V/mA
C2(902) *1 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *3 0 to 120Hz Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 2 input.
C3(902) *1 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
C4(903) *1 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
C5(904) *1 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *3 0 to 120Hz Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 4 input.
C6(904) *1 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 20% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the bias side
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
C7(905) *1 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 100% 0 to 300% Set the converted % of the gain side
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. *1 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). *2 The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. *3 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
Pr. 868 Setting Terminal Function Calibration Parameters
Bias setting Gain setting
0 (initial value)
Frequency (speed) setting auxiliary
C2(Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency C3(Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C5(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency C4(Pr. 903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7(Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
4 Stall prevention operation level * Pr. 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input (Refer to page 74 )
Pr. 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input (Refer to page 74 )
9999
Pr. 858 Setting Terminal Function Calibration Parameters
Bias setting Gain setting 0
(initial value)
Frequency command/speed command
C5(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency C6(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency C7(Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
4 Stall prevention operation level * Pr. 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input (Refer to page 74 )
Pr. 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input (Refer to page 74 )
9999
173
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
.
(4) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241) You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration. Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73, Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch, the display units of
C3 (Pr. 902), C4 (Pr. 903), C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905) change as shown below.
(2) Change the frequency at maximum analog input. (Pr. 125, Pr. 126)
Set a value in Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only the frequency setting (gain) of the maximum analog input power (current). (C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) setting need not be changed)
(3) Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905))
The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the relationship between the input signal entered from outside the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC, and the output frequency.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using C2 (Pr. 902). (factory-set to the frequency at 0V)
Using Pr. 125, set the output frequency relative to the frequency command voltage (current) set in Pr. 73 Analog input selection.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5 (Pr. 904). (factory-set to the frequency at 4mA)
Using Pr. 126, set the output frequency relative to 20mA of the frequency command current (4 to 20mA).
There are three methods to adjust the frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain. (a) Method to adjust any point by application of
voltage (current) to across the terminals 2-5 (4-5). page 174
(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5(4-5).
page 175 (c) Adjusting only the frequency without adjusting the
voltage (current). page 176 CAUTION
When the terminal 2 is calibrated to change the inclination of the set frequency, the setting of the terminal 1 is also changed. When a voltage is input to the terminal 1 to make calibration, (terminal 2 (4) analog value + terminal 1 analog value) is the analog
calibration value. When the voltage/current input specifications were changed using Pr. 73, Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch, be sure to
make calibration.
Analog Command (terminal 2, 4)
(according to Pr. 73, Pr. 267, voltage/current input switch)
Pr. 241 = 0 (initial value) Pr. 241 = 1
0 to 5V input 0 to 5V desplayed in 0 to 100% (0.1%). 0 to 100% desplayed in 0 to 5V (0.01V). 0 to 10V input 0 to 10V desplayed in 0 to 100% (0.1%). 0 to 100% desplayed in 0 to 10V (0.01V).
0 to 20mA input 0 to 20mA desplayed in 0 to 100% (0.1%). 0 to 100% desplayed in 0 to 20mA (0.01mA).
REMARKS Analog input display is not displayed correctly if voltage is applied to terminal 1 when terminal 1 input specifications (0 to 5V, 0
to 10V) and main speed (terminal 2, terminal 4 input) specifications (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) differ. (For example, 5V (100%) is analog displayed when 0V and 10V are applied to terminal 2 and terminal 1 respectively in the initial status. In this case, set "0" (initial value is 0% display) in Pr. 241 to use.
60Hz
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Pr.125
0
0 Frequency setting signal
100%
10V
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0 5V
C2(Pr.902)
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
(H z )
Pr.126
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0 20 4 20mA
C5
(Pr.904)
C6 (Pr.904) (Pr.905)C7
60Hz
174
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(5) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method (a)Method to adjust any point by application of voltage (current) to across the terminals 2-5 (4-5).
REMARKS If the frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate just 60Hz, set calibration parameter C0
FM terminal calibration. (Refer to page 145) If the gain and bias frequency settings are too close, an error ( ) may be displayed at the time of write.
DisplayOperation
Analog voltage (current) value (%) across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5)
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
*
*
* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of the potentiometer.
* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of the potentiometer.
CAUTION After performing the operation in step 6, do not touch until completion of calibration.
(Adjustment completed)
Press twice to show the next parameter ( ).
C0 to C7 setting is enabled.
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
By turning , you can read another parameter.
Press to return to the indication (step 4).
The parameter number read previously appears.
1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication The inverter must be at a stop. The inverter must be in the PU operation mode. (Using )
2.Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
3.
4. Press to display .
5. Turn until ( )
appears. Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain.
6.Press to display the analog voltage (current)
value (%).
7. Apply a 5V (20mA) voltage (current). (Turn the external potentiometer connected across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5) to maximum (any position).)
8.Press to set.
175
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5(4-5). (To change from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
REMARKS
By pressing after step 6, you can confirm the current frequency setting bias/gain setting.
It cannot be confirmed after execution of step 7.
DisplayOperation
Analog voltage (current) value (%) across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5)
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!! (Adjustment completed)
C0 to C7 setting is enabled.
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
The parameter number read previously appears.
1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation mode indication The inverter must be at a stop.
The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
(Using )
2. Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3. Turn until appears.
4. Press to display .
5. Turn until ( )
appears. Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain.
6. Press to display the analog voltage
(current) value (%).
7. Turn to set the gain voltage (%).
"0V (0mA) equals to 0%, 5V (10V, 20mA) to 100%"
8. Press to set.
Remarks
The current setting at the instant of turning
is displayed.
By turning , you can read another parameter.
Press to return to the indication (step 4).
Press twice to show the next parameter ( ).
The gain frequency is reached when the analog voltage (current) value across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5) is 100%.
176
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(c) Method to adjust only the frequency without adjustment of a gain voltage (current). (When changing the gain frequency from 60Hz to 50Hz)
REMARKS Changing C4 (Pr. 903) or C7 (Pr. 905) (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value. The input of terminal 1 (frequency
setting auxiliary input) is added to the frequency setting signal. For the operating procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the FR-PU04/FR-PU07 instruction manual. Make the bias frequency setting using calibration parameter C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904). (Refer to page 173)
CAUTION Take care when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V (0mA). Even if a speed command is not given, merely turning on the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.
Parameters referred to Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Refer to page 88 Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection Refer to page 166 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182
DisplayOperation
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
1. Pr. 125) or
(Pr. 126) appears.
4. Press to set.
5. Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
or
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
3. Turn to change the set value to
" ". (50.00Hz)
2. Press to show the currently set value.
(60.00Hz)
6. Apply a voltage across the inverter
terminals 2-5 (across 4-5) and turn on the
start command (STF, STR).
Operation starts at 50Hz.
177
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)
(1) Reset selection You can select the operation timing of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input. When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17", a reset can be input only when the protective function is activated.
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Limit reset function Make alarm stop when PU is disconnected Stop from PU
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Pr. 75 177
Prevention of parameter rewrite Parameter write disable selection Pr. 77 179
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor
Reverse rotation prevention selection Pr. 78 180
Display necessary parameters Display of applied parameters and user group function Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174 180
Control of parameter write by communication EEPROM write selection Pr. 342 202
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17
For the initial value, reset always enabled, without disconnected PU detection, and with PU stop function are set.
The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
Pr. 75 Setting Reset Selection Disconnected PU Detection PU Stop Selection
0 Reset input normally enabled. If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued.
Pressing decelerates the motor to
a stop only in the PU operation mode.
1 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated
2 Reset input normally enabled. When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off.3 Reset input enabled only when the
protective function is activated 14
(initial value)
Reset input normally enabled. If the PU is disconnected, operation will be continued. Pressing decelerates the motor to
a stop in any of the PU, external and communication operation modes.
15 Reset input enabled only when the protective function is activated
16 Reset input normally enabled. When the PU is disconnected, the inverter output is shut off.17 Reset input enabled only when the
protective function is activated
CAUTION When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output.
Also, the cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay function and regenerative brake duty is cleared. The reset key of the PU is valid only when the protective function is activated, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.
178
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
(2) Disconnected PU detection This function detects that the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for
longer than 1s and causes the inverter to provide an alarm output (E.PUE) and come to an alarm stop. When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15", operation is continued if the PU is disconnected.
(3) PU stop selection In any of the PU operation, external operation and network operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing
of the PU.
When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, " " is displayed but an alarm is not output. An alarm output is not provided.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0 to 3", deceleration to a stop by is valid only in the PU operation mode.
(4) Restarting method when stop was made by pressing from the PU during external operation
The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.
CAUTION When the PU has been disconnected since before power-on, it is not judged as an alarm. To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter. The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disconnected during PU jog operation with Pr. 75 set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15"
(operation is continued if the PU is disconnected). When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function
is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.
REMARKS
The motor will also decelerate to a stop (PU stop) when is input during operation in the PU mode through RS-485
communication with Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection set to "1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals).
(a) When operation panel (FR- DU07) is used 1)After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the
STF or STR signal.
2)Press to display .( canceled)
3)Press to return to .
4)Turn on the STF or STR signal.
(b) Connection of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) 1)After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the
STF or STR signal.
2)Press .( canceled) 3)Turn on the STF or STR signal.
CAUTION If Pr. 250 Stop selection is set to other than "9999" to select coasting to a stop, the motor will not be coasted to a stop but
decelerated to a stop by the PU stop function during external operation
CAUTION Do not reset the inverter with the start signal on. Doing so will cause the inverter to start immediately after a reset, leading to hazardous conditions.
Parameters referred to Pr. 250 Stop selection Refer to page 104
Speed
Time Key
Key
Stop/restart example for external operation
Operation panel
STF ON (STR) OFF
EXT
179
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77)
(1) Write parameters only at a stop (setting "0", initial value) Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode. The shaded parameters in the parameter list (page 55) can always be written, regardless of the operation mode and
operating status. However, Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection and Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection can be written during operation in the PU operation mode, but cannot be written in external operation mode.
(3) Write parameters during operation (setting "2") Parameters can always be written. The following parameters cannot be written during operation if Pr. 77 = "2". Stop operation when changing their
parameter settings.
You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting
Range Description
77 Parameter write selection 0
0 Write is enabled only during a stop. 1 Parameter write is not enabled.
2 Parameter write is enabled in any operation mode regardless of operating status.
Pr. 77 can be always set independently of the operation mode and operating status.
(2) Disable parameter write (setting "1") Parameter write is not enabled. (Reading is
enabled.) Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot
be performed, either. The parameters given on the right can be written
even if Pr. 77 = "1".
Parameter Number Name
22 Stall prevention operation level 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 77 Parameter write selection 79 Operation mode selection
160 User group read selection
Parameters referred to Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182
Parameter Number Name
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
48 Second stall prevention operation current 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 61 Reference current
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
71 Applied motor 79 Operation mode selection 80 Motor capacity 81 Number of motor poles 82 Motor excitation current 83 Motor rated voltage 84 Rated motor frequency
90 to 94 (Motor constants) 96 Auto tuning setting/status
178 to 196 (I/O terminal function selection)
255 Life alarm status display 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 257 Control circuit capacitor life display 258 Main circuit capacitor life display 291 Pulse train I/O selection 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration
293 Acceleration/deceleration individual operation selection
329 Digital input unit selection (Parameter for the plug-in option FR-A7AX)
343 Communication error count
541 Frequency command sign selection (CC-Link) (Parameter for the plug-in option FR-A7NC)
563 Energization time carrying-over times 564 Operating time carrying-over times 858 Terminal 4 function assignment 859 Torque current 868 Terminal 1 function assignment
Parameter Number Name
180
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
Set this parameter when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction. This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel (FR-DU07),
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication.
4.17.4 Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)
(1) Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr. 160) When Pr. 160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). (Refer to the parameter list, pages 55 to 64, for the simple mode parameters.) In the initial setting (Pr. 160 = "0") status, simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disabled 2 Forward rotation disallowed
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
160 User group read selection 0
9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
0 The simple mode and extended parameters can be displayed
1 Only parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
172 User group registered display/ batch clear 0
(0 to 16) Displays the number of cases registered as a user group. (Reading only)
9999 Batch clear the user group registration
173 *1 User group registration 9999 0 to 999, 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be registered to the user group.
174 *1 User group clear 9999 0 to 999, 9999 Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from the user group.
*1 The values read from Pr. 173 and Pr. 174 are always "9999".
REMARKS When a plug-in option is fitted to the inverter, the option parameters can also be read. When reading the parameters using the communication option, all parameters (simple mode, extended mode, parameters for
options) can be read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency, Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment are displayed as simple mode parameters when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is mounted.
When reading the parameters using the RS-485 terminals, all parameters can be read reagrdless of the Pr. 160 setting by setting Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection and Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection.
* OP indicates a communication option
Pr. 551 Pr. 550 Pr. 160 Valid/Invalid 1 (RS-485) Valid
2 (PU) (initial value)
0 (OP) Valid 1 (RS-485) Invalid (all readable)
9999 (auto-detect) (initial value)
With OP: valid Without OP: invalid (all readable)
181
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) User group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174) The user group function is designed to display only the parameters necessary for setting. From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can be registered to a user group. When Pr. 160 is set to
"1", only the parameters registered to the user group can be accessed. (Reading of parameters other than the user group registration is disabled.)
To register a parameter to the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 173. To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered
parameters, set Pr. 172 to "9999". (3) Registration of parameter to user group (Pr. 173)
(4) Deletion of parameter from user group (Pr. 174)
When registering Pr. 3 to user group
When deleting Pr. 3 from user group
REMARKS Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 can always be read, independently of the user group setting. Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 172 to Pr. 174 cannot be registered to the user group. When Pr. 174 or Pr. 175 is read, "9999" is always displayed. Although "9999" can be written, no function is available. When any value other than "9999" is set to Pr. 172, no function is available.
Parameters referred to Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection Refer to page 191 Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection Refer to page 191
IndicationOperation
Parameter setting mode
Pr. 173 User group registration is displayed.
When Pr. 173 is read, " " is displayed.
Select the parameter number to be registered.
Flicker Registration of Pr. 3 to user group completed!!
1.Confirm the operation display and operation mode display. The inverter must be at a stop. The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
(Press in the external operation mode.)
2.Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
3.Turn until appears.
5.Turn until Pr. 3 appears.
6.Press to set.
" " and " " are displayed alternately.
To continue parameter registration, repeat steps 3 to 6.
4.Press to display. " "
Operation 1.Confirm the operation display and operation mode display. The inverter must be at a stop. The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
(Press in the external operation mode.)
2.Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
3.Turn until appears.
5.Turn until Pr. 3 appears.
6.Press to clear.
" " and " " are displayed alternately.
To continue parameter registration, repeat steps 3 to 6.
4.Press to display. " "
Indication
Parameter setting mode
Pr. 174 User group clear is displayed.
When Pr. 174 is read, " " is displayed.
Select the parameter number to be deleted.
Flicker Deletion of Pr. 3 from user group completed!!
182
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location
4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)
The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Operation mode selection Operation mode selection Pr. 79 182 Started in network operation mode Operation mode at power on Pr. 79, Pr. 340 190
Selection of control location Sslection of control source, speed command source and control location during communication operation
Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551 191
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter. Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07/FR-PU04), combined operation of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation, and network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication option is used).
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
LED Indication : Off : On
79 Operation mode selection
0
0 Use external/PU switchover mode ( ) to switch
between the PU and external operation mode. At power on, the inverter is placed in the external operation mode.
External operation mode
PU operation mode
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2 Fixed to external operation mode Operation can be performed by switching between the external and Net operation mode.
External operation mode
NET operation mode
3
External/PU combined operation mode 1 Running frequency Start signal
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR- PU07) setting or external signal input (multi-speed setting, across terminals 4-5 (valid when AU signal turns on)).
External signal input (terminal STF, STR)
4
External/PU combined operation mode 2 Running frequency Start signal
External signal input (Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG, multi- speed selection, etc.)
Input from the PU (FR- DU07/FR-PU04/FR- PU07)
( , )
6 Switch-over mode Switch among PU operation, external operation, and NET operation while keeping the same operating status.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
NET operation mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock) X12 signal ON
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode. (output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode.
PU operation mode
External operation mode
183
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Operation mode basics
(2) Operation mode switching method
The operation mode is to specify the source of inputting the start command and set frequency of the inverter.
Select the "external operation mode" when performing operation by basically using the control circuit terminals and providing potentiometers, switches, etc. externally, select the "PU operation mode" when inputting the start command and frequency setting through communication from the operation panel (FR-DU07), parameter unit (FR- PU04/FR-PU07), PU connector, or select the "network operation mode (NET operation mode)" when using the RS-485 terminals or communication option.
The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.
REMARKS Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation, and these settings differ in starting method.
In the initial setting, the stop function by of the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07) (PU stop selection) is valid also in other than the
PU operation mode. (Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. Refer to page 177.)
REMARKS For switching of operation by external terminals, refer to the following:
PU operation external interlock signal (X12 signal) page 187 PU-external operation switch-over signal (X16) page 188 PU-NET operation switchover signal (X65), External-NET operation switchover signal (X66) page 189 Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection page 190
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8
9 10
Network operation mode
Network operation mode
External operation mode
PU operation mode
Personnel computer
Personnel computer
Operation panel
PLC
Volume Switch
RS-485 terminals
Communication option
External terminal
PU connector
Switching from the network
Switch to the network operation mode from the network.
Switch to the external operation mode from the network.
External operation
Switching from the PU
Press of
the PU to light
Network operation PU operation
Network operation PU operation
When "0, 1, or 2" is set in Pr. 340
When "10 or 12" is set in Pr. 340 Press of the PU to light
Press of
the PU to light
Press of the PU to light
184
Selection of operation mode and operation location
(3) Operation mode selection flow In the following flowchart, select the basic parameter setting and terminal connection related to the operation mode. START Connection Parameter setting Operation
Where is the start command source?
From external (STF/STR terminal)
Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.)
STF (forward rotation)/STR (reverse rotation) -SD (Refer to page 118.) Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG-SD, etc.
Frequency setting terminal ON STF(STR) ON
From PU (Digital setting) STF (forward rotation)/STR (reverse rotation) -SD
(Refer to page 118.)
Pr. 79 = "3" (External/PU combined
operation 1) DU digital setting
STF(STR) ON
From communication (RS-485 terminals/communication option)
RS-485 terminals or communication option?
RS-485 terminals STF (forward rotation)/STR (reverse rotation) -SD
(Refer to page 118.) Connection of RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 198.)
Pr. 338 = "1" Pr. 340 = "1, 2"
Communication frequency setting command sending
STF(STR) ON
Communication option Connection of communication option
(Refer to the corresponding communication option instruction manual)
Pr. 338 = "1" Pr. 340 = "1"
Communication frequency setting command sending
STF(STR) ONFrom PU (FWD/REV key)
Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.) Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM,
RH, JOG-SD, etc. Pr. 79 = "4"
(External/PU combined operation 2)
Frequency setting terminal ON FWD/REV key ON
From PU (Digital setting) Pr. 79 = "1" (Fixed to PU operation)
Digital setting FWD/REV key ONFrom communication
(RS-485 terminals/communication option)
From communication (RS-485 terminals/communication option)
RS-485 terminals or communication option?
RS-485 terminals
Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.) Connection of RS-485 terminals (Refer to page 198.) Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG-SD, etc.
Pr. 339 = "1" Pr. 340 = "1, 2"
Frequency setting terminal ON Communication start command
sending
From PU (Digital setting)
From communication RS-485 terminals
Connection of RS-485 terminals (Refer to page 198.) Pr. 340 = "1, 2"
Communication frequency setting command sending
Communication start command sendingCommunication option
Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.) Connection of communication option (Refer to the corresponding communication option instruction manual) Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM, RH, JOG-SD, etc.
Pr. 339 = "1" Pr. 340 = "1"
Frequency setting terminal ON Communication start command
sending
From PU (Digital setting)
From communication (communication option)
Connection of communication option (Refer to the corresponding communication
option instruction manual) Pr. 340 = "1"
Communication frequency setting command sending
Communication start command sending
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
185
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) External operation mode (setting "0" (initial value), "2")
(5) PU operation mode (setting "1")
Select the external operation mode when performing operation by providing a frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc. externally and connecting them to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.
Basically, parameter changing is disabled in external operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed. Refer to page 55 for the parameter list.)
When "0" or "2" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the external operation mode at power on. (When using the network operation mode, refer to page 190)
When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting "2" fixes the operation mode to external operation mode. When frequent parameter changing is necessary, setting "0" (initial value) allows the operation mode to be changed easily to PU operation mode by
pressing of the operation panel. When you
switched to PU operation mode, always return to external operation mode.
The STF and STR signal are used as a start command, and the terminal 2, 4, multi-speed setting, JOG signal, etc. are used as frequency setting.
Select the PU operation mode when performing operation by only the key operation of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR- PU07). Also select the PU operation mode when making communication using the PU connector.
When "1" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the PU operation mode at power on. You cannot change to the other operation mode.
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting like a potentiometer. (Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection, refer to page 253.)
When PU operation mode is selected, the PU operation mode signal (PU) can be output. For the terminal used for the PU signal output, assign the function by setting "10 (positive logic) or 110 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
3 4
5 6
7
8
9
10 Hz
Three-phase AC power supply Motor
Frequency setting potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
5
10
2
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
Three-phase AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
FR-DU07
,
,
186
Selection of operation mode and operation location
(6) PU/external combined operation mode 1 (setting "3")
(7) PU/external combined operation mode 2 (setting "4")
Select the PU/external combined operation mode 1 when making frequency setting from the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR- PU07) and inputting the start command with the external start switch.
Select "3" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other operation mode.
When a frequency is input from the external signal by multi-speed setting, it has a higher priority than the frequency setting of the PU. When AU is on, the terminal 4 is used.
Select the PU/external combined operation mode 2 when making frequency setting from the external potentiometer, multi-speed or JOG signal and inputting the start command by key operation of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR- PU07).
Select "4" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other operation mode.
Three-phase AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
FR-DU07
STR
Forward rotation start Reverse rotation start
STF
SD
3 4
5 6
7
8
9
10
Hz
Three-phase AC power supply Motor
Frequency setting potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
U V W
5
10
2
FR-DU07
,
187
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(8) Switch-over mode (setting "6") While continuing operation, you can switch between the PU operation, external operation and network operation
(when RS-485 terminals or communication option is used).
(9) PU operation interlock (setting "7") The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to external operation mode when the
PU operation interlock signal (X12) input turns off. This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode.
Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79. For the terminal used for X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input
terminal function selection) to assign the function. (Refer to page 118 for Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.) When the X12 signal has not been assigned, the function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to the
PU operation interlock signal.
Operation Mode Switching Switching Operation/Operating Status
External operation PU operation
Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. The frequency set with the volume (frequency setting potentiometer), etc. is used unchanged. (Note
that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
External operation NET operation
Send the mode change command to network operation mode through communication. Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation. The value set with the setting volume (frequency setting potentiometer) or like is used unchanged.
(Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)
PU operation external operation
Press the external operation key of the operation panel, parameter unit. The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the external operation. The set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal.
PU operation NET operation
Send the mode change command to network operation mode through communication. Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.
NET operation external operation
Command to change to external mode is transmitted by communication. Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal. The set frequency is determined by the external frequency setting signal.
NET operation PU operation
Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit. The rotation direction and set frequency signal in network operation mode are used unchanged.
X12 (MRS) Signal
Function/Operation Operation mode Parameter write
ON Operation mode (external, PU, NET) switching enabled Output stop during external operation
Parameter write enabled (Pr. 77 Parameter write selection, depending on the corresponding parameter write condition (Refer to page 55 for the parameter list))
OFF Forcibly switched to external operation mode External operation allowed Switching to PU or NET operation mode disabled
Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr. 79
Operating Condition X12 (MRS) Signal
Operation Mode Operating Status
Switching to PU, NET
Operation Mode Operation
mode Status
PU/NET During stop ONOFF *1
External *2 If external operation frequency setting and start signal are entered, operation is performed in that status.
Disallowed Running ONOFF *1 Disallowed
External During stop
OFFON
External *2 During stop
Allowed ONOFF Disallowed
Running OFFON During operation output stop Disallowed ONOFF Output stop operation Disallowed
*1 The operation mode switches to external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is turned off with either of STF and STR on.
*2 At alarm occurrence, pressing of the operation panel resets the inverter.
CAUTION If the X12 (MRS) signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to PU operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on. When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the MRS signal serves as the normal MRS function (output stop) by
turning on the MRS signal and then changing the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in the PU operation mode. Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the signal acts as the PU interlock signal.
When the MRS signal is used as the PU operation interlock signal, the logic of the signal is as set in Pr. 17. When Pr. 17 = "2", read ON as OFF and OFF as ON in the above explanation.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
188
Selection of operation mode and operation location
(10) Switching of operation mode by external terminal (X16 signal) When external operation and operation from the operation panel are used together, use of the PU-external
operation switching signal (X16) allows switching between the PU operation mode and external operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop, start command off).
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 6, 7", the operation mode can be switched between the PU operation mode and external operation mode. (Pr. 79 = "6" switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
For the terminal used for X16 signal input, set "16" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
Pr. 79 Setting
X16 Signal State Operation Mode Remarks
ON (external) OFF (PU)
0 (initial value) External operation mode PU operation mode Can be switched to external, PU or NET operation mode
1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode
2 External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode (Can be switched to NET operation mode)
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed
6 External operation mode PU operation mode Can be switched to external, PU or NET operation mode with
operation continued
7
X12 (MRS) ON
External operation mode PU operation mode Can be switched to external, PU or NET operation mode (Output
stop in external operation mode) X12 (MRS)
OFF External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly switched to external operation mode)
REMARKS The operation mode status changes depending on the setting of Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF
status of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 189.) The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
189
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(11) Switching of operation mode by external terminal (X65, X66 signal) When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 2, 6, 7", the operation mode switching signals (X65, X66) can be used to change the PU or
external operation mode to network operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop or start command off). (Pr. 79 = "6" switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
When switching between the network operation mode and PU operation mode 1) Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value), "6" or "7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the X12
(MRS) signal turns on.) 2) Set "10 or 12" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection. 3) Set "65" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the NET-PU operation switchover signal (X65) to the external terminal. 4) The operation mode changes to PU operation mode when the X65 signal turns on, or to network operation mode
when the X65 signal turns off.
When switching between the network operation mode and external operation mode 1)Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value), "2", "6" or "7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the
X12 (MRS) signal turns on.) 2)Set "0 (initial value), 1 or 2" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection. 3)Set "66" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the NET-external operation switchover signal (X66) to the external terminal. 4)The operation mode changes to network operation mode when the X66 signal turns on, or to external operation mode
when the X66 signal turns off.
Pr. 340 Setting
Pr. 79 Setting
X65 Signal State RemarksON (PU) OFF (NET)
10, 12
0 (initial value) PU operation mode *1 NET operation mode *2 Cannot be switched to external operation mode 1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed
6 PU operation mode *1 NET operation mode *2 Operation mode can be switched with operation continued Cannot be switched to external operation mode
7
X12(MRS) ON PU operation mode *1 NET operation mode *2, 3 Output stop in external operation mode
X12(MRS) OFF External operation mode Forcibly switched to external operation mode
*1 NET operation mode when the X66 signal is on. *2 PU operation mode when the X16 signal is off. PU operation mode also when Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1"
(communication option control source) and the communication option is not fitted. *3 External operation mode when the X16 signal is on.
Pr. 340 Setting
Pr. 79 Setting
X66 Signal State RemarksON (NET) OFF(external)
0 (initial value), 1, 2
0 (initial value) NET operation mode *1 External operation mode *2
1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode *1 External operation mode Cannot be switched to PU operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed 6 NET operation mode *1 External operation mode *2 Operation mode can be switched with operation continued
7
X12(MRS) ON NET operation mode *1 External operation mode *2 Output stop in external operation mode
X12(MRS) OFF External operation mode Forcibly switched to external operation mode
*1 PU operation mode is selected when Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "1" (communication option control source) and the communication option is not fitted.
*2 PU operation is selected when the X16 signal is off. When the X65 signal has been assigned, the operation mode changes with the ON/OFF state of the X65 signal.
REMARKS The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 15 Jog frequency Refer to page 83 Pr. 4 to 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Multi-speed operation Refer to page 81 Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Refer to page 177 Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection Refer to page 253 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection Refer to page 190 Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection Refer to page 191
190
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4.18.2 Operation mode at power on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)
(1) Specify operation mode at power on (Pr. 340) Depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings, the operation mode at power on (reset) changes as described below.
When power is switched on or when power comes back on after instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in network operation mode. After the inverter has started up in the network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be performed from a program. Set this mode for communication operation using the RS-485 terminals or communication option.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
79 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Select the operation mode. (Refer to page 184.)
340 * Communication startup mode selection 0
0 As set in Pr. 79.
1, 2 Started in network operation mode. When the setting is "2", it will resume the pre-instantaneous power failure operation mode after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
10, 12
Started in network operation mode. Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode from the operation panel. When the setting is "12", it will resume the pre-instantaneous power failure operation mode after an instantaneous power failure occurs.
The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode. * The parameters can be set whenever the communication option is connected. (Refer to page 180.).
Pr. 340 Setting
Pr. 79 Setting
Operation Mode at Power on, Power Restoration, Reset Operation Mode Switching
0 (initial value)
0 (initial value)
External operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled *2
1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode
2 External operation mode Switching between the external and Net operation mode is enabled Switching to PU operation mode is disabled
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled
6 External operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled while running
7 X12 (MRS) signal ON ....External operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation
mode is enabled *2
X12 (MRS) signal OFF ..External operation mode Fixed to external operation mode (forcibly switched to external operation mode.)
1, 2 *1
0 NET operation mode
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
1 PU operation mode 2 NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode 6 NET operation mode
7 X12 (MRS) signal ON ....NET operation mode X12 (MRS) signal OFF ..External operation mode
10, 12 *1
0 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled *3 1 PU operation mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0" 2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
6 NET operation mode Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is enabled while running *3
7 External operation mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0" *1 The Pr. 340 setting "2" or "12" is mainly used for communication operation using the inverter RS-485 terminals. When a value other than "9999"
(selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure) is set in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time, the inverter will resume the same operation state which was in before after power has been restored from an instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 340 = "1, 10", a start command turns off if power failure has occurred and then restored during a start command is on.
*2 The operation mode cannot be switched directly between the PU operation mode and network operation mode.
*3 Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode with key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and X65 signal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 148. Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182.
191
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.18.3 Operation command source and speed command source during communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551)
(1) Select the control source of the network operation mode (Pr. 550) Either the RS-485 terminals or communication option can be specified as the source of control in network operation mode. For example, set Pr. 550 to "1" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency setting from the
inverter RS-485 terminals in the network operation mode independently of whether the communication option is connected or not.
(2) Select the control source of the PU operation mode (Pr. 551) Either the PU connector, RS-485 terminals can be specified as the source of control in the PU operation mode. In the PU operation mode, set Pr. 551 to "1" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency setting
through communication from the unit RS-485 terminals.
*1 The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 551 to "2". *2 When the communication option is not fitted, the operation mode cannot be switched to network operation mode.
When the RS-485 terminals or communication option is used, the external operation command and speed command can be made valid. Also, the control command source in the PU operation mode can be selected.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
338 Communication operation command source 0
0 Operation command source communication 1 Operation command source external
339 Communication speed command source 0
0 Speed command source communication
1 Speed command source external (Frequency setting from communication is invalid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid)
2 Speed command source external (Frequency setting from communication is valid, terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is invalid)
550 * NET mode operation command source selection
9999
0 Communication option valid 1 RS-485 terminals valid
9999 Automatic recognition of the communication option Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid. When the communication option is fitted, the communication option is valid.
551 * PU mode operation command source selection 2
1 Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU operation mode control source. 2 Select the PU connector as the PU operation mode control source. 3 Manufacturer setting. Do not set.
The above parameters can be set whenever the communication option is connected. (Refer to page 180.) * Pr 550 and Pr. 551 are always write-enabled.
CAUTION Since Pr. 550 = "9999" (automatic recognition of the communication option) in the initial setting, parameter write, start command
and frequency setting cannot be executed by communication using the inverter RS-485 terminals when the communication option is fitted. (Monitor and parameter read can be performed.)
CAUTION The PU operation mode has a higher priority when Pr. 550 = "1" (NET mode RS-485 terminals) and Pr. 551 = "1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals).
When the communication option is not fitted, therefore, the operation mode cannot be switched to network operation mode. Changed setting value is made valid when powering on or resetting the inverter.
Pr. 550 Setting
Pr. 551 Setting
Operation Mode of Control Source RemarksPU connector RS- 485 terminals Communication option
0 1 PU operation mode
*1 NET operation mode *2
2 (initial value) PU operation mode NET operation mode *2
1 1 PU operation mode
*1 Switching to NET operation mode disabled
2 (initial value) PU operation mode NET operation mode
9999 (initial value)
1 PU operation mode *1 NET operation mode *2
2 (initial value) PU operation mode
NET operation mode *2 Communication option fitted
NET operation mode Communication option not fitted
192
Selection of operation mode and operation location
(3) Controllability through communcation
*1 As set in Pr. 338 Communication operation command source and Pr. 339 Communication speed command source. (Refer to page 191) *2 At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer. *3 Enabled only when stopped by the PU. At a PU stop, PS is displayed on the operation panel. As set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection. (Refer to page 177) *4 Some parameters may be write-disabled according to the Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting and operating status. (Refer to page 179) *5 Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. When Pr. 77 = 2, write is
enabled. (Refer to page 55 for the parameter list)Parameter clear is disabled. *6 When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 1 (RS-485 terminals valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection =
9999 and the communication option is not fitted. *7 When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 0 (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
= 9999 and the communication option is fitted.
Operation Location
Condition (Pr. 551 Setting)
Operation Mode
Item
PU Operation
External Operation
External/PU Combined
Operation Mode 1
(Pr. 79 = 3)
External/PU Combined Operation
Mode 2 (Pr. 79 = 4)
NET Operation (when RS-485 terminals are
used) *6
NET Operation (when
communication option is used) *7
C on
tro l b
y R
S -4
85 c
om m
un ic
at io
n fro
m P
U c
on ne
ct or
2 (PU
connector)
Run command (start, stop) *3 *3 *3
Running frequency setting
Monitor Parameter write *4 *5 *4 *4 *5 Parameter read Inverter reset
1 (RS-485
terminals)
Run command (start, stop) *3 *3 *3 *3 *3
Running frequency setting
Monitor Parameter write *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Parameter read
Inverter reset
C on
tro l b
y co
m m
un ic
at io
n fro
m
R S
-4 85
te rm
in al
s
1 (RS-485
terminals)
Run command (start, stop)
Running frequency setting
Monitor Parameter write *4 *5 *4 *4 *5 Parameter read Inverter reset
2 (PU
connector)
Run command (start, stop) *1
Running frequency setting *1
Monitor Parameter write *5 *5 *5 *5 *4 *5 Parameter read Inverter reset *2
C on
tro l b
y co
m m
un ic
at io
n fro
m c
om m
un ic
at io
n op
tio n
Run command (start, stop) *1
Running frequency setting *1
Monitor Parameter write *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *4 Parameter read
Inverter reset *2
Co nt
ro l c
irc ui
t ex
te rn
al te
rm in
al s
Inverter reset Run command (start, stop) *1
Frequency setting *1
: Enabled, : Disabled, : Some are enabled
193
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Operation at alarm occurrence
*1 Can be selected using Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection *2 Can be selected using Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval, Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval. *3 As controlled by the communication option. *4 In the PU jog operation mode, operation is always stopped when the PU is disconnected. Whether error (E.PEU) occurrence is allowed or not is
as set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. *5 When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 1 (RS-485 terminals valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection =
9999 and the communication option is not fitted *6 When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 0 (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
= 9999 and the communication option is fitted
Alarm Definition
Operation Mode
Condition (Pr. 551 setting)
PU Operation
External Operation
External/PU Combined Operation
Mode 1 (Pr. 79 = 3)
External/PU Combined
Operation Mode 2
(Pr. 79 = 4)
NET Operation (when RS-485 terminals are
used) *5
NET Operation (when
communication option is used)
*6
Inverter fault Stop PU disconnection of the PU connector
2 (PU connector) Stop/continued *1, 4
1 (RS-485 terminals) Stop/continued *1
Communication alarm of PU connector
2 (PU connector) Stop/
continued *2
Continued Stop/continued *2
Continued
1 (RS-485 terminals) Continued
Communication alarm of RS- 485 terminals
1 (RS-485 terminals) Stop/
continued *2
Continued Stop/continued *2
Continued
2 (PU connector) Continued Stop/continued *2
Continued
Communication alarm of communication option
Continued Stop/continued *3
Continued
194
Selection of operation mode and operation location
(5) Selection of control source in network operation mode (Pr. 338, Pr. 339) As control sources, there are the operation command sources that control the signals related to the inverter start
command and function selection and the speed command source that controls the signals related to frequency setting. In network operation mode, the commands from the external terminals and communication (RS-485 terminals or
communication option) are as listed below.
Operation Location Selection
Pr. 338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: External
Remarks Pr. 339 Communication speed command
source 0: NET 1:External 2:External 0: NET 1:External 2:External
Fixed function (Terminal- equivalent function)
Running frequency from communication
NET NET NET NET
Terminal 2 External External Terminal 4 External External Terminal 1 Compensation
Se le
ct iv
e fu
nc tio
n
Pr . 1
78 to
P r.
18 9
se tti
ng
0 RL Low speed operation com- mand/remote setting clear stop-on-contact selection 0
NET External NET External Pr. 59 = "0" (multi-
speeds) Pr. 59 = "1 , 2"
(remote) Pr. 270 = "1 , 3"
(stop-on-contact)
1 RM Middle-speed operation command/remote setting deceleration
NET External NET External
2 RH High speed operation command/remote setting acceleration
NET External NET External
3 RT Second function selection/ Stop-on contact selection 1 NET External Pr. 270 = "1 , 3"
(stop-on-contact) 4 AU Current input selection Combined Combined 5 JOG Jog operation selection External
6 CS Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
External
7 OH External thermal relay input External
8 REX Fifteen speed selection NET External NET External Pr. 59 = "0" (multi-speeds)
9 X9 Third function selection NET External
10 X10 Inverter operation enable signal External
11 X11 MT-HC connection, instantaneous power failure detection
External
12 X12 PU operation external interlock External
13 X13 External DC injection brake operation start NET External
14 X14 PID control valid terminal NET External NET External
15 BRI Brake opening completion signal NET External
16 X16 PU-external operation switchover External
19 X19 Load torque high-speed fre- quency NET External
20 X20 S-pattern acceleration/decel- eration C switchover NET External
22 X22 Orientation command NET External
24 MRS Output stop Combined External Pr. 79 "7"
PU operation interlock External Pr. 79 = "7"
When X12 signal is not assigned
25 STOP Start self-holding selection External
Se le
ct iv
e fu
nc tio
n
Pr . 1
78 to
P r.
18 9
se tti
ng
60 STF Forward rotation command NET External 61 STR Reverse rotation command NET External 62 RES Reset External 63 PTC PID forward action switchover External 64 X64 PID forward action switchover NET External NET External 65 X65 PU-NET operation switchover External
66 X66 External-NET operation switchover External
67 X67 Command source switchover External
195
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
[Explanation of table] External : Control is valid only from external terminal signal. NET : Control only from communication is valid Combined : Control is valid from either of external terminal and communication. : Control is invalid from either of external terminal and communication. Compensation : Control by signal from external terminal is only valid when Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection = "1"
(6) Switching of command source by external terminal (X67) In network operation mode, the command source switching signal (X67) can be used to switch the operation
command source and speed command source. This signal can be utilized to control the signal input from both the external terminal and communication.
Set "67" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X67 signal to the external terminal.
When the X67 signal is off, the operation command source and speed command source are external.
REMARKS The control source of communication is as set in Pr. 550 and Pr. 551.
X67 Signal State Operation Command Source Speed Command Source No signal assignment
According to Pr. 338 According to Pr. 339 ON OFF Operation is valid only from external terminal signal.
REMARKS The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop. It is reflected after a stop when the terminal is switched
during operation. When the X67 signal is off, a reset via communication is disabled.
CAUTION Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection Refer to page 85. Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85. Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182.
196
Communication operation and setting
4.19 Communication operation and setting
4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
(1) PU connector pin-outs
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Communication operation from PU connector Initial setting of computer link communication (PU connector) Pr. 117 to Pr. 124
201
Communication operation from RS-485 terminals
Initial setting of computer link communication (RS-485 terminals)
Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341
Modbus-RTU communication specifications
Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr. 539, Pr. 549
214
Restrictions on parameter write through communication
Communication EEPROM write selection Pr. 342 202
Pin Number Name Description
1) SG Earth (Ground) (connected to terminal 5)
2) Operation panel power supply 3) RDA Inverter receive+ 4) SDB Inverter send- 5) SDA Inverter send+ 6) RDB Inverter receive-
7) SG Earth (Ground) (connected to terminal 5)
8) Operation panel power supply
CAUTION Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication. Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
8) to 1)
Inverter (Receptacle side)
Front view
197
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) PU connector communication system configuration and wiring System configuration
Connection with RS-485 computer
* Make connections in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they change with the model.
REMARKS Computer-inverter connection cable
Refer to the following for the cable (RS-232C RS-485 converter) for connection of the computer having the RS-232C interface with the inverter. Commercially available product examples (as of April, 2004)
* The converter cable cannot connect two or more inverters (the computer and inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis). Since the product is packed with the RS-232C cable and RS-485 cable (10BASE-T + RJ-45 connector), the cable and connector need not be prepared separately. Contact a maker for details of the product.
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side. Commercially available product examples (as of April, 2004)
* Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the 10- BASE-T cable.
CAUTION When performing RS-485 communication with multiple inverters, use the RS-485 terminals. (Refer to page 199)
PU connector
Inverter
Station 0 Computer
PU connector
Inverter
FR-DU07
10BASE-T cable 1)
RJ-45 connector 2) RJ-45 connector 2)
PU connector
Inverter
Station 0Computer
10BASE-T cable 1)10BASE-T cable 1)
RS-232C-RS-485 converter
RS-232C cable
Operation panel connector FR-ADP (option)
RS-485 interface/ terminals
RJ-45 connector 2)
RJ-45 connector 2)
Maximum 15m
RS-232C connector
Computer Side Terminals
Send data
Send data
Receive data
Receive data
Description
Frame ground
Signal ground
Clear to send
Clear to send
Request to send
Request to send
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Signal name
FG
SG
CSB
CSA
RSB
RSA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
PU connector RS-485 block
SG
Inverter
*
0.2mm2 or more
Cable connection and signal direction
10BASE-T cable
Type Maker FA-T-RS40 * Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
Product Type Maker 1) 10BASE-T cable SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P * Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. 2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
198
Communication operation and setting
4.19.2 Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals
(1) RS-485 terminal layout
(2) Connection of RS-485 terminals and wires Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
Name Description RDA1
(RXD1+) Inverter receive+
RDB1 (RXD1-) Inverter receive-
RDA2 (RXD2+)
Inverter receive+ (for branch)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
Inverter receive- (for branch)
SDA1 (TXD1+) Inverter send+
SDB1 (TXD1-) Inverter send-
SDA2 (TXD2+)
Inverter send+ (for branch)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
Inverter send- (for branch)
P5S (VCC)
5V Permissible load current 100mA
SG (GND)
Earth (Ground) (connected to terminal SD)
Screw size M2 Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
Use a bar terminal as necessary.
Tightening torque 0.22Nm to 0.25Nm
Cable size 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2
Screwdriver Small flat-blade screwdriver (Tip thickness: 0.4mm /tip width: 2.5mm)
CAUTION Undertightening can cause signal loss or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or unit.
REMARKS Information on bar terminals Introduced products (as of Novenver, 2005): Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
Bar terminal crimping tool: CRIMPFOX ZA3 (Phoenix Contact Co., (Ltd.))
Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
When using the bar terminal (without insulation sleeve), use care so that the twisted wires do not come out.
RXDRDA1 (RXD1+)
RDB1 (RXD1-)
RDA2 (RXD2+)
RDB2 (RXD2-)
SDA1 (TXD1+)
SDB1 (TXD1-)
SDA2 (TXD2+)
SDB2 (TXD2-)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND)
P5S (VCC)
SG (GND) VCC
TXD
OPEN
100
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN". Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
5mm
Cable stripping size
Terminal Screw Size
Bar Terminal Model (with insulation sleeve)
Bar Terminal Model (without insulation sleeve) Wire Size (mm2)
M2 Al 0.5-6WH A 0.5-6 0.3 to 0.5
199
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) RS-485 terminal system configuration Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Combination of computer and multiple inverters (1:n connection)
Computer
Twisted pair cable Twisted pair cable
*Set the terminating resistor switch to the "100" position.
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
*
Computer
Converter
RS-232C cable
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
* RS-485 interface/ terminals
Maximum 15m
Computer
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
RS-485 interface terminals
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
*
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
*
Inverter
RS-485 terminals
*
Station 0 Station 1 Station n
*Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
*Set only the terminating resistor switch of the remotest inverter to the "100" position.
Computer
RS-232C converter
RS-232C cable
Maximum 15m
Converter
InverterInverterInverter
Station 0 Station 1 Station n
RS-485 terminals
*
RS-485 terminals
*
RS-485 terminals
*
200
Communication operation and setting
(4) RS-485 terminal wiring method Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
*1 Make connections in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they change with the model.
*2 For the inverter farthest from the computer, set the terminating resistor switch to ON (100 side).
(5) 2-wire type connection If the computer is 2-wire type, pass wires across receiving terminals and transmission terminals of the RS-485 terminals to enable 2-wire type connection with the inverter.
REMARKS For branching, connect the wires as shown below.
REMARKS A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
*1
Computer RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
SG
RSB
CSA
CSB
FG
SG
*2
- + - +
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
*1
Compiter
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
SG
RSB
CSA
CSB
FG Station 0
SG SG
- + - + - + - +
Station 1
SG SG
- + +- - + +-
Station n
SG
*2- +
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
R D
A 2
R D
B 2
S D
A 2
S D
B 2
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
S D
B 1
S D
A 1
R D
B 1
R D
A 1
R D
A 2
R D
B 2
S D
A 2
S D
B 2
- +
To computer send
To computer receive
To computer ground
TXD
RXD
VCC
RXD
VCC
TXD
SGSG SGSG
+ - +
-
-
+ - +++ - -
+ - + -
To receiving terminal of the next inverter
To receiving terminal of the next inverter
To next inverter To earth (ground) terminal
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
SGSG
InverterComputer
Pass a wire
Transmission enable
Reception enable
201
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.19.3 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)
[PU connector communication related parameter]
Used to perform required settings for communication between the inverter and personal computer. There are two different communications: communication using the PU connector of the inverter and communication using the RS-485 terminals. You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. from the PU connector or RS-485 terminals of the inverter using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication). To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of the communication specifications must be made to the inverter. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
117 PU communication station number 0 0 to 31
Specify the inverter station number. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.
118 PU communication speed 192 48, 96, 192, 384
Set the communication speed. The setting value 100 equals the communication speed. For example, the communication speed is 19200bps when the setting value is "192".
119 PU communication stop bit length 1
Stop bit length Data length 0 1bit
8bit 1 2bit 10 1bit
7bit 11 2bit
120 PU communication parity check 2
0 Without parity check 1 With odd parity check 2 With even parity check
121 Number of PU communication retries 1
0 to 10
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.
9999 If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
122 PU communication check time interval 9999
0 No PU connector communication
0.1 to 999.8s
Set the interval of communication check time. If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter will come to an alarm stop.
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
123 PU communication waiting time setting 9999
0 to 150ms Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response.
9999 Set with communication data.
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1
0 Without CR/LF 1 With CR 2 With CR/LF
202
Communication operation and setting
[RS-485 terminal communication related parameter]
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM. The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (EEPROM write).
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
331 RS-485 communication station number 0 0 to 31 (0 to 247)
*1
Set the inverter station number. (same specifications as Pr. 117)
332 RS-485 communication speed 96 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384
Used to select the communication speed. (same specifications as Pr. 118)
333 *2 RS-485 communication stop bit length 1 0, 1, 10, 11 Select stop bit length and data length. (same
specifications as Pr. 119)
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 2 0, 1, 2 Select the parity check specifications. (same
specifications as Pr. 120)
335 *3 RS-485 communication retry count 1 0 to 10, 9999
Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. (same specifications as Pr. 121)
336 *3 RS-485 communication check time interval 0s
0 RS-485 communication can be made, but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the interval of communication check time. (same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
337 *3 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 9999 0 to 150ms,
9999
Set the waiting time between data transmission to the inverter and response. (same specifications as Pr. 123)
341 *3 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 1 0, 1, 2 Select presence/absence of CR/LF.
(same specifications as Pr. 124)
549 Protocol selection 0 0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
1 Modbus-RTU protocol *4
*1 When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549, the setting range within parenthesis is applied. *2 For the Modbus-RTU protocol, the data length is fixed to 8 bits and the stop bit depends on the Pr. 334 setting. (Refer to page 214) *3 The Modbus-RTU protocol becomes invalid. *4 The Modbus-RTU protocol is valid for only communication from the RS-485 terminals.
CAUTION If communication is made without Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval being changed from "0" (initial value), monitor,
parameter read, etc. can be performed, but the inverter results in an alarm as soon as it is switched to the NET operation mode. If the operation mode at power on is the network operation mode, a communication alarm (E.SER) occurs after first communication. When performing operation or parameter write through communication, set "9999" or a greater value to Pr. 336. (The setting depends on the computer side program.) (Refer to page 207)
Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
Parameters written via the inverter's PU connector, RS-485 terminals or from the communication option can be written to the RAM. Set this parameter when frequent parameter changes are required.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting
Range Description
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 0
0 Parameter values written by communication are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1 Parameter values written by communication are written to the RAM.
The above parameters can be set any time when the communication option is connected. (Refer to page 180)
REMARKS When Pr. 342 is set to "1" (only RAM write), the new values of the parameters will be cleared at power supply-off of the inverter.
Therefore, the parameter values available when power is switched on again are the values stored in EEPROM previously.
203
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
(1) Communication specifications The communication specifications are given below.
(2) Communication procedure
*1 If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
*2 On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. from the PU connector or RS-485 terminals of the inverter using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication).
Item Description Related Parameters
Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol (computer link) Pr. 551 Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485)
Number of inverters connected 1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations Pr. 117 Pr. 331
Communication speed
PU connector Selected from among 4800/9600/19200 and 38400bps Pr. 118
RS-485 terminal Can be selected from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400bps Pr. 332
Control protocol Asynchronous system Communication method Half-duplex system
Communication specifications
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected) Pr. 119 Pr. 333
Start bit 1bit
Stop bit length 1 bit or 2 bits can be selected Pr. 119 Pr. 333
Parity check Check (even, odd) or no check can be selected Pr. 120 Pr. 334
Error check Sum code check
Terminator CR/LF (presence or absence can be selected) Pr. 124 Pr. 341
Waiting time setting Selectable between presence and absence Pr. 123 Pr. 337
Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure.
1)Request data is sent from the computer to the inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless requested.)
2)After waiting for the waiting time 3)The inverter sends return data to the computer in
response to the computer request. 4)After having waited for the time taken for inverter
processing 5)Answer from computer in response to reply data
3) is sent. (Even if 5) is not sent, subsequent communication is made properly.)
When data is read
When data is written
1) 5)4)
3)2) *1
*2
Computer (Data flow)
Inverter
Computer (Data flow)
Inverter Time
204
Communication operation and setting
(3) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code). Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
1)Communication request data from the computer to the inverter
3)Reply data from the inverter to the computer When data is written
When data is read
5)Send data from the computer to the inverter during data read
*1 Indicate a control code *2 Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal. *3 When Pr. 123, Pr. 337 (waiting time setting) "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number
of characters decreases by 1.) *4 CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) codes are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 or Pr. 341 (CR/LF selection).
Symbol Operation Run Command
Running Frequency
Parameter Write
Inverter Reset Monitor Parameter
Read
1) Communication request is sent to the inverter in accordance with the user program in the computer.
A A A A A B B
2) Inverter data processing time Present Present Present Absent Present Present
3) Reply data from the inverter (Data 1) is checked for error)
No error *1 (Request accepted)
C C C C *2 E E E
With error. (Request rejected) D D D D *2 D D
4) Computer processing delay time Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
5)
Answer from computer in response to reply data 3) (Data 3) is checked for error)
No error *1 (No inverter processing)
Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent (C)
Absent (C)
With error (Inverter re- outputs 3))
Absent Absent Absent Absent F F
*1 In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 205)
*2 The inverter response to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 209)
Format Number of Characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A (Data write)
ENQ *1
Inverter station number *2 Instruction code Waiting
time *3 Data Sum check *4
A' (Data write)
ENQ *1
Inverter station number *2 Instruction code Waiting
time *3 Data Sum check *4
B (Data read)
ENQ *1
Inverter station number *2 Instruction code Waiting
time *3 Sum check *4
Format Number of Characters 1 2 3 4 5
C (No data error detected)
ACK *1
Inverter station number *2
*4
D (Data error detected)
NAK *1
Inverter station number *2
Error Code
*4
Format Number of Characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
E (No data error detected)
STX *1
Inverter station number *2 Read data ETX
*1 Sum check *4
E' (No data error detected)
STX *1
Inverter station number *2 Read data ETX
*1 Sum check *4
D (Data error detected)
NAK *1
Inverter station number *2
Error Code
*4
Format Number of Characters 1 2 3 4
C (No data error detected)
ACK *1
Inverter station number *2
*4
F (Data error detected)
NAK *1
Inverter station number *2
*4
205
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Data definitions 1) Control codes
2) Inverter station number Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 310)
4) Data Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 310)
5) Waiting time Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
6) Sum check code The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data
Signal Name ASCII Code Description STX H02 Start Of Text (start of data) ETX H03 End Of Text (end of data) ENQ H05 Enquiry (communication request) ACK H06 Acknowledge (no data error detected) LF H0A Line Feed CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (data error detected)
REMARKS When Pr. 123, Pr. 337 (waiting time setting) "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data
format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) The data check time changes depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 206)
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
Inverter data processing time = +Waiting time
(setting 10ms) data check time (About 10 to 30ms, which depends on the instruction code)
(Example 1)
Computer Inverter ENQ
*W a
it in
g
ti m
e
1
Instruction codeStation
number
0 1
Data
E 1 0 7 A D F 4
H05 H30 H31 H31H45 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
Binary code
HHHHHHHH
H
H 30 31 45 31 31 30 37 41 44
= 1F4
Sum
(Example 2)
STX Data read
Station number
0 1 1 7 0 3 0
H02 H30 H31 H37H31 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
Sum
ETX
7
* When the Pr. 123 Waiting time setting "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
Inverter
ASCII Code
ASCII Code
Binary code
+ + + + + + + +
HHHHHH
H 30 31 31 37 37 30
= 130
+ + + + +
Sum check code
Sum check code
Computer
206
Communication operation and setting
7) Error Code If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code.
(5) Response time
[Formula for data sending time]
Communication specifications Data check time
Error Code Error Item Error Description Inverter Operation
H0 Computer NAK error The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request data from the computer is greater than allowed number of retries.
Brought to an alarm stop if error occurs continuously more than the allowable number of retries. (E.PUE/E.SER)
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
H2 Sum check error The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data received by the inverter.
H3 Protocol error The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. Alternatively, data receive is not completed within the predetermined time. CR or LF is not as set in the parameter.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
H5 Overrun error New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes receiving the preceding data.
H6
H7 Character error The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).
Does not accept received data but is not brought to alarm stop.
H8 H9
HA Mode error Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation mode, when operation command source is not selected or during inverter operation. Does not accept
received data but is not brought to alarm stop.HB Instruction code error The specified command does not exist.
HC Data range error Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency setting, etc.
HD HE HF
1
Number of data characters
(Refer to page 204)
Communication specifications (total number of bits) = Data send time (s) (See below.)
Communication speed (bps)
Name Number of Bits Item Check Time
Stop bit length 1 bit 2 bits
Various monitors, run command, frequency setting (RAM) < 12ms
Data length 7 bits 8 bits
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM) < 30ms
Parity check Yes 1 bit Parameter clear/all clear < 5s No 0 Reset command No answer
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary. Minimum number of total bits....... 9 bits Maximum number of total bits...... 12 bits
10ms or more necessary
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Waiting time (setting 10ms)
Data check time (depends on the instruction code (see the following table))Time
207
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(6) Retry count setting (Pr. 121, Pr. 335) Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. (Refer to page 206 for data receive error
for retry) When data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, an inverter alarm
(E.PUE) is provided and the output is shut off. When "9999" is set, an inverter alarm is not provided even if data receive error occurs but a minor fault output signal
(LF) is output. For the terminal used for the LF signal output, assign the function by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
(7) Signal loss detection (Pr. 122, Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval) If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and computer as a result of a signal loss
detection, a communication error (PU connector communication: E.PUE, RS-485 terminal communication: E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made. When the setting is "0", communication from the PU connector cannot be performed. For communication via the RS-
485 terminals, monitor, parameter read, etc. can be peformed, but a communication error (E.SER) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to network operation mode.
A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s" to "999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is necessary to send data (control code refer to page 205) from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The send data has nothing to do with the station number)
Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the operation source (PU operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or network operation mode for RS-485 terminal communication).
Computer
Operation mode
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"
Reception error Reception error
Alarm (E.PUE) Inverter
Inverter
Computer
E N
Q
A C
K
N A
K
N A
K
Computer
Operation mode
LF OFF OFF
Reception error Reception error
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
E N
Q
A C
K
N A
K
N A
K
ON
Wrong
Wrong E N
Q
A C
K
ormalE N
Q
Wrong
E N
Q Wrong
Computer
Operation Mode
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
External PU
Check start Alarm(E.PUE)
Time
Inverter Inverter
Computer
Pr. 122
E N
Q
Communication check counter
208
Communication operation and setting
(8) Instructions for the program 1) When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that error. Hence, in the user program,
always insert a retry program for data error. 2) All data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
3) Program example To change the operation mode to computer link operation
CAUTION Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions. Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal loss etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE, E.SER). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off. If communication is broken due to signal loss, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
OPEN"COM1:9600,E,8,2,HD"AS #1
COMST1,1,1:COMST1,2,1
ON COM(1)GOSUB*REC
COM(1)ON
D$="01FB10002"
S=0
FOR I=1 TO LEN(D$)
A$=MID$(D$,I,1)
A=ASC(A$)
S=S+A
NEXTI
D$=CHR$(&H5)+D$+RIGHT$(HEX$(S),2)
PRINT#1,D$
GOTO 50
*REC
IF LOC(1)=0 THEN RETURN
PRINT"RECEIVE DATA"
PRINT INPUT$(LOC(1),#1)
RETURN
Initial setting of I/O file
Send data setting
Sum code calculation
: Addition of control code and sum code
Data transmission
Interrupt data receive
: Interrupt occurrence at data receive
General flow
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
Line number 10
40
50
140
Interrupt
1000
1040
: Communication file open
: Circuit control signal (RS, ER) ON/OFF setting
: Interrupt definition at data receive
: Interrupt enable
Initial setting of I/O file
Data setting
Sum code
calculation
Data send
Send data processing
Data import
Screen display
Receive data processing
to
to to
209
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(9) Setting items and set data After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data then start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
No. Item Read/ Write
Instruction Code Data Description
Number of Data Digits
(format)
1 Operation mode Read H7B H0000: Network operation
H0001: External operation H0002: PU operation
(RS-485 communication operation via PU connector)
4 digits (B.E/D)
Write HFB 4 digits (A,C/D)
2
M on
ito r
Output frequency/ speed
Read H6F H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01Hz increments Speed in 1r/min increments (when Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110)
4 digits (B.E/D)
Output current Read H70 H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A increments
(55K or less) / 0.1A increments (75K or more) 4 digits (B.E/D)
Output voltage Read H71 H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V increments 4 digits
(B.E/D) Special monitor Read H72 H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3 4 digits
(B.E/D)
Special monitor selection No.
Read H73 H01 to H3C: Monitor selection data Refer to the special monitor No. table (page 211)
2digits (B.E'/D)
Write HF3 2digits (A',C/D)
Alarm definition Read H74 to
H77
H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent alarm definitions
Refer to the alarm data table (page 212)
4 digits (B.E/D)
3
Run command (extended) Write HF9 You can set the control input commands such as the forward
rotation signal (STF) and reverse rotation signal (STR). (Refer to page 212 for details)
4 digits (A,C/D)
Run command Write HFA 2digits (A',C/D)
4
Inverter status monitor (extended)
Read H79 You can monitor the status of the output signals such as forward rotation, reverse rotation and inverter running (RUN). (Refer to page 213 for details)
4 digits (B.E/D)
Inverter status monitor Read H7A 2digits
(B.E'/D)
5
Set frequency (RAM)
Read H6D Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01Hz increments Speed in 1r/min increments (When Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110)
4 digits (B.E/D)Set frequency
(EEPROM) H6E
Set frequency (RAM)
Write
HED Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM. H0000 to H2EE0 (0 to 120Hz (22K or less), 0 to 60Hz (30K or more) : frequency in 0.01Hz increments H0000 to H270E (0 to 9998) : speed in r/min increments (when Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110) To change the running frequency consecutively, write data to the
inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED)
4 digits (A,C/D)Set frequency
(RAM, EEPROM) HEE
6 Inverter reset Write HFD
H9696: Resets the inverter. As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the computer,
the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
4 digits (A,C/D)
H9966: Resets the inverter. When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer and
then the inverter is reset.
4 digits (A,D)
7 Alarm definition all clear Write HF4 H9696: Alarm history batch clear 4 digits
(A,C/D) Refer to page 204 for data formats (A, A', B, B', C, D)
b15 b8 b7 b0
Latest alarmSecond alarm in past
Third alarm in pastFourth alarm in past
Fifth alarm in pastSixth alarm in past
Seventh alarm in pastEighth alarm in past
H74
H75
H76
H77
210
Communication operation and setting
Example) When reading the C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) settings from the inverter of station 0
To read/write C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from 1) again.
8 All parameter clear Write HFC
All parameters return to the initial values. Any of four different all clear operations are performed according to the data.
When all parameter clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communication-related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming operation, set the parameters again. *1 Refer to page 201, 202. *2 Refer to the list of calibration parameters on the next page for calibration
parameters. *3 Pr. 75 is not cleared
4 digits (A,C/D)
9 Parameters
Read H00 to H63
Refer to the instruction code (page 310) and write and/or read the values as required. When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter extended setting must be set.
4 digits (B.E/D)
10 Write H80 to HE3
4 digits (A,C/D)
11 Link parameter extended setting
Read H7F Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09 setting. For details of the setting, refer to the instruction code (page 310).
2digits (B.E'/D)
Write HFF 2digits (A',C/D)
12
Second parameter changing (instruction code HFF=1, 9)
Read H6C
When setting the calibration parameters *1 H00:Frequency *2 H01: Parameter-set analog value H02: Analog value input from terminal *1 Refer to the list of calibration parameters on the next page for calibration
parameters. *2 The gain frequency can also be written using Pr. 125 (instruction code
H99) or Pr. 126 (instruction code H9A).
2digits (B.E'/D)
Write HEC 2digits (A',C/D)
REMARKS Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999". For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all
clear is performed.
Computer Send Data Inverter Send Data Description 1) ENQ 00 FF 0 01 82 ACK 00 Set "H01" in the extended link parameter. 2) ENQ 00 EC 0 01 7E ACK 00 Set "H01" in second parameter changing. 3) ENQ 00 5E 0 0F STX 00 0000 ETX 25 C3 (Pr. 902) is read. 0% is read. 4) ENQ 00 60 0 FB STX 00 0000 ETX 25 C6 (Pr. 904) is read. 0% is read.
No. Item Read/ Write
Instruction Code Data Description
Number of Data Digits
(format)
Refer to page 204 for data formats (A, A', B, B', C, D)
Pr. Communi- cation Pr.
*1
Calibration Pr. *2
Other Pr. *3
HEC HF3 HFFData
H9696 H9966 H5A5A H55AA
211
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
List of calibration parameters
[Special monitor selection No.] Refer to page 137 for details of the monitor description.
*1 The setting depends on capacities. (55K or less / 75K or more) *2 Input terminal monitor details
*3 Output terminal monitor details
*4 Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
*5 Details of option input terminal monitor 2 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
*6 Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY/A7AR)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
b15 b0 CS RES STOP MRS JOG RH RM RL RT AU STR STF
b15 b0 ABC2 ABC1 FU OL IPF SU RUN
b15 b0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
b15 b0 DY
b15 b0 RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Parameter Name Instruction code
Read Write Extended C2(902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1 C3(902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1 125(903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frquency 5F DF 1 C4(903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1 C5(904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1 C6(904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 126(905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 C7(905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
Data Description Increments H01 Output frequency 0.01Hz
H02 Output current 0.01A/ 0.1A *1
H03 Output voltage 0.1V H05 Frequency setting 0.01Hz H06 Running speed 1r/min H07 Motor torque 0.1% H08 Converter output voltage 0.1V H09 Regenerative brake duty 0.1%
H0A Electronic thermal relay function load factor 0.1%
H0B Output current peak value
0.01A/ 0.1A *1
H0C Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V
H0D Input power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *1
H0E Output power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *1
H0F Input terminal status *2 H10 Output terminal status *3 H11 Load meter 0.1%
H12 Motor excitation current 0.01A/ 0.1A *1
H13 Position pulse
H14 Cumulative energization time 1h
H16 Orientation status H17 Actual operation time 1h H18 Motor load factor 0.1% H19 Cumulative power 1kWh
Data Description Increments
H22 Motor output 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *1
H32 Power saving effect Variable H33 Cumulative saving power Variable H34 PID set point 0.1% H35 PID measured value 0.1% H36 PID deviation value 0.1%
H3A Option input terminal status1 *4
H3B Option input terminal status2 *5
H3C Option output terminal status *6
Data Description Increments
212
Communication operation and setting
[Alarm data] Refer to page 265 for details of alarm description.
[Run command]
*1 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 184, Pr. 187 (input terminal function selection) (page 118).
*2 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. Since jog operation/selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/start self- holding/reset cannot be controlled by the network, bit 8 to bit 11 are invalid in the initial status. When using bit 8 to bit 11, change the signals with Pr. 185, Pr. 186, Pr. 188, Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) (page 125). (Reset can be executed with the instruction code HFD.)
Item Instruction Code
Bit Length Description Example
Run command HFA 8bit
b0: AU (current input selection) *1 b1: Forward rotation command b2: Reverse rotation command b3: RL (low speed operation
command) *1 b4: RM (middle speed operation
command) *1 b5: RH (high speed operation
command) *1 b6: RT (second function selection) *1 b7: MRS (output stop) *1
Run command (extended)
HF9 16bit
b0:AU (current input selection) *1 b1:Forward rotation command b2:Reverse rotation command b3:RL (low speed operation command) *1 b4:RM (middle speed operation
command) *1
b5: RH (high speed operation command) *1
b6:RT (second function selection) *1 b7:MRS (output stop) *1 b8:JOG (Jog operation) *2 b9:CS (selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure) *2 b10: STOP (start self-holding) *2 b11:RES (reset) *2 b12: b13: b14: b15:
Alarm description display example (instruction code H74) Data Description H00 No alarm H10 E.OC1 H11 E.OC2 H12 E.OC3 H20 E.OV1 H21 E.OV2 H22 E.OV3 H30 E.THT H31 E.THM H40 E.FIN H50 E.IPF H51 E.UVT H52 E.ILF H60 E.OLT H70 E.BE H80 E.GF H81 E.LF H90 E.OHT
H91 E.PTC HA0 E.OPT HA3 E.OP3 HB0 E.PE HB1 E.PUE HB2 E.RET HB3 E.PE2 HC0 E.CPU HC1 E.CTE HC2 E.P24 HC4 E.CDO HC5 E.IOH HC6 E.SER HC7 E.AIE HC8 E.USB HD0 E.OS HD2 E.ECT HD5 E.MB1
Data Description HD6 E.MB2 HD7 E.MB3 HD8 E.MB4 HD9 E.MB5 HDA E.MB6 HDB E.MB7 HDC E.EP HF1 E.1 HF2 E.2 HF3 E.3 HF6 E.6 HF7 E.7 HFD E.13
Data Description
For read data H30A0
(Previous alarm ...... THT)
(Latest alarm ...... OPT)
0 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001 1
b15 b8 b7 b0
Latest alarm
(HA0)
Previous alarm
(H30)
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b7 b0
[Example 1] H02 Forward rotation
[Example 2] H00 Stop
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b0
[Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0
[Example 2] H0800 low speed operation (When Pr. 189 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15
213
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
[Inverter status monitor]
* The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
Item Instruction Code
Bit Length Description Example
Inverter status
monitor H7A 8bit
b0:RUN (inverter running)* b1:Forward rotation b2:Reverse rotation b3:SU (up to frequency) * b4:OL (overload) * b5:IPF (instantaneous power failure) * b6:FU (frequency detection)* b7:ABC1 (alarm) *
Inverter status
monitor (extended)
H79 16bit
b0:RUN (inverter running) * b1:Forward rotation b2:Reverse rotation b3:SU (up to frequency) * b4:OL (overload) * b5:IPF (instantaneous power failure) * b6:FU (frequency detection) * b7:ABC1 (alarm) * b8:ABC2 ()* b9: b10: b11: b12: b13: b14: b15: Alarm occurrence
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b7 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b7 b0
[Example 2] H80
[Example 1] H02
Stop at alarm occurrence
During forward rotation
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b15
[Example 1] H0002 During forward rotation
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b15
[Example 2] H8080 Stop at alarm occurrence
214
Communication operation and setting
4.19.6 Modbus-RTU communication specifications (Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr.539, Pr. 549)
(1) Communication specifications The communication specifications are given below.
Using the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, communication operation or parameter setting can be performed from the RS-485 terminals of the inverter.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
331 RS-485 communication station number 0
0 Broadcast communication is selected.
1 to 247 Specify the inverter station number. Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected to one personal computer.
332 RS-485 communication speed 96 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192, 384
Set the communication speed. The setting value 100 equals the communication speed. For example, the communication speed is 9600bps when the setting value is "96".
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 2
0 Without parity check Stop bit length 2bits
1 With odd parity check Stop bit length 1bit
2 With even parity check Stop bit length 1bit
343 Communication error count 0 Display the number of communication errors during Modbus-RTU communication. Reading only
539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval 9999
0 Modbus-RTU communication can be made, but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the interval of communication check time. (same specifications as Pr. 122)
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
549 Protocol selection 0 0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link)
protocol
1 Modbus-RTU protocol
CAUTION When Modbus-RTU communication is performed from the master with address 0 (station 0) set, broadcast communication is selected and the inverter does not send a response message to the master. When response from the inverter is necessary, set a value other than "0" in Pr. 331 (initial value 0). Some functions are invalid for broadcast communication. (Refer to page 216)
REMARKS When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 549 Protocol selection to "1". When the communication option is fitted with Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection set to "9999" (initial value), the
command source (e.g. run command) from the RS-485 terminals is invalid. (Refer to page 191)
Item Description Related Parameters
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU protocol Pr. 549 Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) Number of inverters connected 1: N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr. 331 Communication speed Can be selected from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400bps Pr. 332 Control protocol Asynchronous system Communication method Half-duplex system
Communication specifications
Character system Binary(fixed to 8 bits) Start bit 1bit
Stop bit length Select from the following three types No parity, stop bit length 2 bits Odd parity, stop bit length 1 bit Even parity, stop bit length 1 bit
Pr. 334 Parity check
Error check CRC code check Terminator Not used
Waiting time setting Not used
215
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Outline The Modbus protocol is the communication protocol developed by Modicon for PLC. The Modbus protocol performs serial communication between the master and slave using the dedicated message frame. The dedicated message frame has the functions that can perform data read and write. Using the functions, you can read and write the parameter values from the inverter, write the input command of the inverter, and check the operating status. In this product, the inverter data are classified in the holding register area (register addresses 40001 to 49999). By accessing the assigned holding register address, the master can communicate with the inverter which is a slave.
(3) Message format
Data check time
1)Query The master sends a message to the slave (= inverter) at the specified address.
2)Normal Response After receiving the query from the master, the slave executes the requested function and returns the corresponding normal response to the master.
3)Error Response If an invalid function code, address or data is received, the slave returns it to the master. When a response description is returned, the error code indicating that the request from the master cannot be executed is added. No response is returned for the hardware-detected error, frame error and CRC check error.
4)Broadcast By specifying address 0, the master can send a message to all slaves. All slaves that received the message from the master execute the requested function. In this communication, the slaves do not return a response to the master.
REMARKS There are two different serial transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. This product supports only the RTU mode in which 1-byte (8-bit) data is transmitted as-is. Only the communication protocol is defined by the Modbus protocol, and the physical layer is not stipulated.
Item Check Time Various monitors, operation command, frequency setting (RAM) < 12ms
Parameter read/write, frequency setting (EEPROM) < 30ms
Parameter clear/all clear < 5s Reset command No answer
REMARKS The slave executes the function independently of the inverter station number setting (Pr. 331) during broadcast communication.
Query communication
Broadcast communication
Query Message
Query Message
Response Message
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
PLC (Master)
PLC (Master)
No Response
Inverter response time (Refer to the following table for the data check time)
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
216
Communication operation and setting
(4) Message frame (protocol) Communication method Basically, the master sends a query message (question) and the slave returns a response message (response). When communication is normal, Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are, and when communication is abnormal (function code or data code is illegal), bit 7 (= 80h) of Function Code is turned on and the error code is set to Data Bytes.
The message frame consists of the four message fields as shown above. By adding the no-data time (T1: Start, End) of 3.5 characters to the beginning and end of the message data, the slave recognizes it as one message. Protocol details The four message fields will be explained below.
Query message from Master Device Address Device Address Function Code Function Code
Eight-Bit Data Bytes
Eight-Bit Data Bytes
Error Check Error Check Response message from slave
Start 1) ADDRESS 2) FUNCTION 3) DATA 4) CRC CHECK End
T1 8bit 8bit n 8bit L 8bit
H 8bit T1
Message Field Description
1) ADDRESS field
The address is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 0 to 247 can be set. Set 0 to send a broadcast message (all-address instruction) or any of 1 to 247 to send a message to each slave. When the slave responds, it returns the address set from the master. The value set to Pr. 331 RS-485 communication station number is the slave address.
2) FUNCTION field
The function code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 1 to 255 can be set. The master sets the function that it wants to request from the slave, and the slave performs the requested operation. The following table gives the supported function codes. An error response is returned if the set function code is other than those in the following table. When the slave returns a normal response, it returns the function code set by the master. When the slave returns an error response, it returns H80 + function code.
3) DATA field The format changes depending on the function code (refer to page 217). Data includes the byte count, number of bytes, description of access to the holding register, etc.
4) CRC CHECK field
The received message frame is checked for error. CRC check is performed, and 2 byte long data is added to the end of the message. When CRC is added to the message, the low-order byte is added first and is followed by the high-order byte. The CRC value is calculated by the sending side that adds CRC to the message. The receiving side recalculates CRC during message receiving, and compares the result of that calculation and the actual value received in the CRC CHECK field. If these two values do not match, the result is defined as error.
Code Function Name Outline Broadcast Communication
H03 Read Holding Register Reads the holding register data. Disallowed H06 Preset Single Register Writes data to the holding register. Allowed
H08 Diagnostics Makes a function diagnosis. (communication check only) Disallowed
H10 Preset Multiple Registers Writes data to multiple consecutive holding registers. Allowed
H46 Read Holding Register Access Log
Reads the number of registers that succeeded in communication last time.
Disallowed
Table 1: Function code list
217
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(5) Message format types The message formats corresponding to the function codes in Table 1 on page 216 will be explained.
Read holding register data (H03 or 03) Can read the description of 1) system environment variables, 2) real-time monitor, 3) alarm history, and 4) inverter parameters assigned to the holding register area (refer to the register list (page 222)).
Query Message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Description of normal response
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Starting Address 4) No. of Points CRC Check
(8bit) H03 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
1) Slave Address 2) Function 5) Byte Count 6) Data CRC Check
(8bit) H03 (8bit) (8bit) H
(8bit) L
(8bit) ...
(n 16bit) L
(8bit) H
(8bit)
Message Setting Description
1)Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).
2)Function Set H03.
3)Starting Address
Set the address at which holding register data read will be started. Starting address = starting register address (decimal) 40001 For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding register 40002.
4)No. of Points Set the number of holding registers from which data will be read. The number of registers from which data can be read is a maximum of 125.
Message Setting Description
5)Byte Count The setting range is H02 to H14 (2 to 20). Twice greater than the No. of Points specified at 4) is set.
6)Data The number of data specified at 4) is set. Data are read in order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and set in order of starting address data, starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data, ...
Example) To read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the slave address 17 (H11)
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Read value Register 41004 (Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00Hz) Register 41005 (Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00Hz) Register 41006 (Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00Hz)
Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check H11 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
HEB (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
H77 (8bit)
H2B (8bit)
Slave Address Function Byte Count Data CRC Check H11 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
H06 (8bit)
H17 (8bit)
H70 (8bit)
H0B (8bit)
HB8 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
HE8 (8bit)
H2C (8bit)
HE6 (8bit)
218
Communication operation and setting
Write multiple holding register data (H06 or 06) You can write the description of 1) system environment variables and 4) inverter parameters assigned to the holding register area (refer to the register list (page 222)).
Query message
Normal response (Response message)
Query message setting
Description of normal response 1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message. No response is made for broadcast communication.
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Register Address 4) Preset Data CRC Check
(8bit) H06 (8bit) H (8bit) L (8bit) H (8bit) L (8bit) L (8bit) H (8bit)
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Register Address 4) Preset Data CRC Check
(8bit) H06 (8bit) H (8bit) L (8bit) H (8bit) L (8bit) L (8bit) H (8bit)
Message Setting Description
1)Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication
2)Function Set H06.
3)RegisterAddress
Set the address of the holding register to which data will be written. Register address = holding register address (decimal) 40001 For example, setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding register address 40002.
4)Prese Data Set the data that will be written to the holding register. The written data is fixed to 2 bytes.
Example) To write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency RAM) at slave address 5 (H05).
CAUTION For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.
Query message
Normal Response (Response message) Same data as the query message
Slave Address Function Register Address Preset Data CRC Check H05 (8bit)
H06 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H0D (8bit)
H17 (8bit)
H70 (8bit)
H17 (8bit)
H99 (8bit)
219
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Function diagnosis (H08 or 08) A communication check can be made since the query message sent is returned unchanged as a response message (function of subfunction code H00). Subfunction code H00 (Return Query Data) Query Message
Normal Response (Response message)
Query message setting
Description of normal response 1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
Write multiple holding register data (H10 or 16) You can write data to multiple holding registers.
Query message
Normal Response (Response message)
Query message setting
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Subfunction 4) Date CRC Check
(8bit) H08 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Subfunction 4) Date CRC Check
(8bit) H08 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
Message Setting Description
1)Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).
2)Function Set H08. 3)Subfunction Set H0000.
4)Data Any data can be set if it is 2 bytes long. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.
CAUTION For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.
1) Slave Address
2) Function
3) Starting Address
4) No. of Registers
5) ByteCount 6) Data CRC Check
(8bit) H10 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit) (8bit) H
(8bit) L
(8bit) ...
(n 2 8bit) L
(8bit) H
(8bit)
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Starting Address 4) No. of Registers CRC Check
(8bit) H10 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
Message Setting Description
1)Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication.
2)Function Set H10.
3)Starting Address
Set the address where holding register data write will be started. Starting address = starting register address (decimal) 40001 For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding register 40002.
4)No. of Points Set the number of holding registers where data will be written. The number of registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125.
5)Byte Count The setting range is H02 to HFA (0 to 250). Set a value twice greater than the value specified at 4).
6)Data Set the data specified by the number specified at 4). The written data are set in order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and arranged in order of the starting address data, starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data ...
220
Communication operation and setting
Description of normal response 1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
Read holding register access log (H46 or 70) A response can be made to a query made by the function code H03, H06 or H0F. The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access during previous communication and the number of successful registers are returned. In response to the query for other than the above function code, 0 is returned for the address and number of registers.
Query Message
Normal Response (Response message)
Query message setting
Description of normal response
Example) To write 0.5s (H05) to 41007 (Pr. 7) at the slave address 25 (H19) and 1s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr. 8).
1) Slave Address 2) Function CRC Check
(8bit) H46 (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Starting Address 4) No. of Points CRC Check
(8bit) H46 (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
L (8bit)
L (8bit)
H (8bit)
Message Setting Description
1)Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid)
2)Function Set H46.
Message Setting Description
3)Starting Address
The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is returned. Starting address = starting register address (decimal) 40001 For example, when the starting address 0001 is returned, the address of the holding register that succeeded in access is 40002.
4)No. of Points The number of holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.
Example) To read the successful register starting address and successful count from the slave address 25 (H19).
Query Message
Response message (Response message)
Slave Address Function Starting
Address No. of Points Byte Count Data CRC Check
H19 (8bit)
H10 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
HEE (8bit)
H00 8bit)
H02 (8bit)
H04 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H05 (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H0A (8bit)
H86 (8bit)
H3D (8bit)
Slave Address Function Starting
Address No. of Points CRC Check
H19 (8bit)
H10 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
HEE (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H02 (8bit)
H22 (8bit)
H61 (8bit)
Query Message
Normal Response (Response message)
Success of two registers at starting address 41007 (Pr. 7) is returned.
Slave Address Function CRC Check H19 (8bit)
H46 (8bit)
H8B (8bit)
HD2 (8bit)
Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check H19 (8bit)
H10 (8bit)
H03 (8bit)
HEE (8bit)
H00 (8bit)
H02 (8bit)
H22 (8bit)
H61 (8bit)
221
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Error response An error response is returned if the query message received from the master has an illegal function, address or data. No response is returned for a parity, CRC, overrun, framing or busy error.
Error response (Response message)
Error code list
*1 An error will not occur in the following cases. 1) Function code H03 (Read Holding Register Data )
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is one or more holding registers from which data can be read 2) Function code H10 (Write Multiple Holding Register Data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is 1 or more holding registers to which data can be written Namely, when the function code H03 or H10 is used to access multiple holding registers, an error will not occur if a non-existing holding register or read disabled or write disabled holding register is accessed.
Message data mistake detection To detect the mistakes of message data from the master, they are checked for the following errors. If an error is detected, an alarm stop will not occur.
Error check item
CAUTION No response message is sent in the case of broadcast communication also.
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Exception Code CRC Check
(8bit) H80 + Function (8bit) (8bit) L
(8bit) H
(8bit)
Message Setting Description 1)Slave address Set the address received from the master. 2)Function The master-requested function code + H80 is set. 3)Exception code The code in the following table is set.
Code Error Item Error Definition
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION (Function code illegal)
The set function code in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the slave.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS *1 (Address illegal)
The set register address in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the inverter. (No parameter, parameter read disabled, parameter write disabled)
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE (Data illegal)
The set data in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the inverter. (Out of parameter write range, mode specified, other error)
REMARKS An error will occur if all accessed holding registers do not exist. Data read from a non-existing holding register is 0, and data written there is invalid.
Error Item Error Definition Inverter Side Operation
Parity error The data received by the inverter differs from the specified parity (Pr. 334 setting).
1)Pr. 343 is increased by 1 at error occurrence.
2)The terminal LF is output at error occurrence.
Framing error The data received by the inverter differs from the specified stop bit length (Pr. 333).
Overrun error The following data was sent from the master before the inverter completes data receiving.
Message frame error
The message frame data length is checked, and the received data length of less than 4 bytes is regarded as an error.
CRC check error A mismatch found by CRC check between the message frame data and calculation result is regarded as an error.
222
Communication operation and setting
(6) Modbus registers System environment variable
*1 The communication parameter values are not cleared. *2 For write, set the data as a control input instruction. For read, data is read as an inverter operating status. *3 For write, set data as the operation mode setting. For read, data is read as the operation mode status.
Register Definition Read/Write Remarks 40002 Inverter reset Write Any value can be written 40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A as a written value. 40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA as a written value. 40006 Parameter clear *1 Write Set H5A96 as a written value. 40007 All parameter clear *1 Write Set HAA99 as a written value. 40009 Inverter status/control input instruction *2 Read/write See below. 40010 Operation mode/inverter setting *3 Read/write See below. 40014 Running frequency (RAM value) Read/write According to the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings, the
frequency and selectable speed are in 1r/min increments.40015 Running frequency (EEPROM value) Write
*1 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) (page 118). Each assigned signal is valid or invalid depending on NET. (Refer to page 191)
*2 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) (page 125).
Bit Definition Control input instruction Inverter status
0 Stop command RUN (inverter running) *2 1 Forward rotation command Forward rotation 2 Reverse rotation command Reverse rotation 3 RH (high speed operation command) *1 SU (up to frequency) *2 4 RM (middle speed operation command) *1 OL (overload) *2 5 RL (low speed operation command) *1 IPF (instantaneous power failure) *2 6 JOG (Jog operation) *1 FU (frequency detection) *2 7 RT (second function selection) *1 ABC1 (alarm) *2 8 AU (current input selection) *1 ABC2 () *2
9 CS
(selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure) *1
0
10 MRS (output stop) *1 0 11 STOP (start self-holding) *1 0 12 RES (reset) *1 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 Alarm occurrence
The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes according to the computer link specifications.
Mode Read Value
Written Value
EXT H0000 H0010 PU H0001 EXT JOG H0002
NET H0004 H0014 PU+ EXT H0005
223
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Real-time monitor Refer to page 137 for details of the monitor description.
*1 Input terminal monitor details
*2 Output terminal monitor details
*3 Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
*4 Details of option input terminal monitor 2 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
*5 Details of option input terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY/A7AR)-all terminals are off when an option is not fitted
b15 b0 CS RES STOP MRS JOG RH RM RL RT AU STR STF
b15 b0 ABC2 ABC1 FU OL IPF SU RUN
b15 b0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
b15 b0 DY
b15 b0 RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
*6 The setting depends on capacities. (55K or less / 75K or more)
Register Definition Increments 40201 Output frequency 0.01Hz
40202 Output current 0.01A/ 0.1A *6
40203 Output voltage 0.1V 40205 Frequency setting 0.01Hz 40206 Running speed 1r/min 40207 Motor torque 0.1%
40208 Converter output voltage 0.1V
40209 Regenerative brake duty 0.1%
40210 Electronic thermal relay function load factor
0.1%
40211 Output current peak value
0.01A/ 0.1A *6
40212 Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V
40213 Input power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *6
40214 Output power 0.01kW/ 0.1kW *6
40215 Input terminal status *1
40216 Output terminal status *2
40217 Load meter 0.1%
40218 Motor excitation current
0.01A/ 0.1A *6
40219 Position pulse
40220 Cumulative energization time 1h
40222 Orientation status
40223 Actual operation time 1h
40224 Motor load factor 0.1% 40225 Cumulative power 1kWh
Register Definition Increments
40228 Motor output 0.01/ 0.1kW *6
40250 Power saving effect Variable
40251 Cumulative saving power Variable
40252 PID set point 0.1%
40253 PID measured value 0.1%
40254 PID deviation value 0.1%
40258 Option input terminal status1 *3
40259 Option input terminal status2 *4
40260 Option output terminal status *5
Register Definition Increments
224
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
Parameters Register Parameter Name Read/Write Remarks
0 to 999 41000 to 41999
Refer to the parameter list (page 55) for the parameter names. Read/write The parameter number + 41000 is the
register number.
C2(902) 41902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias (frequency) Read/write
C3(902) 42092 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(analog value) Read/write The analog value (%) set to C3 (902) is read.
43902 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias (terminal analog value) Read The analog value (%) of the voltage (current)
applied to the terminal 2 is read.
125(903) 41903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain (frequency) Read/write
C4(903) 42093 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(analog value) Read/write The analog value (%) set to C4 (903) is read.
43903 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain (terminal analog value) Read The analog value (%) of the voltage
(current) applied to the terminal 2 is read.
C5(904) 41904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias (frequency) Read/write
C6(904) 42094 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
(analog value) Read/write The analog value (%) set to C6 (904) is read.
43904 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias (terminal analog value) Read The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
applied to the terminal 4 is read.
126(905) 41905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain (frequency) Read/write
C7(905) 42095 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(analog value) Read/write The analog value (%) set to C7 (905) is read.
43905 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain (terminal analog value) Read The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
applied to the terminal 4 is read.
225
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
Alarm history
Alarm code list
Register Definition Read/Write Remarks 40501 Alarm history 1 Read/write
Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "H00 ". The error code can be referrred to in the low-order 1 byte. Performing write using the register 40501 batch- clears the alarm history. Set any value as data.
40502 Alarm history 2 Read 40503 Alarm history 3 Read 40504 Alarm history 4 Read 40505 Alarm history 5 Read 40506 Alarm history 6 Read 40507 Alarm history 7 Read 40508 Alarm history 8 Read
* Refer to page 265 for details of alarm definition.
Data Description H00 No alarm H10 E.OC1 H11 E.OC2 H12 E.OC3 H20 E.OV1 H21 E.OV2 H22 E.OV3 H30 E.THT H31 E.THM H40 E.FIN H50 E.IPF H51 E.UVT H52 E.ILF H60 E.OLT H70 E.BE H80 E.GF H81 E.LF H90 E.OHT
H91 E.PTC HA0 E.OPT HA3 E.OP3 HB0 E.PE HB1 E.PUE HB2 E.RET HB3 E.PE2 HC0 E.CPU HC1 E.CTE HC2 E.P24 HC4 E.CDO HC5 E.IOH HC6 E.SER HC7 E.AIE HD0 E.OS HD2 E.ECT HD5 E.MB1 HD6 E.MB2
Data Description HD7 E.MB3 HD8 E.MB4 HD9 E.MB5 HDA E.MB6 HDB E.MB7 HDC E.EP HF1 E.1 HF2 E.2 HF3 E.3 HF6 E.6 HF7 E.7 HFD E.13
Data Description
226
Communication operation and setting
(7) Pr. 343 Communication error count You can check the cumulative number of communication errors.
(8) Output signal LF "minor failure output(communication error warnings)" During a communication error, the minor failure output (LF signal) is output by open collector output. Assign the used terminal using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
Parameters Setting Range Minimum Setting Range Initial Value 343 (Read only) 1 0
CAUTION The number of commnication errors is temporarily stored into the RAM. As it is not stored into the EEPROM, performing a power supply reset or inverter reset clears the value to 0.
CAUTION The LF signal can be assigned to the output terminal using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Alarm data
Reply data
Master
Slave
0
Signal LF
Normal dataAlarm data Alarm data
1 2
OFF ON OFF OFFON
Not increased
Turns off when normal data is received
Alarm data :
Normal data
Reply data
Communication error count is increased in synchronization with leading edge of LF signal
Data resulting in communication error.
Communication Error count
(Pr.343)
227
Communication operation and setting
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(9) Signal loss detection (Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval)
If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and master as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication error (E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made. When the setting value is "0", monitor, parameter read, etc. can be performed. However, a communication error
(E.SER) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the network operation mode. A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s to 999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is
necessary to send data from the master within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master.)
Communication check is started from the first communication after switching to the network operation mode (use Pr.551 PU mode operation source selection to change).
Communication check time of query communication includes data absence time (3.5 byte). Since this data absence time differs according to the communication speed, make setting considering this absence time.
Operation mode
Example: RS-485 terminal communication, Pr. 539 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
External NET
Check start Time
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
Communication check counter
Pr.539
PLC (master)
PLC (master)
Query Message1 Query Message2
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
Response Message1 Response Message2
Alarm (E.SER)
Operation mode External NET
Check start Time
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
Communication check counter
Pr.539
PLC (master)
PLC (master)
Query Message2
Alarm (E.SER)
Data absence time (3.5 bytes or more)
Query Message1
Query communication
Broadcast communication
228
Special operation and frequency control
4.20 Special operation and frequency control
4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Perform process control such as pump and air volume. PID control Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 228
Increase speed when the load is light. Load torque high speed frequency control Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274 236
Frequency control appropriate for the load torque Droop control Pr. 286, Pr. 287 238 Frequency setting by pulse train input Pulse train input Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386 239
Make the motor speed constant by encoder Encoder feedback control Pr. 144, Pr. 285, Pr. 359, Pr. 367 to Pr. 369 242
Avoid overvoltage alarm due to regeneration by automatic adjustment of output frequency
Regeneration avoidance function Pr. 882 to Pr. 886 244
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure. The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 9999
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is automatically changed to PID control.
9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
128 PID action selection 10
10 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input (terminal 1 )11 PID forward action
20 PID reverse action Measured value (terminal 4 ) Set point (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)21 PID forward action
50 PID reverse action Deviation value signal input (LONWORKS , CC-Link communication)51 PID forward action
60 PID reverse action Measured value, set point input (LONWORKS , CC-Link communication)61 PID forward action
129 *1 PID proportional band 100% 0.1 to 1000%
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain Kp = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
130 *1 PID integral time 1s 0.1 to 3600s
For deviation step input, time (Ti) required for only the integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control
131 PID upper limit 9999 0 to 100%
Set the upper limit value. If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
132 PID lower limit 9999 0 to 100%
Set the lower limit value. If the measured value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
133 *1 PID action set point 9999 0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999 Terminal 2 input is the set point.
229
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) PID control basic configuration Pr. 128 = "10, 11" (Deviation value signal input)
Pr. 128 = "20, 21" (Measured value input)
134 *1 PID differential time 9999 0.01 to 10.00s
For deviation lamp input, time (Td) required for providing only the manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control
575 Output interruption detection time 1s
0 to 3600s The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation remains at less than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575.
9999 Without output interruption function
576 Output interruption detection level 0Hz
0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
Set the frequency at which the output interruption processing is performed.
577 Output interruption cancel level 1000% 900 to 1100% Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) at which the PID output
interruption function is canceled. *1 Pr. 129, Pr. 130, Pr. 133 and Pr. 134 can be set during operation. They can also be set independently of the operation mode. *2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range DescriptionFR-B FR-B3
+- IM Deviation signal
Feedback signal (measured value)
Ti S 1
1+ +Td SKp
PID operation
To outside
Set point
Inverter circuit
Terminal 1 0 to 10VDC
(0 to 5V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Manipulated variable
Explosion- proof motor
+- IM Ti SKp 1+ +Td S
1
PID operation Pr. 133 or terminal 2
Set point
Inverter circuit
Feedback signal (measured value)
Terminal 4
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
Manipulated variable
0 to 5VDC (0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)
4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
Explosion- proof motor
230
Special operation and frequency control
(2) PID action overview 1) PI action
2) PD action
3) PID action
A combination of P action (P) and I action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of measured value]
(Note) PI action is the sum of P and I actions.
A combination of P action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of measured value]
(Note) PD action is the sum of P and D actions.
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.
(Note) PID action is the sum of P, I and D actions.
Deviation Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time PI action
I action
P action
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time
PD action
D action
P action
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Time
Time
Time PID action
D action
P action
I action Time
231
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4)Reverse action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
5)Forward action Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)
(3) Connection diagram
Deviation Positive Negative
Reverse action Forward action
Sink logic Pr. 128 = 20 Pr. 183 = 14 Pr. 191 = 47 Pr. 192 = 16 Pr. 193 = 14 Pr. 194 = 15
*1 The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used. *2 The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal selection) setting. *3 The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal selection) setting.
Set point
X>0
X<0
Feedback signal (measured value)
+
-
[Heating]
Deviation Set point
Measured value
Cold Hot
Increase Decrease
Set point
X>0
X<0
Feedback signal (measured value)
+
-
[Cooling]
Deviation
Set point
Measured value
Too cold Hot
Decrease Increase
Power supply
MCCB Inverter
Forward rotation Reverse rotation
PID control selection
Setting Potentiometer
(Set point setting)
0 24V Power supply *1
AC1 200/220V 50/60Hz
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
STF
STR
RT(X14)*3
10
2
5
4
U V W
*2(FUP)FU
*2(FDN)OL
SE
(Measured value) 4 to 20mA
IM
Pump
P
Upper limit
*2(PID)SU During PID action
Lower limit
Output signal common
2-wire type
Detector
3-wire type
-+ + +-
(OUT) (24V)
Forward rotation output Reverse rotation output
*2(RL)IPF
1 (COM)
Explosion- proof motor
SD
232
Special operation and frequency control
(4) I/O signals and parameter setting Turn on the X14 signal to perform PID control. When this signal is off, PID action is not performed and normal
inverter operation is performed. (Note that the X14 signal need not be turned on for PID control via LONWORKS communication.)
Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. 133 and enter the measured value signal across inverter terminals 4-5. At this time, set "20" or "21" in Pr. 128.
When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it across terminals 1-5. At this time, set "10" or "11" in Pr. 128.
Signal Terminal Used Function Description Parameter Setting
In pu
t
X14 Depending on Pr. 178 to Pr. 189
PID control selection Turn on X14 to perform PID control. Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.
X64 PID forward/ reverse action switchover
By turning on X64, forward action can be selected for PID reverse action (Pr. 128 = 10, 20), and reverse action for forward action (Pr. 128 = 11, 21).
Set 64 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.
2 2 Set point input
Enter the set point for PID control. Pr. 128 = 20, 21, Pr. 133 = 9999 0 to 5V................0 to 100% Pr. 73 = 1 *1, 3, 5, 11, 13, 15 0 to 10V..............0 to 100% Pr. 73 = 0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14 4 to 20mA...........0 to 100% Pr. 73 = 6, 7
PU Set point input Set the set value (Pr. 133) from the operation panel or parameter unit. Pr. 128 = 20, 21, Pr. 133 = 0 to 100%
1 1 Deviation signal input
Input the deviation signal calculated externally. Pr. 128 = 10 *1, 11
-5V to +5V..........-100% to +100% Pr. 73 = 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 13, 15, 17 -10V to +10V ......-100% to +100% Pr. 73 = 0, 1 *1, 4, 6, 10, 11, 14, 16
4 4 Measured value input
Input the signal from the detector (measured value signal). Pr. 128 = 20, 21
4 to 20mA.0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 0 *1 0 to 5V...... 0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 1 0 to 10V....0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 2
Communi- cation
*2
Deviation value input
Input the deviation value from LONWORKS, CC-Link communication. Pr. 128 = 50, 51
Set value, measured value input
Input the set value and measured value from LONWORKS , CC-Link communication. Pr. 128 = 60, 61
O ut
pu t
FUP
Depending on Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
Upper limit output Output to indicate that the measured value signal exceeded the upper limit value (Pr. 131).
Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 60, 61 Pr. 131 9999 Set 15 or 115 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. *3
FDN Lower limit output Output when the measured value signal falls below the lower limit (Pr. 132).
Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 60, 61 Pr. 132 9999 Set 14 or 114 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. *3
RL Forward (reverse) rotation direction output
"Hi" is output to indicate that the output indication of the parameter unit is forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).
Set 16 or 116 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. *3
PID During PID control activated Turns on during PID control. Set 47 or 147 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
196. *3
SLEEP PID output interruption
Turns on when the PID output interruption function is performed.
Pr. 575 9999 Set 70 or 170 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196. *3
SE SE Output terminal common
Common terminal for terminals FUP, FDN, RL, PID and SLEEP
*1 The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value. *2 For the setting method via LONWORKS communication, refer to the LONWORKS communication option (FR-A7NL) instruction manual.
For the setting method via CC-Link communication, refer to the CC-Link communication option (FR-A7NC) instruction manual. *3 When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to
page 125 for details)
CAUTION Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions. Please make setting
after confirming the function of each terminal.
233
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(5) PID control automatic switchover control (Pr. 127) For a fast system startup at an operation start, the system can be started up in normal operation mode only at a start. When the frequency is set to Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency within the range 0 to 400Hz, the
system starts up in normal operation mode from a start until Pr. 127 is reached, and then it shifts to PID control operation mode. Once the system has entered PID control operation, it continues PID control if the output frequency falls to or below Pr. 127.
(6) PID output suspension function (SLEEP function) (SLEEP signal, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 ) The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation remains at less than the Pr. 576 Output
interruption detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575 Output interruption detection time. This function can reduce energy consumption in the low-efficiency, low-speed range.
When the deviation (= set value - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level (Pr. 577 setting - 1000%) while the PID output interruption function is on, the PID output interruption function is canceled and PID control operation is resumed automatically.
While the PID output interruption function is on, the PID output interruption signal (SLEEP) is output. At this time, the inverter running signal (RUN) is off and the PID control operating signal (PID) is on.
(7) PID monitor function The PID control set value, measured value and deviation value can be output to the operation panel monitor
display and terminal FM, AM. The deviation monitor can display a negative value on the assumption that 1000 is 0%. (The deviation monitor
cannot be output from the terminal FM, AM.) For the monitors, set the following values in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection, Pr. 54 FM terminal function
selection, and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
Setting Monitor Description Minimum Increments
Terminal FM, AM Full Scale Remarks
52 PID set point 0.1% 100% For deviation input (Pr. 128 = 10, 11), the monitor value is always displayed as 0.53 PID measurement value 0.1% 100%
54 PID deviation value 0.1% Value cannot be set to Pr. 54 or Pr. 158. The PID deviation value of 0% is displayed as 1000.
Output frequency
Pr.127
STF
Time
PID
PID control Normal operation
Output frequency
Deviation
Reverse action (Pr.128 10)
Pr.576
Pr.577 - 1000%
RUN
Time
ON
OFF
SLEEP
Less than Pr. 575 Pr. 575 or more SLEEP period
PID
Cancel level
234
Special operation and frequency control
(8) Adjustment procedure
(9) Calibration example (A detector of 4mA at 0C and 20mA at 50C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 5V).)
Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 127 to Pr. 134 and Pr. 575 to Pr. 577.
Terminal setting Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection), Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection))
Turn on the X14 signal
Operation
Start
Determination of set point
Conversion of set point into %
Make calibration.
Setting of set point
Operation
Is the set point stable?
Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization
Adjustment end
Yes
No
When the parameter unit is used for operation, input the set point (0 to 100%) in Pr. 133. When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) to "9999" (no function), and while looking at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) and increase the integral time (Pr. 130 ).
Determine the set point of what is desired to be adjusted.
Calculate the ratio of the set point to the detector output.
Input a voltage across terminals 2-5 according to the set value %.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) to a slightly shorter time.
While the measured value is stable throughout the operation status, the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) may be decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) decreased, and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) increased.
Set the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) to "9999" (no function), and turn on the start signal.
Set the room temperature to 25 .
Set Pr. 128 and turn on the X14 signal to enable PID control.
Detector specifications
When 0 4mA and 50 20mA are used, the set point 25 is 50% on
the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
Make the following calibration* when the target setting input (0 to 5V) and
detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.
When the set point is 50%
As the terminal 2 specifications are 0% 0V and 100% 5V, input 2.5V
to the terminal 2 for the set point of 50%.
When calibration is required
Using calibration Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal 4), calibrate the detector output and target setting input. Make calibration in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
*
235
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) across terminals 2-5. 2. Enter in C2 (Pr. 902) the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz). 3. In C3 (Pr. 902), set the voltage value at 0%. 4. Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5. 5. Enter in Pr. 125 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz). 6. In C4 (Pr. 903), set the voltage value at 100%.
1. Apply the output current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5. 2. Make calibration using C6 (Pr. 904). 3. Apply the output current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5. 4. Make calibration using C7 (Pr. 905).
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
REMARKS The frequency set in C5 (Pr. 904) and Pr. 126 should be the same as set in C2 (Pr. 902) and Pr. 125.
CAUTION If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL signal) or jog operation (jog signal) is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and
multi-speed or jog operation is started. If the setting is as follows, PID control becomes invalid.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "6" (switchover mode) Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment, Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment = "4" (torque command)
When the Pr. 128 setting is "20" or "21", note that the input across inverter terminals 1-5 is added to the set value across terminals 2-5.
When using terminal 4 (measured value input) and terminal 1 (deviation input) under PID control, set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 858 Terminal 4 function assignment and "0" (initial value) in Pr. 868 Terminal 1 function assignment.
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 903. (Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency settings are also valid.)
The remote operation function is invalid during PID operation.
Parameters referred to Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85 Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 166 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118 Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain Refer to page 172
100
0
0 5 (V)
(%)
[Set point setting]
100
0
0 20 (mA)
(%)
[Detection value]
4
0
0 100 Deviation (%)
[Manipulated variable] Manipulated variable (Hz)
60
236
Special operation and frequency control
4.20.2 Load torque high speed frequency control (Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
Load torque high speed frequency control is a function which automatically sets the operational maximum frequency according to the load. More specifically, the magnitude of the load is judged according to the average current at a certain time after starting to perform operation at higher than the preset frequency under light load. This function is designed to increase speed automatically under light load, for example to minimize the incoming/outgoing time in a multi-story parking lot.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz * 0 to 120Hz Set the higher-speed frequency.
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 30Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz * 0 to 120Hz Set the lower-speed frequency.
270
Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
0
0 0 Normal operation 1 Stop-on-control (refer to page 105) 2 2 Load torque high speed frequency control
3 Stop-on-contact (refer to page 105) + load torque high speed frequency control
271 High-speed setting maximum current 50% 0 to 220%
Set the upper and lower limits of the current at high and middle speeds.
272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 100% 0 to 220%
273 Current averaging range 9999
0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz * 0 to 120Hz Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 273
1/2) Hz to (Pr. 273) Hz can be achieved.
9999 Average current during acceleration from (Pr. 5 1/2) Hz to (Pr. 5) Hz is achieved.
274 Current averaging filter time constant 16 1 to 4000
Set the time constant of the primary delay filter relative to the output current. The time constant [ms] is 0.75 Pr. 274 and the initial value is 12ms. A larger setting provides higher stability but poorer response.
frequency control>
frequency control>
Light
Faster
Whether there is a load or not, the lift is moved vertically at the same speed.
The lift with a light load or without a load is moved faster than the list with a load. (The output frequency is increased.)
Mechanical brake
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Motor
MC
STF
CS(X19)*
Start signal
Load torque high-speed frequency
MCCB
Power supply
U
V
W
Pr.186 = 19
Sink logic
SD
* The used terminal changes according to the Pr. 180 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)settings.
237
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(1) Load torque high speed frequency control setting Set "2 or 3 (FR-B3 series only) " in Pr. 270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection. When operating with the load torque high speed frequency function selection signal (X19) on, the inverter
automatically changes the maximum frequency within the setting range of Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and Pr. 5 according to the magnitude of the average current during the time to accelerate from 1/2 of the frequency set in Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) to the frequency set in Pr. 5 .
Set "19" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) and assign the X19 signal function to the input terminal. Made valid only in the external operation mode. This control can be activated at every start.
(2) Operation of load torque high speed frequency control setting When the average current of the current averaging range (above chart A) during operation with the X19 signal on is
less than the "rated inverter current Pr. 271 setting (%)", the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) setting value.
When the average current of the current averaging range (above chart B) during operation with the X19 signal on is more than the "rated inverter current Pr. 272 setting (%)", the maximum frequency automatically becomes the Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) setting value.
The current averaging range can be set between 1/2 frequency of the Pr. 273 setting value and Pr. 273 set frequency.
CAUTION When the current averaging range includes the constant power range, the output current may become large in the constant
power range. When the average current value in the current averaging range is small, deceleration time becomes longer as the running
frequency increases. The maximum output frequency is 120Hz. The output frequency is 120Hz even when the setting is above 120Hz. The fast-response current limit function is made invalid. When the average current during acceleration is too small, it may be judged as regeneration and the maximum frequency
becomes the setting of Pr. 5. Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 may affect the other functions. Please make setting after
confirming the function of each terminal. The load torque high speed frequency function is made invalid in the following operation conditions.
PU operation (Pr. 79) , PU+external operation (Pr. 79) , JOG operation (JOG signal) , PID control function operation (X14 signal), remote setting function operation (Pr. 59), orientation control function operation, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL signal ), 16 bit digital input option (FR-A7AX)
CAUTION When the load is light, the motor may suddenly accelerate to 120Hz maximum, causing hazard. Securely provide mechanical interlock on the machine side to perform.
Parameters referred to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting) Refer to page 81
Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 85
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 182
Pr. 128 PID action selection Refer to page 228 Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 118
(STR)
X19
STF ON ON
ON ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Pr. 5
Pr. 4
Pr. 5 1 2
Power running Regenerating
A B
Current averaging range Current averaging range
O u tp
u t fr
e q u e n c y
Time
Less than Pr. 271 setting rated current
Pr. 272 setting rated current or more
Pr. 5
(30Hz)
Pr. 271
(50%) Average current
F re
q u
e n
c y
Pr. 272
(100%)
Value in parenthesis is initial value.
Pr. 4
(60Hz)
238
Special operation and frequency control
4.20.3 Droop control (Pr. 286 to Pr. 288) Setting can be made only for FR-B3 series.
This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic. This function is effective for balancing the load when using multiple inverters
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
286 Droop gain 0%
0 Normal operation
0.1% to 100%
Droop control is valid Set the drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated motor frequency.
287 Droop filter time constant 0.3s 0 to 1s Set the time constant of the filter applied on the torque amount current.
(1) Droop control The output frequency is changed according to
the magnitude of torque amount current. The maximum droop compensation frequency
is 120Hz.
Droop compensation frequency = Amount of torque current after filtering
Rated motor frequency Droop gain
Rated value of torque current 100
REMARKS Set the droop gain to about the rated slip of the motor.
REMARKS The maximum value of frequency after droop compensation is either 120Hz or Pr. 1 Maximum frequency , whichever is smaller.
Parameters referred to Pr. 1 Maximum frequency Refer to page 79
B3
Droop compensation frequency
R a
te d
f re
q u
e n
c y
Torque100%
Droop gain
-100%
Frequency
0
Rated slip = Synchronous speed at base frequency - Rated speed 100[%]Synchronous speed at base frequency
239
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.20.4 Frequency setting by pulse train input (Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386)
* The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
(1) Pulse train input selection (Pr. 291) Setting any of "1, 11, 21, 100" in Pr. 291 Pulse train I/O selection and a value other than "0" in Pr. 384 Input pulse division
scaling factor switches terminal JOG to pulse train input terminal and frequency setting of the inverter can be performed. (The initial value is JOG signal) Pulse train input of maximum of 100k pulse/s is enabled.
Output specifications (high speed pulse train output or FM output) of terminal FM can be selected using Pr. 291.
The inverter speed can be set by inputting pulse train from terminal JOG. In addition, synchronous speed operation of inverters can be performed by combining pulse train I/O.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range
Description FR-B FR-B3
291 Pulse train I/O selection 0
Pulse train input Pulse train output 0 Terminal JOG FM output 1 Pulse train input FM output
10 Terminal JOG High speed pulse train output (50%Duty)
11 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output (50%Duty)
20 Terminal JOG High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same)
21 Pulse train input High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same)
100 Pulse train input
High speed pulse train output (ON width is always same) The inverter outputs the signal input as pulse train as it
384 Input pulse division scaling factor 0
0 Pulse train input invalid
1 to 250 Indicates division scaling factor to the input pulse and the frequency resolution to the input pulse changes according to the value.
385 Frequency for zero input pulse 0Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz * 0 to
120Hz Set the frequency when the input pulse is 0 (bias).
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 60Hz 0 to 120Hz/
0 to 60Hz * 0 to
120Hz Set the frequency when the input pulse is maximum (gain).
JOG
PC
SD
Sink logic Inverter
Pull up resistance *
2k
Connection with an open collector output system
pulse generator
JOG
PC
SD
Sink logic Inverter
2k
Connection with a complimentary output system
pulse generator
24V power
JOG
PC
SD
Source logic Inverter
Pull down resistance *
2k
Connection with an open collector output system
pulse generator
Source logic
Connection with a complimentary output system
pulse generator
24V power JOG
PC
SD
Inverter
2k
240
Special operation and frequency control
* When the wiring length of the open collector output connection is long, input pulse can not be recognized because of a pulse shape deformation due to the stray capacitances of the wiring. When wiring length is long (10m or more of 0.75mm2 twisted cable is recommended), connect an open collector output signal and power supply using a pull up resistance. The reference of resistance value to the wiring length is as in the table below,
Stray capacitances of the wiring greately differ according to the cable type and cable laying, the above cable length is not a guaranteed value. When using a pull up resistance, check the permissible power of the resistor and permissible load current of output transistor and use them within a permissible range.
Pulse train input specifications
(3) Calculation method of division scaling factor of input pulse (Pr. 384 ) Maximum input pulse can be calcualted from the following formula using Pr. 384 Input pulse division scaling factor.
Maximum of input pulse (pulse/s) = Pr. 384 400 (maximum of 100kpulse/s) Detectable pulse = 11.45 pulse/s
For example, when you want to operate at 0Hz when pulse train input is zero and operate at 30Hz when pulse train is 4000 pulse/s, set parameters as below. Pr. 384 = 10 (maximum input pulse 4000 pulse/s) Pr. 385 = 0Hz, Pr. 386 = 30Hz (pulse train limit value is 33Hz)
Wiring Length Less than 10m 10 to 50m 50 to 100m Pull up/down resistance Not necessary 1k 470
Load current (for reference) 10mA 35mA 65mA
REMARKS When pulse train input is selected, a function assigned to terminal JOG using Pr. 185 JOG terminal function selection is made invalid.
CAUTION Since Pr. 291 is a selection parameter for pulse train output/FM output, check the specifications of a device connected to
terminal FM when changing the setting value. (Refer to page 142 for pulse train output.) Output specifications (high speed pulse train output or FM output) of terminal FM can be selected using Pr. 291. Change the
setting value using care not to change output specifications of terminal FM. (Refer to page 142 for pulse train output.)
Item Specifications
Available pulse method Open collector output Complimentary output
(power supply voltage 24V)
* The wiring length of complementary output depends on the output wiring specifications of complementary output device. Stray capacitances of the wiring greatly differ according to the cable type and cable laying, the maximum cable length is not a guaranteed value.
H input level 20V or more (voltage between JOG-SD) L input level 5V or less (voltage between JOG-SD)
Maximum input pulse rate 100kpps Minimum input pulse width 2.5us
Input resistance/load current 2k (typ) / 10mA (typ) Maximum wiring
length (reference value)
Open collector output system 10m (0.75mm2/ twisted pair)
Complemenraty output system 100m (output resistance 50) *
Detection resolution 1/3750
(2) Adjustment of pulse train input and frequency (Pr. 385, Pr. 386 )
Frequency for zero input pulse can be set using Pr. 385 Frequency for zero input pulse and frequency at maximum input pulse can be set using Pr. 386 Frequency for maximum input pulse.
* Limit value can be calculated from the following formula. (Pr. 386 - Pr. 385 ) 1.1 + Pr. 385
REMARKS The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "jog operation > multi-speed operation > teminal 4 analog input > pulse train input > terminal 2 analog input".
60Hz
Pr. 386
0Hz Maximum input pulse
Limit value *
Input pulse (pulse/s)
(Hz)
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y
0 Pr. 385
241
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(4) Synchronous speed operation by pulse I/O
* When the wiring length between FM and JOG is long, a pulse shape is deformed due to the stray capacitances of the wiring and input pulse can not be recognized. When wiring length is long (10m or more of 0.75mm2 twisted cable is recommended), connect terminal JOG and terminal PC using an external pull up resistance. The reference of resistance value to the wiring length is as in the table below.
Stray capacitances of the wiring greately differ according to the cable type and cable laying, the above cable length is not a guaranteed value. When using a pull up resistance, check the permissible power and permissible load current (terminal PC : 100mA, high speed pulse train output : 85mA) of the resistor and use them within a permissible range.
By setting "100" in Pr. 291, pulse train input can be output at pulse train output (terminal FM) as it is. Synchronous speed operation of multiple inverters can be enabled by daisy chain connection.
Since maximum pulse train output is maximum of 50k pulse/s, set "125" in Pr. 384 of the inverter receiving pulse train. When operating two or more inverters synchronously, perform wiring according to the following steps. (so that 24V
contact input will not be applied to terminal FM) 1) Set pulse train output (a value other than "0, 1") in Pr. 291 of the master side inverter. 2) Turn off the inverter power 3) Perform wiring of the master side terminal FM-SD and slave side terminal JOG-SD 4) Turn on the inverter power
Specifications of synchronous speed operation
* When a pulse transmission delay in a slave is approximately 1 to 2s and wiring length is long, the delay further increases.
Wiring Length Less than 10m 10 to 50m 50 to 100m Pull up resistance Not necessary 1k 470
Load current (for reference)
10mA 35mA 65mA
CAUTION After changing a setting value of Pr. 291 , connect JOG terminal between termial FM and SD. Take note that a voltage should
not be applied to terminal FM specially when FM output (voltage output) pulse train is selected. For the slave side inverter, use sink logic (initial setting). The inverter will not function properly if source logic is selected.
Item Specifications Output pulse type Pulse width is fixed (10s)
Pulse rate 0 to 50kpps Pulse transmission delay 1 to 2s per inverter *
Parameters referred to Pr. 291 (pulse train output ) Refer to page 142
Pulse train input
Inverter (master) To next inverter (slave)
To next inverter (slave) FM
SD
FM
SD
JOG
PC
JOG
SD
Speed command
Pulse train output
Pull up resistance*
Pulse train output
Speed command
242
Special operation and frequency control
4.20.5 Encoder feedback control (Pr. 144, Pr. 285, Pr. 359, Pr. 367 to Pr. 369)
(1) Setting before the operation (Pr. 144, Pr. 359, Pr. 369 ) When performing encoder feedback control under FR-B series, set the number of motor poles in Pr. 144 Speed setting
switchover according to the motor used. Under FR-B3 series, the Pr. 81 Number of motor poles setting is made valid and the Pr. 144 setting is invalid.
Set the rotation direction and the number of encoder pulses of the encoder using Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
This controls the inverter output frequency so that the motor speed is constant to the load variation by detecting the motor speed with the speed detector (encoder) to feed it back to the inverter. Option FR-A7AP is necessary.
Parameter Numbers
Name Initial Value
Setting Range Description FR-B FR-B3
144 Speed setting switchover 4 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102, 104, 106, 108, 110
Set the number of motor poles when performing encoder feedback control under V/F control.
285
Overspeed detection frequency (Speed deviation excess detection frequency)
9999 0 to 30Hz
If (detected frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 during encoder feedback control, the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided.
9999 Overspeed is not detected.
359 *2 Encoder rotation direction 1
0
1
367 *1 Speed feedback range 9999 0 to 120Hz/ 0 to 60Hz *2
0 to 120Hz
Set the region of speed feedback control.
9999 Encoder feedback control is invalid 368 *1 Feedback gain 1 0 to 100 Set when the rotation is unstable or response is slow.
369 *1 Number of encoder pulses 1024 0 to 4096 Set the number of pulses of the encoder. Set the number of pulses before multiplied by four.
*1 The above parameters can be set when the FR-A7AP (option) is mounted. *2 The setting range differs according to the inverter capacity. (22K or less/30K or more)
REMARKS When "0, 10, 110" is set in Pr. 144 and run the inverter, error E.1 to E.3 occurs. When "102, 104, 106, 108" is set in Pr. 144, the value subtracting 100 is set as the number of motor poles.
CAUTION If the number of motor poles is wrong, control at correct speed can not be performed. Always check before operation. Encoder feedback control can not be performed when the setting of encoder rotation direction is wrong. (Inverter operation is
enabled.) Encoder rotation direction can be checked with the rotation direction display of the parameter unit.
A
Encoder
CW
Clockwise direction as viewed from A is forward rotation
CCW
A
Encoder Counter clockwise direction as viewed from A is forward rotation
243
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Selection of encoder feedback control (Pr. 367 )
(3) Feedback gain (Pr. 368 ) Set Pr. 368 Feedback gain when the rotation is unstable or response is slow. If the acceleration/deceleration time is long, feedback response becomes slower. In this case, increase the Pr. 368
setting.
(4) Overspeed detection (Pr. 285 ) If (detection frequency) - (output frequency) > Pr. 285 under encoder feedback control, E.MB1 occurs and the inverter
output is stopped to prevent malfunction when the accurate pulse signal from the encoder can not be detected. Overspeed is not detected when Pr. 285 = "9999".
When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 367 Speed feedback range, encoder feedback control is valid. Using the set point (frequency at which stable speed operation is performed) as reference, set the higher and lower setting range. Normally, set the frequency converted from the slip amount (r/min) of the rated motor speed (rated load). If the setting is too large, response becomes slow.
Example: Rated speed of a 4-pole motor is 1740r/min (60Hz)
Slip Nsp = Synchronous speed - Rated speed Frequency equivalent to slip (fsp) = 1800 - 1740 = 60(r/min)
fsp = Nsp Number of poles
= 60 4
= 2 (Hz) 120 120
Pr. 368 Setting Description Pr. 368 > 1 Although the response becomes faster, overcurrent or unstable rotation is liable to occur. 1 < Pr. 368 Although the response becomes slower, the motor rotation becomes stable.
CAUTION The encoder should be coupled on the same axis with the motor shaft with a speed ratio of 1 to 1 without any mechanical
looseness. During acceleration/deceleration, encoder feedback control is not performed to prevent unstable phenomenon such as hunting. Encoder feedback control is performed once output frequency has reached within [set speed] [speed feedback range]. If the following conditions occur during encoder feedback control, the inverter operates at the frequency within [set speed]
[speed feedback range] without coming to an alarm stop nor tracking the motor speed. The pulse signals are not received from the encoder due to a signal loss, etc. The accurate pulse signal from the encoder can not be detected due to induction noise, etc. The motor has been forcibly accelerated (regeneration) or decelerated (motor lock or the like) by large external force.
For the motor with brake, use the RUN signal (inverter running) to open the brake. (The brake may not be opened if the FU (output frequency detection) signal is used.)
Do not turn off the external power supply of the encoder during encoder feedback control. Encoder feedback control functions abnormally.
Speed feedback range
Set value (Set command)
Driven load Regeneration load
244
Special operation and frequency control
4.20.6 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886)
(1) What is regeneration avoidance function? (Pr. 882, Pr. 883) When the regenerative status is serious, the DC bus voltage rises and an overvoltage alarm (E. OV ) may occur.
When this bus voltage rise is detected and the bus voltage level reaches or exceeds Pr. 883, increasing the frequency avoids the regenerative status.
For regeneration avoidance operation, you can select whether it is always activated or activated only at a constant speed.
Setting Pr. 882 to "1, 2" validates the regeneration avoidance function.
This function detects a regenerative status and increases the frequency to avoid the regenerative status. Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
Parameter Number Name Initial
Value Setting Range Description
882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection
0
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid 1 Regeneration avoidance function is always valid
2 Regeneration avoidance function is valid only during a constant speed operation
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level
380VDC/ 760VDC * 300 to 800V
Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to occur. However, the actual deceleration time increases. The set value must be higher than the power supply voltage . * The initial value differs according to the voltage level. (200V / 400V)
884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity
0
0 Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage change ratio is invalid
1 to 5 Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change ratio Setting 1 5 Detection sensitivity low high
885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
6Hz 0 to 10Hz Set the limit value of frequency which rises at activation of
regeneration avoidance function.
9999 Frequency limit invalid
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain
100% 0 to 200% Adjust responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance. A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage change. However, the output frequency could become unstable. When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665.665
Regeneration avoidance frequency gain
100% 0 to 200%
REMARKS The inclination of the frequency increased or decreased by the regeneration avoidance function changes depending on the
regenerative status. The DC bus voltage of the inverter is normally about times greater than the input voltage.
When the input voltage is 220VAC(440VAC), the bus voltage is about 311VDC(622VDC). However, it varies with the input power supply waveform.
The Pr. 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level. Otherwise, the regeneration avoidance function is always on.
While overvoltage stall ( ) is activated only during deceleration and stops the decrease in output frequency, the regeneration avoidance function is always on (Pr. 882 = 1) or activated only during a constant speed (Pr. 882 = 2) and increases the frequency according to the regeneration amount.
2
Pr.883
Time
Time
Regeneration avoidance operation example for acceleration
B u
s v
o lt a
g e
(V
D C
) O
u tp
u t
fr e
q u
e n
c y (H
z )
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Pr.883
Time
Time
Regeneration avoidance operation example for constant speed
B u
s v
o lt a
g e
(V
D C
) O
u tp
u t
fr e
q u
e n
c y (H
z )
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Pr.883
Time
Time
B u
s v
o lt a
g e
(V
D C
) O
u tp
u t
fr e
q u
e n
c y (H
z )
During regeneration avoidance function operation
Regeneration avoidance operation example for deceleration
2
245
Special operation and frequency control
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) To detect the regenerative status during deceleration faster (Pr. 884) As the regeneration avoidance function cannot respond to an abrupt voltage change by detection of the bus
voltage level, the ratio of bus voltage change is detected to stop deceleration if the bus voltage is less than Pr. 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level. Set that detectable bus voltage change ratio to Pr. 884 as detection sensitivity. Increasing the setting raises the detection sensitivity
(4) Regeneration avoidance function adjustment (Pr. 665, Pr. 886) If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain. Reversely, if sudden regeneration causes an overvoltage alarm, increase the setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain.
CAUTION Too small setting (low detection sensitivity) will disable detection, and too large setting will turn on the regeneration avoidance function if the bus voltage is varied by an input power change, etc.
(3) Limit regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr. 885) You can limit the output frequency compensated for (increased) by the regeneration avoidance function. The frequency is limited to the output frequency (frequency prior to
regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value during acceleration or constant speed. If the regeneration avoidance frequency exceeds the limit value during deceleration, the limit value is held until the output frequency falls to 1/2 of Pr. 885.
When the regeneration avoidance frequency has reached Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum frequency.
Pr. 885 is set to "9999", the frequency setting is invalid.
CAUTION When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, (overvoltage stall) is displayed and the OL signal is output. When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, stall prevention is also activated at the same time. The regeneration avoidance function cannot shorten the actual deceleration time taken to stop the motor. The actual
deceleration time depends on the regeneration capability. When shortening the deceleration time, consider using the regeneration unit (FR-BU, MT-BU5, MT-HC). When using the regeneration unit with capacities of 55kW or less, another explosion-proof test is necessary.
When using the regeneration unit (FR-BU, MT-BU5, MT-HC), set Pr. 882 to "0 (initial value)" (regeneration avoidance function invalid). When using the regeneration unit with capacities of 55kW or less, another explosion-proof test is necessary.
When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, the OL signal output item of Pr. 156 also becomes the target of
(overvoltage stall). Pr. 157 OL signal output timer also becomes the target of (overvoltage stall).
Parameters referred to Pr. 1 Maximum frequency Refer to page 79 Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 88 Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level Refer to page 74
Limit level
Time
Pr.885
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.885/2
O u
tp u
t fr
e q
u e
n c y (H
z )
246
Useful functions
4.21 Useful functions
4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault (FAN) and minor fault (LF) signals are output. Pr. 244 = "0" When the fan comes to a stop with power on
Pr. 244 = "1" When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running
For the terminal used for FAN signal output, set "25" (positive logic) or "125" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), and for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic).
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page
Increase cooling fan life Cooling fan operation selection Pr. 244 246
To determine the maintenance time of parts.
Inverter part life display Pr. 255 to Pr. 259 247 Maintenance output function Pr. 503, Pr. 504 249 Current average value monitor signal Pr. 555 to Pr. 557 250
Freely available parameter Free parameter Pr. 888, Pr. 889 252
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (200V class:1500 or more, 400V class:2200 or more) built in the inverter.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
244 Cooling fan operation selection 1
0 A cooling fan operates at power on Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The cooling fan is always on at power on)
1
Cooling fan on/off control valid The fan is always on while the inverter is running. During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and the fan switches on-off according to the temperature.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
247
Useful functions
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)
(1) Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr. 255) Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit has
reached the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 255 Life alarm status display and life alarm signal (Y90).
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit can be diagnosed by monitor. When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. (Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.) For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (4) is not performed.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
255 Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 15)
Display whether the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not. Reading only
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 100% (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the inrush
current limit circuit. Reading only
257 Control circuit capacitor life display 100% (0 to 100%) Display the deterioration degree of the control
circuit capacitor. Reading only
258 Main circuit capacitor life display 100% (0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor. Reading only The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0 0, 1
(2, 3, 8, 9)
Setting "1" and switching the power supply off starts the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life. When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering on again, the measuring is completed. Read the deterioration degree in Pr. 258.
Pr. 255 (decimal)
Bit (binary)
Inrush Current Limit Circuit Life
Cooling Fan Life
Main Circuit Capacitor Life
Control Circuit Capacitor Life
15 1111 14 1110 13 1101 12 1100 11 1011 10 1010 9 1001 8 1000 7 0111 6 0110 5 0101 4 0100 3 0011 2 0010 1 0001 0 0000
: With warnings, : Without warnings
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
1
15bit 7 0
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Pr.255 read
Bit image is displayed in decimal
Pr.255 setting read
248
Useful functions
The life alarm signal (Y90) turns on when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
(2) Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr. 256) The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 256. The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (1 million
times) every 1%/10,000 times. As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr. 255 bit 3 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
(3) Control circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 257) The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 257 as a life. In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature,
and is counted down from 100%. As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 255 bit 0 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
(4) Main circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 258, Pr. 259) The deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 258 as a life. On the assumption that the main circuit capacitor capacitance at factory shipment is 100%, the capacitor life is
displayed in Pr. 258 every time measurement is made. When the measured value falls to or below 85%, Pr. 255 bit 1 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the capacitor capacity. 1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop. 2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259 3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is off. 4) After making sure that the power lamp is off, switch on the power supply again. 5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, read Pr. 258, and check the deterioration degree of the
main circuit capacitor.
REMARKS The digital output option (FR-A7AY) allows the control circuit capacitor life signal (Y86), main circuit capacitor life signal (Y87),
cooling fan life signal (Y88) and inrush current limit circuit life signal (Y89) to be output individually.
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Pr. 259 Description Remarks 0 No measurement Initial value
1 Measurement start Measurement starts when the power supply is switched off.
2 During measurement
Only displayed and cannot be set
3 Measurement complete
8 Forced end See (c), (g), (h), (i) below.
9 Measurement error See (d), (e), (f) below.
REMARKS The life of the main circuit capacitor can not be measured in the following conditions.
(a)The MT-HC, FR-BU, MT-BU5 or BU is connected (b)Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminal P/+ and N/-. (c) Switch power on during measuring. (d)The motor is not connected to the inverter. (e)The motor is running. (The motor is coasting.) (f) The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off. (g)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal. (h)The start command is given while measuring.
Operating environment: Ambient Temperature (annual average 40C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)) Output current (80% of the rated current of Mitsubishi explosion-proof 4P motor)
249
Useful functions
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(5) Cooling fan life display The cooling fan speed of 40% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 255 bit 2 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)
The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
When the Pr. 503 value reaches the time set in Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time (100h increments), the maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (positive logic) or "195" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
REMARKS When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, the life of even one cooling fan is diagnosed.
CAUTION For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer
output signal (Y95) is output. (MT) is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07). This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
503 Maintenance timer 0 0 (1 to 9998)
Display the cumulative energization time of the inverter in 100h increments. Reading only Writing the setting of "0" clears the cumulative energization time.
504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 9999
0 to 9998 Set the time taken until when the maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
9999 No function
CAUTION The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. The energization time of less than 1h is not counted. When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196(output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125
First power ON
Maintenance timer (Pr. 503)
Set "0" in Pr.503
Y95 signal MT display
OFF ON
Time
ON
Pr.504
9998 (999800h)
250
Useful functions
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
The pulse output of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown above. For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative
logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection). (The function can not be assigned to Pr. 195 ABC1 terminal function selection and Pr. 196 ABC2 terminal function selection.)
(1) Setting of Pr. 556 Data output mask time The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed from the acceleration/ deceleration state to the constant speed operation. Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr. 556.
(2) Setting of the Pr. 555 Current average time The average output current is calculated during Hi output of start bit (1s). Set the time taken to average the current during start bit output in Pr. 555.
The average value of the output current during constant speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse to the current average value monitor signal (Y93). The pulse width output to the I/O module of the PLC etc. can be used as a guideline due to abrasion of machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of devices to know the maintenance time. The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant speed operation.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
555 Current average time 1s 0.1 to 1.0s Set the time taken to average the current during start pulse output (1s).
556 Data output mask time 0s 0.0 to 20.0s Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data.
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Rated inverter current
55K or less 0 to 500A Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value.75K or more 0 to 3600A
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
PLC Output unit
Input unit
maintenance time
parts have reached their life
Inverter
Y93 signal
1) Data output mask time
2) Start pulse
1 cycle (20s)
3) Output current average value pulse
Next cycle Time
Output frequency
From acceleration to constant speed operation
Signal output time= output current average value (A)
Pr.557 (A) 5s
4) Maintenance timer pulse
Signal output time= 5s 40000h
5) End pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start bit output.
When the speed has changed to constant
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is
not output for Pr.556 time.
Pr.503 100h
output as low pulse shape for 1 to 16.5s
The maintenance timer value (Pr.503) is output as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to 72000h).
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)
Time and output current set in Pr.555 are averaged
251
Useful functions
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(3) Setting of Pr. 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. Obtain the time to output the signal from the following formula.
(4) Output of Pr. 503 Maintenance timer
Note that the output time range is 0.5 to 9s, and it is 0.5s when the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value of Pr. 557 and 9s when exceeds 180%. Example)When Pr. 557 = 10A and the average value of output current is 15A
As 15A/10A 5s = 7.5, the current average value monitor signal is output as low pulse shape for 7.5s.
After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the maintenance timer value is obtained from the following formula.
Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s, and it is 2s when Pr. 503 is less than 16000h and 9s when exceeds 72000h.
REMARKS Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration. When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration from constant speed during start pulse output, the data is judged as
invalid, the start pulse is output as high pulse shape for 3.5s, and the end signal is output as low pulse shape for 16.5s. The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when acceleration/deceleration state continues after the start pulse output is completed.
When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0A on completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not output until the speed becomes constant next time
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low pulse shape for 20s (without data output) under the following condition. (a)When the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output (b)When 1-cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure (Pr. 57 "9999") (c)When automatic restart operation was being performed with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selected (Pr.
57 "9999") on completion of the data output mask
CAUTION When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be
affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196(output terminal function selection) Refer to page 125 Pr. 503 Maintenance timer Refer to page 249 Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 148
Output current average value 5s (output current average value 100%/5s)Pr. 557 setting
9
0.5
10 (%)
(s)
Output current average value 180
S ig
n a
l o
u tp
u t
ti m
e
Pr. 503 5s (maintenance timer value 100%/5s) 40000h
9
2
16000 (h)
(s)
Maintenance timer value 72000
S ig
n a
l o
u tp
u t
ti m
e
5) End signal
Y93 signal
2) Start pulse
Invalid cycle (20s) Next cycle Time
Output frequency The speed is changed to deceleration from the constant speed during start pulse output
Previous cycle
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5s
Output as low pulse shape for 16.5s
252
Useful functions
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999. For example, the number can be used: As a unit number when multiple units are used. As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used. As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
888 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 889 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
REMARKS The set value is stored in EEPROM as same as other parameter, the setting value is saved even after power off. Pr. 888 and Pr. 889 do not influence the inverter operation.
253
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.22 Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
4.22.1 PU display language selection (Pr. 145)
4.22.2 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161)
Purpose Parameter that must be Set Refer to Page Switch the display language of the parameter unit PU display language selection Pr. 145 253
Use the setting dial of the operation panel like a volume for frequency setting. Key lock of operation panel
Operation panel operation selection Pr. 161 253
Control of the parameter unit, operation panel buzzer PU buzzer control Pr. 990 255
Adjust the LCD contrast of the parameter unit PU contrast adjustment Pr. 991 255
You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to another.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
145 PU display language selection 0
0 Japanese 1 English 2 Germany 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian 6 Swedish 7 Finnish
The setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU07) can be used like a volume to perform operation. The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting
Range Description
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 0
0 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock
mode invalid 1 Setting dial volume mode
10 Setting dial frequency setting mode Key lock
mode valid 11 Setting dial volume mode
254
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
(1) Using the setting dial like a volume to set the frequency. Operation example Changing the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
REMARKS If the display changes from flickering "60.00" to "0.00", the setting of Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection may not
be "1". Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning the dial. When the frequency is changed, it will be stored in EEPROM as the set frequency after 10s.
DisplayOperation
PU indication is lit.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7. Press to set.
The parameter number previously read appears.
1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
2. Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
3. Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
8. Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose
monitor/frequency monitor.
9. Press (or ) to start the inverter.
4. Turn until (Pr. 161) appears.
5. Press to read the currently set value.
" " (initial value) appears.
6. Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
10. until " " appears.Turn
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press .
255
Setting of the parameter unit and operation panel
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Disable the setting dial and key operation of the operation panel (Press [MODE] long (2s)) Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change
and unexpected start and stop.
Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
When the setting dial and key operation is made invalid, appears on the operation panel. When the
setting dial and key operation is invalid, appears if the setting dial or key operation is performed. (When the setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
4.22.3 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
4.22.4 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)
The above parameters are displayed as simple mode parameters only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
REMARKS
Even if the setting dial and key operation are disabled, the monitor display is valid.
CAUTION Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR- PU04/FR-PU07).
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
990 PU buzzer control 1 0 Without buzzer 1 With buzzer
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be performed. Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.
Parameter Number Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
991 PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63 0 : Light 63: Dark
256
Parameter clear
4.23 Parameter clear
POINT
Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. In addition, calibration parameters are not cleared.)
Setting Description 0 Not executed. 1 Returns all parameters except calibration parameters C0 (Pr. 900) to C7 (Pr. 905) to the initial values.
REMARKS Refer to the list of parameters on page 310 for availability of parameter clear.
and are displayed alternately ... Why? The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)). 2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Turn to read another parameter.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press to show the setting again.
4.Turn until " " appears.
6.Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
The parameter number read previously appears.
257
All parameter clear
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.24 All parameter clear
POINT
Set "1" in ALLC parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. In addition, calibration parameters are not cleared.)
Setting Description 0 Not executed. 1 All parameters return to the initial values.
REMARKS Refer to the list of parameters on page 310 for availability of all parameter clear.
and are displayed alternately ... Why? The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)). 2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
Press to read another parameter.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press to show the setting again.
4.Turn until (all parameter
clear) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
The parameter number read previously appears.
258
Parameter copy and parameter verification
4.25 Parameter copy and parameter verification
4.25.1 Parameter copy
PCPY Setting Description 0 Cancel 1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel. 2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter. 3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 259.)
REMARKS When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-B,B3 series (A700 specifications) or parameter copy write is performed after
parameter read is stopped, "model error ( )" is displayed. Refer to the parameter list on page 310 and later for availability of parameter copy. When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or
check the values by parameter verification.
Multiple inverters and parameter settings can be copied.
appears...Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears...Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
Connect it during a stop.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker Parameter copy complete!!
6.Press to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
4.Press to to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Flicker Parameter copy complete!!
9.Press to write the parameters copied to
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
3.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
5.Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
Flickers for about 30s
The frequency flickers for about 30s
About 30s later
10.When copy is completed,
" " and " " flicker.
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power off once, before starting operation.
7.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
turn to change it to " ".
The parameter number previously read appears.
259
Parameter copy and parameter verification
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
4.25.2 Parameter verification
and flicker alternately Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or less and 75K or more. 1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection. 2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 61, Pr. 70, Pr. 80, Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 , Pr. 158, Pr. 557, Pr. 859, Pr. 893.
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
REMARKS When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), "model error ( )" is displayed.
flickers ... Why? Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
55K or less 75K or more Pr. 989 Setting 10 100
Hold down to verify.
2.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
7.Press to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
1.Replace the operation panel on the
inverter to be verified.
Replace it during a stop.
Flicker Parameter verification complete!!
4.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
8.It there is no difference, and
flicker to complete verification.
Flickers for about 30s
Flickering
If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and flicker.
The parameter number read previously appears.
5.Press to read the currently set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
260
Check and clear of the alarm history
4.26 Check and clear of the alarm history (1) Check for the alarm (major fault) history
Alarm history
Monitor/frequency setting
[Operation panel is used for operation]
Parameter setting
[Parameter setting change]
[Operation for displaying alarm history]
Eight past alarms can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm exists, is displayed.
Output current
Flickering
Output voltage
Flickering
Flickering
Flickering
Press the setting dial.
Press the setting dial.
Press the setting dial.
Energization time
Alarm history number (The number of past alarms is displayed.)
Flickering
Output frequency
Flickering Flickering
261
Check and clear of the alarm history
4 PA
R A
M ET
ER S
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
The alarm history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Alarm history clear. (The alarm history is not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection)
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
3. appears.
Flicker Alarm history clear complete!!
6.Press to set.
4.Press to read the currently set value.
" "(initial value) appears.
Press to show the setting again.
Press twice to show the next parameter.
Press to read another parameter.
5.Turn to change it to the
setting value " ".
The parameter number previously read appears.
262
MEMO
263
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the basic "PROTECTIVE FUNCTION" for use of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
5.1 Reset method of protective function........................264 5.2 List of alarm display ................................................265 5.3 Causes and corrective actions ................................266 5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual
characters ...............................................................278 5.5 Check first when you have troubles ........................279
264
Reset method of protective function
When an alarm (major failures) occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications. If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales representative. Retention of alarm output signal......... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is
opened at the activation of the protective function, the inverter's control power will be lost and the alarm output will not be held.
Alarm display...................................... When the protective function is activated, the operation panel display automatically switches to the above indication.
Resetting method ............................... When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset, therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 264.)
When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation. Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter alarm displays are roughly divided as below.
(1) Error Message A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR- PU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not shut off output.
(2) Warnings The inverter does not shut off output even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a major fault.
(3) Minor fault The inverter does not shut off output.You can also output a minor fault signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Major fault When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
5.1 Reset method of protective function (1) Resetting the inverter The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Operation 1: ..... Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(Enabled only when the inverter protective function is activated (major fault) (Refer to page 270 for major fault.))
Operation 2:...... Switch power off once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3: ..... Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset status.)
ON
OFF
Inverter
RES
SD
265
List of alarm display
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
5.2 List of alarm display
*1 If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on the FR-PU04.
*2 Appears only for the FR-B3 series.
Operation Panel Indication Name Refer
to
E rr
or m
es sa
ge
E - - - Alarm history 260
HOLD Operation panel lock 266
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error 266
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error 267
Err. Error 267
W ar
ni ng
s
OL Stall prevention (overcurrent) 268
oL Stall prevention (overvoltage) 268
RB Regenerative brake pre- alarm 269
TH Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm 269
PS PU stop 268
MT Maintenance signal output 269
CP Parameter copy 269
M in
or fa
ul t
FN Fan fault 269
M aj
or fa
ul t
E.OC1 Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration 270
E.OC2 Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed 270
E.OC3 Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop 270
E.OV1 Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration 270
E.OV2 Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
271
E.OV3 Regenerative overvoltage shut- off during deceleration or stop 271
E.THT Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) 271
E.THM Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) 271
E.FIN Fin overheat 271
E.IPF Instantaneous power failure 272
E.BE Brake transistor alarm detection 272
E.UVT Undervoltage 272
E.ILF*1 Input phase failure 272
E.OLT Stall prevention 272
to
to
M aj
or fa
ul t
E.GF Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent 273
E.LF Output phase failure 273
E.OHT External thermal relay operation *2
273
E.PTC*1 PTC thermistor operation 273
E.OPT Option alarm 273
E.OP3 Communication option alarm 273
E. 1 to E. 3 Option alarm 274
E.PE Parameter storage device alarm 274
E.PUE PU disconnection 274
E.RET Retry count excess 274
E.PE2*1 Parameter storage device alarm 274
/ /
E. 6 / E. 7 /
E.CPU CPU error 275
E.CTE Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
275
E.P24 24VDC power output short circuit 276
E.CDO*1 Output current detection value exceeded 276
E.IOH*1 Inrush current limit circuit alarm 276
E.SER*1 Communication error (inverter) 277
E.AIE*1 Analog input error 277
E.EP*2 Encoder phase error 276 E.MB1
to E.MB7
Brake sequence error 275
E.OS Overspeed occurence 275
E.ECT Signal loss detection 276
E.13 Internal circuit error 277
Operation Panel Indication Name Refer
to
to
to
266
Causes and corrective actions
5.3 Causes and corrective actions (1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off. Operation Panel
Indication HOLD
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is made invalid. (Refer to page 255.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation Panel Indication Er1
Name Write disable error
Description
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable parameter write.
2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped. 3. Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped 4. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
Check point 1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to page 179.) 2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 80.) 3. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Operation Panel Indication Er2
Name Write error during operation
Description When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
Check point 1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 179.) 2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
Corrective action 1. Set "2" in Pr. 77. 2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel Indication Er3
Name Calibration error Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close. Check point Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 172.)
Operation Panel Indication Er4
Name Mode designation error Description You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
Check point 1. Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode". 2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 179.)
Corrective action 1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page
179.) 2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
267
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
Operation Panel Indication rE1
Name Parameter read error Description An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading. Check point --------------
Corrective action Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 258.) Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE2
Name Parameter write error
Description 1. You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation. 2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
Corrective action 1. After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 258.) 2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE3
Name Parameter verification error
Description 1. Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different. 2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check point Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
Corrective action 1. Press to continue verification.
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 259.) 2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication rE4
Name Model error
Description 1. A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy. 2. When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
Check point 1. Check that the verified inverter is the same model. 2. Check that the power is not turned off or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
Corrective action 1. Use the same model (FR-B, B3 series(A700 specifications)) for parameter copy and verification. 2. Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel Indication Err.
Description
1. The RES signal is on 2. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector) 3. When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning on of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
Corrective action 1. Turn off the RES signal. 2. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
268
Causes and corrective actions
(2) Warnings When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. Operation Panel
Indication OL FR-PU04 FR-PU07 OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
Description
During acceleration
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.
During constant- speed operation
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
During deceleration
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.
Check point
1. Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small. 2. Check that the load is not too heavy. 3. Are there any failure in peripheral devices? 4. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action
1. Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 88.) 2. Reduce the load weight. 3. Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
Operation Panel Indication oL FR-PU04
FR-PU07 oL
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
Description During deceleration
If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As soon as the regenerative energy has decreased, deceleration resumes.
If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to prevent overvoltage shut-off. (Refer to page 244.)
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction. Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to page 244.)
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Operation Panel Indication PS FR-PU04
FR-PU07 PS
Name PU stop
Description Stop with of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr.
75, refer to page 177.)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal off and release with .
269
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
(3) Minor fault When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. You can also output a minor fault signal by making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 125.))
Operation Panel Indication RB FR-PU04
FR-PU07 RB
Name Regenerative brake pre-alarm
Description
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs. The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 125) Appears only for the 75K or more.
Check point Check that the brake resistor duty is not high. Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
Corrective action Increase the deceleration time. Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.
Operation Panel Indication TH FR-PU04
FR-PU07 TH
Name Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm
Description
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload shut-off (E. THM) occurs. The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 125)
Check point 1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration. 2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 96.)
Corrective action 1. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times. 2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 96.)
Operation Panel Indication MT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 MT Name Maintenance signal output
Description Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
Check point The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time setting. (Refer to page 249.)
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erraces the signal.
Operation Panel Indication CP FR-PU04
FR-PU07 CP Name Parameter copy
Description Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more.
Check point Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.61, Pr.70, Pr.80, Pr.82, Pr.90 to Pr.94, Pr.158, Pr.557, Pr.859 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
Operation Panel Indication FN FR-PU04
FR-PU07 FN
Name Fan fault
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault. Corrective action Check for fan fault. Please contact your sales representative.
270
Causes and corrective actions
(4) Major fault When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
Operation Panel Indication E.OC1 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OC During Accs
Name Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point
1. Check for sudden acceleration. 2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application. 3. Check for output short circuit. 4. Check that stall prevention operation is correct. 5. Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent due to increase in motor current occurs.)
Corrective action
1. Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter. If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur. 4. Perform a correct stall prevention operation. (Refer to page 74.)
Operation Panel Indication E.OC2 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OC
Name Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point 1. Check for sudden load change. 2. Check for output short circuit. 3. Check that stall prevention operation is correct
Corrective action 1. Keep load stable. 2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit. 3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to page 74.)
Operation Panel Indication E.OC3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OC During Dec
Name Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop
Description When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated inverter current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point 1. Check for sudden speed reduction. 2. Check for output short circuit. 3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake. 4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action 1. Increase the deceleration time. 2. Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit. 3. Check the mechanical brake operation. 4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.(Refer to page 74.)
Operation Panel Indication E.OV1 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OV During Acc
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
Corrective action Decrease the acceleration time. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to page 244.)
271
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
*1 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
Operation Panel Indication E.OV2 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stedy Spd OV
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden load change.
Corrective action
Keep load stable. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to page 244.) Use the regeneration unit as required. When using the regeneration unit with 55kW or less, another
explosion-proof test is necessary.
Operation Panel Indication E.OV3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OV During Dec
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
Description If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
Corrective action
Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
Decrease the braking duty. Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to page 244.) Use the regeneration unit as required. When using the regeneration unit with 55kW or less, another
explosion-proof test is necessary.
Operation Panel Indication E.THT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Inv. Overload
Name Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description If a current not less than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur (220% or less), inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic thermal relay to be activated to stop the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (overload immunity 150% 60s)
Check point Check the motor for use under overload. Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel Indication E.THM FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Motor Overload
Name Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the temperature reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output when the temperature reaches the specified value. When running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor, provide a thermal relay on the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Check point 1. Check the motor for use under overload. 2. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action 1. Reduce the load weight. 2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor. 3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to page 74.)
Operation Panel Indication E.FIN FR-PU04
FR-PU07 H/Sink O/Temp
Name Fin overheat
Description
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output. The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat protection operation temperature. For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or "126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 125)
Check point 1. Check for too high ambient temperature. 2. Check for heatsink clogging. 3. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that is displayed on the operation panel.)
Corrective action 1. Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications. 2. Clean the heatsink. 3. Replace the cooling fan.
272
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication E.IPF FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Inst. Pwr. Loss
Name Instantaneous power failure
Description
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the alarm warning output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/ deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power restoration. When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 148)
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
Corrective action Remedy the instantaneous power failure. Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure. Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to page 148.)
Operation Panel Indication E.BE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Br. Cct. Fault
Name Brake transistor alarm detection Appears only for the 75K or more.
Description This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
Check point Reduce the load inertia. Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.
Operation Panel Indication E.UVT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Under Voltage
Name Undervoltage
Description
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition, the motor torque wiil be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage decreases below about 150VAC (300VAC for the 400V class), this function stops the inverter output. When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated. When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 148)
Check point 1. Check for start of large-capacity motor. 2. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1.
Corrective action 1. Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply. 2. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E.ILF FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Input phase loss Name Input phase failure
Description This alarm is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection and one phase of the three phase power input opens. (Refer to page 158.)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Repair a brake portion in the cable. Check the Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection setting.
Operation Panel Indication E.OLT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Stll Prev STP ( OL shown during stall prevention operation)
Name Stall prevention
Description If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, an alarm (E.OLT) appears to shutoff the inverter output. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
Check point Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to page 75.) Check that the Pr. 865 Low speed detection values are correct. (Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention
operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
Corrective action Reduce the load weight. Change the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr. 865 Low speed detection values. (Check the Pr. 22
Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
273
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
*2 Functions only when any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) is set to OH.
Operation Panel Indication E.GF FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Ground Fault
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
Description This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable. Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E.LF FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Name Output phase failure
Description This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) opens.
Check point Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.) Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
Corrective action Wire the cables properly. Check the Pr. 251 Output phase failure protection selection setting.
Operation Panel Indication E.OHT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 OH Fault
Name External thermal relay operation *2
Description If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Check point Check for motor overheating. Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
Corrective action Reduce the load and operating duty. Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
Operation Panel Indication E.PTC FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PTC activated Name PTC thermistor operation
Description Appears when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input connected to the terminal AU.
Check point Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal protector. Check the motor for operation under overload. Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to page 98, 118.)
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel Indication E.OPT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Option Fault
Name Option alarm
Description Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when a high power factor converter is connected. Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high power factor converter (MT-HC) is connected.
Corrective action
Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring. The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative. Check for connection of the plug-in option. Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
Operation Panel Indication E.OP3 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Option slot alarm 3
Name Communication option alarm Description Stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
Check point Check for a wrong option function setting and operation. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. Check for a brake in the communication cable. Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
Corrective action Check the option function setting, etc. Connect the plug-in option securely. Check the connection of communication cable.
274
Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel Indication
E. 1 to E. 3
FR-PU04 FR-PU07 Fault 1 to Fault 3
Name Option alarm
Description Stops the inverter output if a contact faullt or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs or if a communication option is fitted to the connector 1 or 2. Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point
1. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely. (1 to 3 indicate the option connector numbers.)
2. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter. 3. Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
Corrective action
1. Connect the plug-in option securely. 2. Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative or distributor.
3. Fit the communication option to the connector 3. 4. Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
Operation Panel Indication E.PE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Corrupt Memry
Name Parameter storage device alarm (control circuit board) Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure) Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative. When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.
Operation Panel Indication E.PE2 FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PR storage alarm Name Parameter storage device alarm (main circuit board)
Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure) Check point
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E.PUE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 PU Leave Out
Name PU disconnection
Description
This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector. This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
Check point Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly. Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
Operation Panel Indication E.RET FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Retry No Over
Name Retry count excess
Description If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the inverter output.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
to
275
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
Operation Panel Indication
E. 6 FR-PU04 FR-PU07
Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
E.CPU CPU Fault
Name CPU error Description Stops the inverter output if the communication error of the built-in CPU occurs. Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel Indication E.CTE FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.CTE Name Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
Description
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made. To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.
Check point 1. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable. 2. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
Corrective action 1. Check the PU and cable. 2. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
Operation Panel Indication E.MB1 to 7
FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault
Name Brake sequence error
Description The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence. Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.
Operation Panel Indication E.OS FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Overspeed occurrence
Name Overspeed occurence
Description Appears when the motor speed reaches and exceedes the overspeed setting level under encoder feedback control.
Check point Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct. Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
Corrective action Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly. Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
to
276
Causes and corrective actions
* Appears only for the FR-B3 series.
Operation Panel Indication E.ECT FR-PU04
FR-PU07 No encoder signal
Name Signal loss detection
Description Stops the inverter output when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder feedback control.
Check point
Check for the encoder signal loss. Check that the encoder specifications are correct. Check for a loose connector. Check that the switch setting of the FR-A7AP is correct. Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Or, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
Corrective action
Remedy the signal loss. Use an encoder that meets the specifications. Make connection securely. Make a switch setting of the FR-A7AP correctly. Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the
power is supplied to the inverter. If the power is supplied to the encoder after the inverter, check that the encoder signal is securely sent and set "0" in Pr. 376.
Operation Panel Indication E.EP FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 E.EP Name Encoder phase error *
Description The rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the encoder during offline auto tuning.
Check point Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable. Check for wrong setting of Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction.
Corrective action Perform connection and wiring securely. Change the Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction value.
Operation Panel Indication E.P24 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 E.P24
Name 24VDC power output short circuit
Description When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output. At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
Check point Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output. Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel Indication E.CDO FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 OC detect level Name Output current detection value exceeded
Description This function is activated when the output current exceeds the Pr. 150 Output current detection level setting.
Check point Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr. 166 Output current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to page 132.)
Operation Panel Indication E.IOH FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Inrush overheat Name Inrush current limit circuit alarm
Description This function is activated when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit failure
Check point Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
277
Causes and corrective actions
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
Operation Panel Indication E.SER FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 VFD Comm error Name Communication error (inverter)
Description This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring. Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
Operation Panel Indication E.AIE FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Analog in error Name Analog input error
Description Appears when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to current input.
Check point Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (Refer to page 166.)
Corrective action Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection to voltage input.
Operation Panel Indication E.13 FR-PU04
FR-PU07 Fault 13
Name Internal circuit error Description Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.EP, E.OD, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE are activated when using the FR-
PU04, "Fault 14" appears. Also when the alarm history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
If alarms other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
278
Correspondences between digital and actual characters
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel.
Actual Digital
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Actual Digital
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
D
Actual Digital
M
N
O
o
P
T
U
V
r
-
S
279
Check first when you have troubles
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
5.5 Check first when you have troubles
POINT
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then reset the required parameter values and check again.
Check that Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is not selected.
5.5.1 Motor does not start
1) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided). Check that the motor is connected properly. Check that the jumper across P/+-P1 is connected.
2) Check the input signals
Check that start signal is input. Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input simultaneously. Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. (When the frequency command is 0Hz and the start command is entered, FWD or REV LED on the operation panel flickers.) Check that the AU signal is on when terminal 4 is used for frequency setting signal. Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on. Check that the CS signal is not OFF with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57 "9999"). Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely. (Refer to page 29)
3) Check the parameter settings
Check that the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. Check that the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are correct. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is not greater than the running frequency. Check that frequency settings of each running frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are not zero. Check that especially the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is not zero.
4) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the shaft is not locked.
Check that the Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting. Check that the Pr.359 Encoder rotation direction setting is correct during the encoder feedback control. When "REV" is lit on the operation panel under the forward rotation command, set "1" in Pr.359.
Check that the voltage/current input switch is correctly set for analog input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA).
5.5.2 Motor generates abnormal noise
Check for any mechanical looseness. Contact the customer support of the motor manufacturer.
5.5.3 Motor generates heat abnormally Is the fan for the motor is running? (Check for accumulated dust.) Check that the load is not too heavy. Lighten the load. Check that the inverter output voltages (U, V, W) balanced. Was the motor type set? Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor. When using any FR-B3 series, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 70.)
5.5.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct. Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly. (Refer to page 26)
280
Check first when you have troubles
5.5.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.) Check that the Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are correct Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (Use shielded cables) Check that the load is not too heavy. Check that the Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are correct.
5.5.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short. Check that the load is not too heavy.
5.5.7 Motor current is large Check that the load is not too heavy.
5.5.8 Speed does not increase Check that the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is correct. Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier in winter.)
3) Others
5.5.9 Speed varies during operation
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying. 2) Check the input signals
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying. Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. Input filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input filter time constant. Check for a malfunction due to undesirable currents when the transistor output unit is connected. (Refer to page 30)
Check that the settings of Pr. 80 Motor capacity and Pr. 81 Number of motor poles are correct to the inverter capacity and motor capacity under FR-B3 series.
Check that the wiring length is not too long for V/F control.(FR-B series only)
For the FR-B3 series, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to pege 70)
When the FR-B3 series, encoder feedback control is exercised, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal operation and is not a fault.
5.5.10 Operation mode is not changed properly
1) Inspection of load Check that the STF or STR signal is off. When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed.
2) Parameter setting Check the Pr. 79 setting. When the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is placed in the external operation mode at input power-on. At this time, press on the operation panel (press
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation mode. For the other values (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is limited accordingly.
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
281
Check first when you have troubles
5
PR O
TE C
TI VE
F U
N C
TI O
N S
5.5.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating Check that the operation panel is connected to the inverter securely.
5.5.12 POWER lamp is not lit Check that wiring is securely performed and installation is correct.
5.5.13 Parameter write cannot be performed Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external operation mode.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
282
MEMO
283
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
6 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter provides the "PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
6.1 Inspection item ........................................................284 6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and
powers.....................................................................291
284
Inspection item
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
Precautions for maintenance and inspection For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/ of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
6.1 Inspection item
6.1.1 Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation. (1) Motor operation fault (2) Improper installation environment (3) Cooling system fault (4) Unusual vibration and noise (5) Unusual overheat and discoloration During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.
6.1.2 Periodic inspection Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. Consult us for periodic inspection. 1) Check for cooling system fault .................Clean the air filter, etc. 2) Tightening check and retightening ...........The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc. Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 20)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage. 4) Measure insulation resistance. 5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
285
Inspection item
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
6.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter. *2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
A re
a of
In
sp ec
tio n
Inspection Item Description
Interval Corrective Action at Alarm Occurrence
Cu st
om er
's
Ch ec
k
D ai
ly
Pe rio
di c
*2
General
Surrounding environment
Check the ambient temperature, humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc Improve emvironment
Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise Check alarm location and retighten
Power supply voltage
Check that the main circuit voltages and control voltages are normal *1 Inspect the power supply
Main circuit
General
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminal). Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts. Retighten (3)Check for overheat traces on the parts. Contact the manufacturer (4)Check for stain Clean
Conductors, cables (1)Check conductors for distortion. (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
Transformer/reactor Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in whining sound.
Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Terminal block Check for damage. Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge. Contact the manufacturer (3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 286)
Relay/contactor Check that the operation is normal and no chatter is heard. Contact the manufacturer
Resistor (1)Check for crack in resistor insulation. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for a break in the cable. Contact the manufacturer
Control circuit
protective circuit
Operation check
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases with the inverter operated alone is balanced Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and display circuits in a sequence protective operation test.
Contact the manufacturer
P ar
ts c
he ck
Overall (1)Check for unusual odor and discoloration. Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer. (2)Check for serious rust development Contact the manufacturer
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deformation trance Contact the manufacturer
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 286.)
Cooling system
Cooling fan (1)Check for unusual vibration and noise. Replace the fan (2)Check for loose screws and bolts Retighten (3)Check for stain Clean
Heatsink (1)Check for clogging Clean (2)Check for stain Clean
Air filter, etc. (1)Check for clogging Clean or replace (2)Check for stain Clean or replace
Display Indication
(1)Check that display is normal. Contact the manufacturer (2)Check for stain Clean
Meter Check that reading is normal Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
Load motor Operation check Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
operation noise Stop the device and contact the manufacturer.
286
Inspection item
6.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the inrush current limit circuit is near to give an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Refer to page 247 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.
6.1.5 Checking the inverter and converter modules (1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W). (2) Prepare a tester. (Use 100 range.)
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+ and N/, and check for continuity.
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
Parts Judgement Level Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10% life remaining Inrush current limit circuit Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left) Cooling fan Less than 40% of the predetermined speed
CAUTION 1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged. 2. At the time of discontinuity, due to the smothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate . At the time of continuity, the
measured value is several to several ten's-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the same, the modules are without fault.
Tester Polarity Measured Value
Tester Polarity Measured Value
C on
ve rte
r m
od ul
e
D1 R/L1 P/+ Discontinuity
D4 R/L1 N/ Continuity
P/+ R/L1 Continuity N/ R/L1 Discontinuity
D2 S/L2 P/+ Discontinuity
D5 S/L2 N/ Continuity
P/+ S/L2 Continuity N/ S/L2 Discontinuity
D3 T/L3 P/+ Discontinuity
D6 T/L3 N/ Continuity
P/+ T/L3 Continuity N/ T/L3 Discontinuity
In ve
rte r
m od
ul e
TR1 U P/+ Discontinuity
TR4 U N/ Continuity
P/+ U Continuity N/ U Discontinuity
TR3 V P/+ Discontinuity
TR6 V N/ Continuity
P/+ V Continuity N/ V Discontinuity
TR5 W P/+ Discontinuity
TR2 W N/ Continuity
P/+ W Continuity N/ W Discontinuity
Converter module Inverter module
D1 D2 D3
D4 D5 D6
TR1 TR3 TR5
TR4 TR6 TR2
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
C
P/+
N/
287
Inspection item
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
6.1.6 Cleaning Always run the inverter in a clean status. When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
6.1.7 Replacement of parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices. The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically. Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1 Replacement years for when the yearly average ambient temperature is 40C (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
*2 Output current : equivalent to rating current of the Mitsubishi explosion-proof motor (4 poles)
CAUTION Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off. The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
Part Name Standard Replacement Interval *1 Description Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace (as required) On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years Replace the board (as required)
Relays as required
CAUTION For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
288
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
CAUTION For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Type Fan Type Units FR-B FR-B3
200V
1500 to 3700 (N)1500 to (N)3700 MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 5.5K to 11K (N)5.5K to (N)11K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2 15K (N)15K to 18.5K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
22K (N)22K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K to 55K (N)30K, (N)37K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2 75K - MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 3
400V
2200, 3700 (N)H2200, (N)H3700 MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1 7.5K, 15K (N)H5.5K to (N)H15K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2 22K (N)H18.5K, (N)H22K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
- (N)H30K MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01 2 37K, 55K (N)H37K
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2
75K, 110K - 3 FR-B-750, FR-B3-(N)400, 750, FR-B3-(N)H400 to 1500
Removal (FR-B-1500 to 75K(200V), FR-B-2200 to 110K(400V), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 37K, FR-B3-(N)H2200 to 37K) 1)Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
2)Disconnect the fan connectors. 3)Remove the fan.
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V) FR-B-2200, 3700(400V) FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V) FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
FR-B-30K or more(200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to the table above)
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V) FR-B-2200, 3700(400V) FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V) FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
FR-B-30K or more(200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
Fan cover Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
Fan Fan
Fan connection connector
Fan connection connector
Fan connection connector
* *
289
Inspection item
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
Reinstallation (FR-B-1500 to 75K(200V), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 37K, FR-B-2200 to 110K(400V), FR-B3-(N)H2200 to 37K) 1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
2) Reconnect the fan connectors. When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
3)Reinstall the fan cover.
AIR FLOW
CAUTION Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
FR-B-5.5 to 11K(200V), FR-B-5.5K to 15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)5.5K to 11K, FR-B3-(N)H5.5K to 15KFR-B-1500 to 3700(200V), FR-B-2200, 3700(400V)
FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700, FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
FR-B-22K(200V) FR-B3-(N)22K
FR-B-15K(200V), FR-B-22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)15K, 18.5K, FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
FR-B-30K(200V), FR-B-30K(400V) FR-B3-(N)30K or more, FR-B3-(N)H30K or more
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
FR-B-1500 to 3700(200V), FR-B-2200, 3700(400V)
FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700, FR-B3-(N)H2200, 3700
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
FR-B-5.5K to 22K(200V), FR-B-7.5K to 22K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K to 22K
2. Insert hooks until you hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks into holes.
FR-B-30K(200V), FR-B-30K(400V)
FR-B3-(N)(H)30K or more
290
Inspection item
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
(3) Smoothing capacitors A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the ambient temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years. The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows: 1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion 2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack. 3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 247 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor. (4) Relays To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).
6.1.8 Inverter replacement
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring cover of the inverter. 1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the mounting screws.
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement. After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the original position.
CAUTION Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and such to ensure safety.
Top cover
291
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement data depends on the instruments used and circuits measured. When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the instruments given on the next page.
When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating. When measuring and indicating the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to utilize the AM-5 and FM-SD terminal output function of the inverter.
Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments
+ -
Ar
As
At
Vr
Vs
Vt
W11
W12
W13
Au
Av
Aw
Vu
Vv
Vw
W21
W22
V
U
V
W
Inverter
Three
phase
power
supply
To the motor
Instrument
types
Input voltage
Input current
Output voltage
Output current
: Moving-iron type
: Electrodynamometer type
: Moving-coil type
: Rectifier type
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
P/+ N/-
292
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
Measuring points and instruments
*1 Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. A tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately. *2 For the low acoustic noise FR-B3 series, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-current losses produced in metal parts
inside the instrument, leading to burnout. If the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long, the instrument and CT may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current.
*3 When the setting of Pr. 195 ABC1 terminal function selection is positive logic
Item Measuring Point Measuring Instrument Remarks (Reference Measured Value)
Power supply voltage V1
Across R/L1-S/ L2, S/L2-T/L3, T/ L3-R/L1
Moving-iron type AC voltmeter Commercial power supply Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to page 298)
Power supply side current I1
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 line currents Moving-iron type AC ammeter
Power supply side power P1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and R/L1-S/L2, S/L2-T/ L3, T/L3-R/L1
Electrodynamic type single-phase wattmeter P1=W11+W12+W13 (3-wattmeter method)
Power supply side power factor Pf1
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side power.
Output side voltage V2
Across U-V, V-W and W-U
Rectifier type AC voltage meter *1 (Moving-iron type cannot measure)
Difference between the phases is within 1% of the maximum output voltage.
Output side current I2
U, V and W line currents Moving-iron type AC ammeter *2 Difference between the phases is 10% or lower of
the rated inverter current. Output side power P2
U, V, W and U-V, V-W
Electrodynamic type single-phase wattmeter
P2 = W21 + W22 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)
Output side power factor Pf2
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
Converter output Across P/+-N/ Moving-coil type (such as tester) Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 V1 Frequency setting signal
Across 2, 4(+)-5
Moving-coil type (Tester and such may be used)
(Internal resistance: 50k or larger)
0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mA
"5" is common
Across 1(+)-5 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC Frequency setting power supply
Across 10 (+) -5 5.2VDC Across 10E(+)-5 10VDC
Frequency meter signal
Across AM(+)-5 Approximately 10VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)
Across FM(+)-SD
Approximately 5VDC at maximum frequency (without frequency meter)
Pulse width T1: Adjusted by C0 (Pr. 900)
Pulse cycle T2: Set by Pr. 55 (Valid for frequency monitoring only)
"SD" is common
Start signal Select signal
Across STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, AU, STOP, CS (+) -SD
When open 20 to 30VDC ON voltage: 1V or lessReset Across RES (+) -SD
Output stop Across MRS (+) -SD
Alarm signal Across A1-C1 Across B1-C1
Moving-coil type (such as tester)
Continuity check*3
Across A1-C1 Discontinuity Continuity Across B1-C1 Continuity Discontinuity
Pf1 = 100% P1
3 V1 I1
Pf2 = 100% P2
3 V2 I2
8VDC
T1
T2
293
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
6.2.1 Measurement of powers
Using an electro-dynamometer type meter, measure the power in both the input and output sides of the inverter using the two- or three-wattmeter method. As the current is liable to be imbalanced especially in the input side, it is recommended to use the three-wattmeter method. Examples of measured value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below. An error will be produced by difference between measuring instruments, e.g. power calculation type and two- or three-wattmeter type three-phase wattmeter. When a CT is used in the current measuring side or when the meter contains a PT on the voltage measurement side, an error will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT.
6.2.2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT
(1) Inverter input side As the input side voltage has a sine wave and it is extremely small in distortion, accurate measurement can be made with an ordinary AC meter.
(2) Inverter output side Since the output side voltage has a PWM-controlled rectangular wave, always use a rectifier type voltmeter. A needle type tester can not be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value. A moving-iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the fundamental wave. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter- controlled voltage itself. Hence, that value is accurate and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel.
(3) PT No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of the inverter.)
[Measurement conditions] Constant-torque (100%) load, constant-power at 60Hz or more. 3.7kW, 4-pole motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%.
[Measurement conditions] Constant-torque (100%) load, constant-power at 60Hz or more. 3.7kW, 4-pole motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%.
Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter output power
3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120Hz
60
80
100
120 %
3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120Hz
60
80
100
120 %
294
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6.2.3 Measurement of currents
Use a moving-iron type meter on both the input and output sides of the inverter. However, when using the FR-B3 series low noise type, do not use that meter since an eddy-current losses produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will increase and the meter may burn out. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type. As the inverter input side current is easily imbalanced, measurement of currents in all three phases is recommended. Correct values can not be measured in one or two phases. On the other hand, the phase imbalanced ratio of the output side current must be within 10%. When using a clamp ammeter, always use an effective value detection type. A mean value detection type produces a large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value. The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate if the output frequency varies, and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel. An example of the measured value difference produced by different measuring meters is shown below.
6.2.4 Use of CT and transducer
A CT may be used in both the input and output sides of the inverter, but the one used should have the largest possible VA ability because an error will increase if the frequency gets lower. When using a transducer, use the effective value calculation type which is immune to harmonics.
6.2.5 Measurement of inverter input power factor
Use the effective power and apparent power to calculate the inverter input power factor. A power-factor meter can not indicate an exact value.
[Measurement conditions] Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
[Measurement conditions] Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
Example of measuring inverter input current Example of measuring inverter output current
Total power factor of the inverter = Effective power Apparent power
= Three-phase input power found by 3-wattmeter method
V (power supply voltage) I (input current effective value)
120
100
80
60
0 60Hz4020
%
Moving-iron type
Clamp-on wattmeter current measurement
Clamp meter
Clip AC power meter
120
100
80
60
0 60Hz4020
%
Moving-iron type
Clip AC power meter
Clamp-on wattmeter current measurement
Clamp meter
3
295
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6
PR EC
A U
TI O
N S
FO R
M A
IN TE
N A
N C
E A
N D
IN SP
EC TI
O N
6.2.6 Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ - N/-)
The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals P/+ - N/- and can be measured with a moving-coil type meter (tester). Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage, approximately 270V to 300V (approximately 540V to 600V for the 400V class) is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases when a load is connected. When regenerative energy is returned from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400V to 450V (800V to 900V for the 400V class) maximum.
6.2.7 Measurement of inverter output frequency
A pulse train proportional to the output frequency is output across the frequency meter signal output terminal FM- SD of the inverter. This pulse train output can be counted by a frequency counter, or a meter (moving-coil type voltmeter) can be used to read the mean value of the pulse train output voltage. When a meter is used to measure the output frequency, approximately 5VDC is indicated at the maximum frequency. For detailed specifications of the frequency meter signal output terminal FM, refer to page 145.
6.2.8 Insulation resistance test using megger For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
6.2.9 Pressure test Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.
CAUTION Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the
inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter. For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.
U V W
Inverter
500VDC
megger
Power
supply IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Explosion- proof motor
Earth (ground)
296
MEMO
297
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
7 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "SPECIFICATIONS" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment
7.1 FR-B Series Specifications......................................298 7.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications....................................300 7.3 Outline dimension drawings ....................................302
298
FR-B Series Specifications
7.1 FR-B Series Specifications
7.1.1 FR-B series ratings FR-B series (suitable for inverter drive reduced-torque explosion-proof type motor)
200V class
400V class
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Pressure-resistant, explosion-Proof motor. The motors are XF-(N)E and TH series.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. *3 The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply. *5 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). *6 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00). *7 FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Type FR-B- 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K 75K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1
60Hz standard reduced-torque 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75
50Hz standard reduced-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 75
60Hz standard constant torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
60Hz standard constant torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 34 44 55 67 82 110 Rated current (A) 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 90 115 145 175 215 288 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Three-phase 200V
Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
150% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 2%ED
20% torque/continuous 10%
torque/ continuous
Po w
er s
up pl
y Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5% Power supply capacity (kVA) *5
Reduced torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 80 100 110 Constant torque type - 1.5 - 2.2 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20) *6 Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13.0 14.0 23.0 35.0 35.0 58.0 70.0
Type FR-B- 750 1500 2200 3700 7.5K 15K 22K 37K 55K 75K 90K 110K
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1
60Hz standard reduced-torque 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
50Hz standard reduced-torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75 90 110
60Hz standard constant torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 75 90
60Hz standard constant torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45 55 75
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 13 23.6 32.8 54 84 110 137 165 Rated current (A) 2.5 4 6 9 17 31 44 71 110 144 180 216 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Three-phase 380V to 440V Regenerative braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
100% torque/ 2%ED 20% torque/continuous 10% torque/
continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 400V 50Hz, 400/440V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz Permissible frequency fluctuation 5% Power supply capacity (kVA) *5
Reduced torque type 0.8 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 41 52 66 100 144 180 216 Constant torque type - 1.5 - 4.5 5.5 - 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 100 144 180
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed typ (IP20) *6 Open type (IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 7.5 13.0 35.0 37.0 50.0 57.0 72.0
2
299
FR-B Series Specifications
7
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
7.1.2 FR-B series common specifications
*1 Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted *2 Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). *3 Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04). *4 Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
C on
tro l s
pe ci
fic at
io ns
Control method Sine wave PWN control (V/F constant control) Output frequency range 0.2 to 120Hz (22K or less), 0.2 to 60Hz (30K or more)
Frequency setting resolution
Analog input 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11bit)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency accuracy
Analog input Within 0.2% of the max. output frequency (25C10C) Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency is always 50Hz Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation at 3Hz (fixed) is selectable Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
O pe
ra tio
n sp
ec ifi
ca tio
ns
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Digital input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signals
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (MT-HC connection), MT-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal, PID control enable terminal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, pre- excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, and DC feeding operation cancel.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Operational functions
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on- contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, regeneration avoidance, operation mode selection, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), speed feed forward.
O ut
pu t s
ig na
ls
Operating status
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, orientation completion*1, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average value monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR (option)
In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
Pulse/analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output.
In di
ca tio
n PU (FR-DU07/ FR-PU07/ FR-PU04)
Operating status
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*2, output terminal option monitor*2, option fitting status*3, terminal assignment status*3, feed back pulse*1.
Alarm definition Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3
Protective/warning function
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*2, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm.
En vi
ro nm
en t Ambient temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing) Storage temperature*4 -20C to +65C Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less. (conforms to JIS C 60068-2-6)
300
FR-B3 Series Specifications
7.2 FR-B3 Series Specifications
7.2.1 FR-B3 series ratings
FR-B3 series (suitable for inverter drive constant-torque explosion-proof type motor)
200V class
400V class
*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Pressure-resistant, explosion-Proof motor. For FR-B3-(H)400 to 37K, the motors are XF-(N)ECA-2 series. For FR-B3-N(H)400 to 37K, the motors are XF-(N)ECA-1 series.
*2 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class. *3 The % value of the overload current rating indicates the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. *4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.
However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply. *5 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables). *6 When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00). *7 FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
Type FR-B3-(N)- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55 Rated current (A) 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Output according to a pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Regenerati ve braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty
150% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 3%ED
100% torque/ 2%ED
20% torque/continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 200V 50Hz, 200/220V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 180 to 220V 50Hz, 180 to 242V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *5 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20)*6 Open type
(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13.0 13.0 14.0 23.0 35.0
Type FR-B3-(N)H- 400 750 1500 2200 3700 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
O ut
pu t
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 Rated current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 Overload current rating *3 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) Voltage *4 Output according to a pressure-resistant, explosion-proof motor Regenerati ve braking torque
Maximum value/ permissible duty 100% torque/2%ED 20% torque/continuous
P ow
er s
up pl
y
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 400V 50Hz,400/440V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 360 to 440V 50Hz, 360 to 484V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation 5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *5 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *7 Enclosed type (IP20)*6 Open type
(IP00) Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling Approx. mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 13.0 13.0 23.0 35.0
2
301
FR-B3 Series Specifications
7
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
7.2.2 FR-B3 series common specifications
*1 Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted *2 Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07). *3 Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04). *4 Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
C on
tro l s
pe ci
fic at
io ns
Control method Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among, advanced magnetic flux vector control). Output frequency range 0.2 to 120Hz
Frequency setting resolution
Analog input 0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to 10V/12bit) 0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to 5V/11bit)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency accuracy
Analog input Within 0.2% of the max. output frequency (25C10C) Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Constant torque up to 60Hz, constant output from 60Hz to the maximum frequency (When the rated motor frequency is set to 60Hz) Starting torque 200% 0.3Hz (0.4K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3Hz (5.5K or more) Acceleration/deceleration time setting
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 400% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
O pe
ra tio
n sp
ec ifi
ca tio
ns
Frequency setting signal
Analog input Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Digital input Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signals
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting, stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load torque high- speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding operation permission, and DC feeding operation cancel.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Operational functions
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), pre-excitation.
O ut
pu t s
ig na
ls
Operating status
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency, instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed) detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward rotation reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update timing, current average value monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1, reverse rotation output*1, low speed output, torque detection, minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR (option)
In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
Pulse/analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
In di
ca tio
n PU (FR-DU07/ FR-PU07/ FR-PU04)
Operating status
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed, overload, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, input terminal option monitor*2, output terminal option monitor*2, option fitting status*3, terminal assignment status*3, motor output
Alarm definition Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3
Protective/warning function
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation, PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm, communication alarm (inverter), opposite rotation deceleration error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake pre-alarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm*2, brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm.
En vi
ro nm
en t Ambient temperature -10C to +50C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing) Storage temperature*4 -20C to +65C Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.) Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2 or less. (conforms to JIS C 60068-2-6)
302
Outline dimension drawings
7.3 Outline dimension drawings 7.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings
FR-B-750 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)400, 750
FR-B-1500 to 3700 (200V class), FR-B3-(N)1500 to 3700 FR-B-750 to 3700 (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H400 to 3700
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
2-6 hole
2 6
0
2 4
5
7 .5
6
110 D 5
7 .5
95
D 1
Inverter Type D D1 FR-B3-(N)400 110 21 FR-B-750, FR-B3-(N)750 125 36
2 6
0
150
144
125
4 5
.5
6
140 57
.5 7
.5 2
4 5
2-6 hole
* The FR-B-750,1500, FR-B3-(N)H 400 to 1500 are not provided with a cooling fan.
303
Outline dimension drawings
7
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
FR-B-5.5K to 11K(200V class), FR-B3-(N)5.5K to 11K FR-B-7.5K,15K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)H5.5K to 15K
FR-B-15K,22K(200V class), FR-B3-(N)15K to 22K FR-B-22K(400V class), FR-B3-(N)H18.5K, 22K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
H 1 H
D 1
D
2-6 hole
7 .5
220
195
211
106
7 .5
Inverter Type H H1 D D1 FR-B-5.5K, 7.5K (200V), FR-B-7.5K (400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)5.5K, 7.5K
260 245 170 84
FR-B-11K(200V), FR-B-15K(400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)11K, 15K
300 285 190 101.5
10 230 250
3 8
0 1
0 1
0
4 0
0
190 10.5
1 0
1 .5
250
2-10 hole
304
Outline dimension drawings
FR-B-30K to 55K (200V class), FR-B3-(N)30K, 37K FR-B-37K, 55K (400V class), FR-B3-(N)H30K, 37K
FR-B-75K, 90K (400V class)
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
W2
W
W1 H
1 H
H 2
1 0
D
3.2
2-d hole
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 d D FR-B-30K (200V/400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)30K 325 270 10 550 530 10 10 195
FR-B-37K, 45K (200V), FR-B-37K, 55K (400V) FR-B3-(N)(H)37K 435 380 12 550 525 15 12 250
FR-B-55K (200V) 465 410 12 700 675 15 12 250
300
3.2
465
400
2-12hole
6 2
0
5 9
5 1
0 1
5
(for M6 screw) 4-installation hole
(for M6 screw) Earth (ground) terminal
Rating plate 2-terminal
E
P1 P P1, P
(for M12 bolt)
Within D
W1
H 1
H
1 0
W 2
DC Reactor Type
W W1 H H1 D Mass (Kg)
FR-HEL-H75K (FR-B-75K)
140 120 320 295 185 16
FR-HEL-H90K (FR-B-90K)
150 130 340 310 190 20
DC reactor supplied
305
Outline dimension drawings
7
SP EC
IF IC
AT IO
N S
FR-B-75K (200V class) FR-B-110K (400V class)
DC reactor supplied
(Unit: mm)
360
7 1
5 7
4 0
465 400
1 0
1 5
3.2
2-12 hole
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg) FR-HEL-75K (FR-B-75K) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17 FR-HEL-H110K (FR-B-110K) 150 130 340 310 195 M6 22
E
P1
P
P1
P
W1
Within D(for S screw)
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Earth (ground) terminal
Rating plate
(for M12 bolt)
2-terminal
H 1
H
1 0
W 2
306
Outline dimension drawings
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU04)
(Unit: mm)
2-M3 screw
Air- bleeding hole
78
5 0
4 4
723 3
81
3 3
16
25
3.2max
72
4 4
21
20
2 2
Panel
Cable
FR-DU07
Operation panel connection connector (FR-ADP)
27.8
6
80.3
(14.2) 2
.5 5
0 (11.45)
25.05
1 3
5
83
*1
*1
*1
*1
6 7
5 1
40
5 6 .8
5 7 .8
26.5
4-R1
4-4 hole
(Effective depth 5.0) M3 screw *2
26.5
40
Air-bleeding hole
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads.
5-4 hole
Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws threads.
40
23.75
11.75
8 1
.5
1.25
1 .5
1 31
7
16.5
1 .5
1 2
5
72 15 10.5
1 8
.5
40
8 0
48 24
13
2 0
2 1
.5
1 4
.5
5-M3 screw
Effective depth 4.5
307
APPENDICES
This chapter provides the "APPENDICES" of this product. Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
308
For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-B,B3 series (A500 specifications) (1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.) 2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.) 3)Plug-in options of the B,B3 series (A500 specifications) are not compatible 4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) can not be used. 5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP/FR-SW1-SETUP) can not be used.
(2) Wiring instructions 1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications) without removing
wiring. Note that the wiring cover (400 to 22K) is not compatible.
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications) can not be used with the FR-B, B3 series (A500 specifications) terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit) 1)For the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting
these parameters, the parameter name and setting range are not displayed. User initial value list and user clear of the HELP function can not be used.
2)For the FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications), many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all alarms are displayed as "Fault 14". When the alarm history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added alarm display will not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting can not be used. 4) User registration/clear (user group 2) can not be used. 5) Parameter copy/verification function can not be used.
Appendix 1 For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter
FR-B, B3 series (A500 specifications)
FR-B, B3 series (A700 specifications)
309
For customers who have replaced the older model with this inverter
(4) Main differences between the explosion proof inverter and standard inverter
Specifications FR-B3-(N) (FR-A700 specifications) FR-A700 Power supply
voltage 200V class 200V 50Hz 200/220V 60Hz 200V to 220V 50Hz 200V to 240V 60Hz 400V class 400V 50Hz 400/440V 60Hz 380 to 480V 50/60Hz
Maximum output frequency Limit according to the maximum operating frequency of the motor 400Hz
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Available (Advanced magnetic flux vector control operation is required) Available
Real sensorless vector control Not available Available DC brake operation Variable Available
Energy saving control selection Not available (due to advanced magnetic flux vector control) Available
PWM frequency Two types, standard(2kHz)/law noise (14.5kHz), are available Law noise(Variable)
310
*1 These instruction codes are used for parameter read and write by using Mitsubishi inverter protocol with the RS-485 communication. (Refer to page 201 for RS-485 communication)
*2 Validity and invalidity according to operation mode are as follows: :Usable parameter
:Unusable parameter " " indicates valid and "" indicates invalid of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
Symbols in the table indicate parameters which function when an option is mounted. ........ FR-A7AX, ......... FR-A7AY, ......... FR-A7AR, ......... FR-A7AP, ......... FR-A7NC, ........ FR-A7ND, ........ FR-A7NL, ......... FR-A7NP
Appendix 2 Control mode-based parameter (function) correspondence table and instruction code list
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0
7 Acceleration time 07 87 0
8 Deceleration time 08 88 0
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0
11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0C 8C 0
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0
17 MRS input selection 11 91 0
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0
22 Stall prevention operation level 16 96 0
23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
17 97 0
24 Multi-speed setting (speed4) 18 98 0
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0
27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0
28 Multi-speed input compensation selection 1C 9C 0
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0
30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0
34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0
36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0
311
37 Speed display 25 A5 0
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0
42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0
44 Second acceleration/ deceleration time 2C AC 0
45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0
48 Second stall prevention operation current 30 B0 0
49 Second stall prevention operation frequency 31 B1 0
50 Second output frequency detection 32 B2 0
52 DU/PU main display data selection 34 B4 0
54 FM terminal function selection 36 B6 0
55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0
56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0
57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0
58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0
59 Remote function selection 3B BB 0
61 Reference current 3D BD 0 62 Reference value at acceleration 3E BE 0 63 Reference value at dcceleration 3F BF 0 65 Retry selection 41 C1 0
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 42 C2 0
67 Number of retries at alarm occurrence 43 C3 0
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0
69 Retry count display erase 45 C5 0
70 Special regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0
71 Applied motor 47 C7 0
73 Analog input selection 49 C9 0
74 Input filter time constant 4A CA 0
75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection 4B CB 0
76 Alarm code output selection 4C CC 0
77 * Parameter write selection 4D CD 0
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0
79 * Operation mode selection 4F CF 0
80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0
81 Number of motor poles 51 D1 0
82 Motor excitation current 52 D2 0
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
312
83 Motor rated voltage 53 D3 0
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0
89 Speed control gain (magnetic flux vector) 59 D9 0
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0
91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0
92 Motor constant (L1) 5C DC 0
93 Motor constant (L2) 5D DD 0
94 Motor constant (X) 5E DE 0
96 Auto tuning setting/status 60 E0 0
110 Third acceleration/deceleration time 0A 8A 1
111 Third deceleration time 0B 8B 1
114 Third stall prevention operation current 0E 8E 1
115 Thrid stall prevention operation frequency 0F 8F 1
116 Third output frequency detection 10 90 1
117 PU communication station number 11 91 1
118 PU communication speed 12 92 1
119 PU communication stop bit length 13 93 1
120 PU communication parity check 14 94 1
121 Number of PU communication retries 15 95 1
122 PU communication check time interval 16 96 1
123 PU communication waiting time setting 17 97 1
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 18 98 1
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 19 99 1
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 1A 9A 1
127 PID control automatic switchover freqeuncy 1B 9B 1
128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1
129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1
130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1
131 PID upper limit 1F 9F 1
132 PID lower limit 20 A0 1
133 PID action set point 21 A1 1
134 PID differential time 22 A2 1
140 Backlash acceleration stopping frequency 28 A8 1
141 Backlash acceleration stopping time 29 A9 1
142 Backlash deceleration stopping frequency 2A AA 1
143 Backlash deceleration stopping time 2B AB 1
* Read and write from communication with PU connector only is enabled.
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
313
144 Speed setting switchover 2C AC 1
145 PU display language selection 2D AD 1 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input 30 B0 1
149 Stall prevention level at 10V input 31 B1 1
150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1
151 Output current detection signal delay time 33 B3 1
152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1
153 Zero current detection time 35 B5 1
154 Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention operation 36 B6 1
155 RT signal function validity condition selection 37 B7 1
156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1
157 OL signal output timer 39 B9 1
158 AM terminal function selection 3A BA 1
160 User group read selection 00 80 2
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 01 81 2
162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
02 82 2
163 First cushion time for restart 03 83 2
164 First cushion voltage for restart 04 84 2
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2
166 Output current detection signal retention time 06 86 2
167 Output current detection operation selection 07 87 2
168 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
169 170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2 171 Operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2
172 User group registered display/ batch clear 0C 8C 2
173 User group registration 0D 8D 2 174 User group clear 0E 8E 2 178 STF terminal function selection 12 92 2 179 STR terminal function selection 13 93 2 180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2 181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2 182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2 183 RT terminal function selection 17 97 2 184 AU terminal function selection 18 98 2 185 JOG terminal function selection 19 99 2 186 CS terminal function selection 1A 9A 2 187 MRS terminal function selection 1B 9B 2 188 STOP terminal function selection 1C 9C 2 189 RES terminal function selection 1D 9D 2 190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2 191 SU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
314
192 IPF terminal function selection 20 A0 2
193 OL terminal function selection 21 A1 2
194 FU terminal function selection 22 A2 2 195 ABC1 terminal function selection 23 A3 2 196 ABC2 terminal function selection 24 A4 2 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2
234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2
237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 2D AD 2
238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 2E AE 2
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2
241 Analog input display unit switchover 31 B1 2
242 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 2) 32 B2 2
243 Terminal 1 added compensation amount (terminal 4) 33 B3 2
244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2
251 Output phase failure protection selection 3B BB 2
252 Override bias 3C BC 2
253 Override gain 3D BD 2
255 Life alarm status display 3F BF 2
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 40 C0 2
257 Control circuit capacitor life display 41 C1 2
258 Main circuit capacitor life display 42 C2 2
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 43 C3 2
261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2
262 Subtracted frequency at deceleration start 46 C6 2
263 Subtraction starting frequency 47 C7 2
264 Power-failure deceleration time 1 48 C8 2
265 Power-failure deceleration time 2 49 C9 2
266 Power failure deceleration time switchover frequency 4A CA 2
267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
270 Stop-on contact/load torque high-speed frequency control selection
4E CE 2
271 High-speed setting maximum current 4F CF 2
272 Middle-speed setting minimum current 50 D0 2
273 Current averaging range 51 D1 2
274 Current averaging filter time constant 52 D2 2
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
315
275 Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed multiplying factor
53 D3 2
278 Brake opening frequency 56 D6 2 279 Brake opening current 57 D7 2
280 Brake opening current detection time 58 D8 2
281 Brake operation time at start 59 D9 2 282 Brake operation frequency 5A DA 2 283 Brake operation time at stop 5B DB 2
284 Deceleration detection function selection 5C DC 2
285 Overspeed detection frequency 5D DD 2 286 Droop gain 5E DE 2 287 Droop filter time constant 5F DF 2 291 Pulse train I/O selection 63 E3 2
292 Automatic acceleration/ deceleration 64 E4 2
293 Acceleration/deceleration time individual calculation selection 65 E5 2
294 UV avoidance voltage gain 66 E6 2
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 6B EB 2
300 BCD input bias 00 80 3
301 BCD input gain 01 81 3
302 BIN input bias 02 82 3
303 BIN input gain 03 83 3
304 Digital input and analog input compensation enable/disable selection
04 84 3
305 Read timing operation selection
05 85 3
306 Analog output signal selection
06 86 3
307 Setting for zero analog output
07 87 3
308 Setting for maximum analog output
08 88 3
309 Analog output signal voltage/ current switchover
09 89 3
310 Analog meter voltage output selection
0A 8A 3
311 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output
0B 8B 3
312 Setting for maximum analog meter voltage output
0C 8C 3
313 DO0 output selection 0D 8D 3
314 DO1 output selection 0E 8E 3
315 DO2 output selection 0F 8F 3
316 DO3 output selection 10 90 3
317 DO4 output selection 11 91 3
318 DO5 output selection 12 92 3
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
316
319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3
320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3
321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3
322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3
323 AM0 0V adjustment 17 97 3
324 AM1 0mA adjustment 18 98 3
329 Digital input unit selection 1D 9D 3 331 RS-485 communication station 1F 9F 3
332 RS-485 communication speed 20 A0 3
333 RS-485 communication stop bit length 21 A1 3
334 RS-485 communication parity check selection 22 A2 3
335 RS-485 communication retry count 23 A3 3
336 RS-485 communication check time interval 24 A4 3
337 RS-485 communication waiting time setting 25 A5 3
338 Communication operation command source 26 A6 3
339 Communication speed command source 27 A7 3
340 Communication startup mode selection 28 A8 3
341 RS-485 communication CR/LF selection 29 A9 3
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3
343 Communication error count 2B AB 3 345 DeviceNet address 2D AD 3
346 DeviceNet baud rate 2E AE 3
349 Communication reset selection
31 B1 3
350 Stop position command selection
32 B2 3
351 Orientation speed 33 B3 3
352 Creep speed 34 B4 3
353 Creep switchover position
35 B5 3
354 Position loop switchover position
36 B6 3
355 DC injection brake start position
37 B7 3
356 Internal stop position command
38 B8 3
357 Orientation in-position zone 39 B9 3
358 Servo torque selection 3A BA 3
359 Encoder rotation direction
3B BB 3
360 16 bit data selection 3C BC 3
361 Position shift 3D BD 3
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
317
362 Orientation position loop gain 3E BE 3
363 Completion signal output delay time
3F BF 3
364 Encoder stop check time
40 C0 3
365 Orientation limit 41 C1 3
366 Recheck time 42 C2 3
367 Speed feedback range 43 C3 3
368 Feedback gain 44 C4 3
369 Number of encoder pulses
45 C5 3
374 Overspeed detection level
4A CA 3
376 Encoder signal loss detection enable/disable selection
4C CC 3
380 Acceleration S-pattern 1 50 D0 3
381 Deceleration S-pattern 1 51 D1 3
382 Acceleration S-pattern 2 52 D2 3
383 Deceleration S-pattern 2 53 D3 3
384 Input pulse division scaling factor 54 D4 3
385 Frequency for 0 input pulse 55 D5 3
386 Frequency for maximum input pulse 56 D6 3
387 Initial communication delay time
57 D7 3
388 Send time interval at hart beat
58 D8 3
389 Minimum sending time at hart beat
59 D9 3
390 % setting reference frequency
5A DA 3
391 Receive time interval at hart beat
5B DB 3
392 Event driven detection width 5C DC 3
495 Remote output selection 5F DF 4
496 Remote output data 1 60 E0 4 497 Remote output data 2 61 E1 4
500 Communication error execution waiting time
00 80 5
501 Communication error occurrence count display
01 81 5
502 Stop mode selection at communication error
02 82 5
503 Maintenance timer 03 83 5
504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 04 84 5
505 Speed setting reference 05 85 5
516 S-pattern time at a start of acceleration 10 90 5
517 S-pattern time at a completion of acceleration 11 91 5
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
318
518 S-pattern time at a start of deceleraiton 12 92 5
519 S-pattern time at a completion of deceleraiton 13 93 5
539 Modbus-RTU commnunication check time interval 27 A7 5
541 Frequency command sign selection (CC-Link)
29 A9 5
542 Communication station number (CC-Link)
2A AA 5
543 Baud rate (CC-Link) 2B AB 5
544 CC-Link extended setting 2C AC 5
549 Protocol selection 31 B1 5
550 NET mode operation command source selection 32 B2 5
551 PU mode operation command source selection 33 B3 5
555 Current average time 37 B7 5
556 Data output mask time 38 B8 5
557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current 39 B9 5
563 Energization time carrying-over times 3F BF 5
564 Operating time carrying-over times 40 C0 5
571 Holding time at a start 47 C7 5
575 Output interruption detection time 4B CB 5
576 Output interruption detection level 4C CC 5
577 Output interruption cancel level 4D CD 5
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0B 8B 6
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6
684 Tuning data increments switchover 54 D4 6
811 Set resolution switchover 0B 8B 8
849 Analog input off set adjustment 31 B1 8
858 Terminal 4 function assignment 3A BA 8 859 Torque current 3B BB 8 864 Torque detection 40 C0 8 865 Low speed detection 41 C1 8
866 Torque monitoring reference 42 C2 8 867 AM output filter 43 C3 8
868 Terminal 1 function assignment 44 C4 8
872 Input phase failure protection selection 48 C8 8
875 Fault definition 4B CB 8
882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 52 D2 8
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8
884 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration detection sensitivity 54 D4 8
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
319
885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value
55 D5 8
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 56 D6 8
888 Free parameter 1 58 D8 8 889 Free parameter 2 59 D9 8
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 5B DB 8
892 Load factor 5C DC 8
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 5D DD 8
894 Control selection during commercial power-supply operation
5E DE 8
895 Power saving rate reference value 5F DF 8
896 Power unit cost 60 E0 8
897 Power saving monitor average time 61 E1 8
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 62 E2 8
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 63 E3 8
C0 (900) FM terminal calibration 5C DC 1
C1 (901) AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1
C2 (902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
125 (903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
C5 (904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1
126 (905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
989 Parameter copy alarm release 59 D9 9 990 PU buzzer control 5A DA 9
991 PU contrast adjustment 5B DB 9
Parameter Name
Instruction Code * 1
Model based Correspondence Table *2
Pa ra
m et
er C
op y
*3
Pa ra
m et
er C
le ar
*3
Al l P
ar am
et er
C le
ar *3
R ea
d
W rit
e
Ex te
nd ed
FR-B FR-B3
V/F Control Advanced magnetic flux vector control
REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
For Maximum Safety Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life. When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
Related manuals for Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the A700 Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Mitsubishi A700 as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi A700. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi A700 FR-B-110K-400V Inverter Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.